Graphical User Interface

English Use this manual in combination with the operating guide displayed on the GUI screen. GUI Menu Operation (vpage 24) GUI Menu Map (vpage 25) Language (vpage 40) Remote Control Unit Operations (vpage 68)

Deutsch Verwenden Sie dieses Handbuch zusammen mit den Bedienungsanweisungen auf dem GUI- Bildschirm. GUI-Menübedienung (vSeite 24) GUI-Menüplan (vSeite 25) AV SURROUND RECEIVER Sprache (vSeite 40) Bedienung mit der Fernbedienung (vSeite 68)

Français Utilisez ce manuel en même temps que le guide AVR-4308 d’utilisation affiché sur l’écran GUI (Interface graphique). Fonctionnement du menu de l’interface graphique GUI Owner’s Manual (vpage 24) Plan du menu de l’interface graphique GUI (vpage 25) Bedienungsanleitung Langue (vpage 40) Fonctionnement de la télécommande (vpage 68) Manuel de l’Utilisateur

Book 1 v English Deutsch Français PRESET CODE

Book 2 Italiano Español Nederlands Svenska ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANCAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA

n SAFETY PRECAUTIONS • DECLARATION DE CONFORMITE CAUTION: Par la présente, D&M Holdings Inc., Denon Brand Company déclare To completely disconnect this product from the mains, disconnect que l’appareil AVR-4308 est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux the plug from the wall socket outlet. CAUTION autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE, e conforme alle The mains plug is used to completely interrupt the power supply to RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK seguenti normative: EN60065, EN55013, EN55020, EN55022, EN55024, EN61000-3-2, the unit and must be within easy access by the user. DO NOT OPEN EN61000-3-3, EN300328, EN301489-01, EN301489-17 e EN50385. La déclaration de conformité pourra être consultée auprès de notre VORSICHT: CAUTION: représentant en Europe, DENON Europe. Um dieses Gerät vollständig von der Stromversorgung abzutrennen, TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE ziehen Sie bitte den Stecker aus der Wandsteckdose. COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. • DICHIARAZIONE DI CONFORMITÀ Der Netzstecker wird verwendet, um die Stromversorgung zum Con la presente D&M Holdings Inc., Denon Brand Company dichiara REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. Gerät völlig zu unterbrechen; er muss für den Benutzer gut und che questo AVR-4308 è con-forme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE, e conforme alle einfach zu erreichen sein. triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of seguenti normative: uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure PRECAUTION: that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric EN60065, EN55013, EN55020, EN55022, EN55024, EN61000-3-2, Pour déconnecter complètement ce produit du courant secteur, EN61000-3-3, EN300328, EN301489-01, EN301489-17 e EN50385. shock to persons. débranchez la prise de la prise murale. La dichiarazione di conformità può essere consultata presso il nostro The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended rappresentante europeo, DENON Europe. La prise secteur est utilisée pour couper complètement to alert the user to the presence of important operating QUESTO PRODOTTO E’ CONFORME l’alimentation de l’appareil et l’utilisateur doit pouvoir y accéder and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature facilement. accompanying the appliance. AL D.M. 28/08/95 N. 548 • DECLARACIÓN DE CONFORMIDAD ATTENZIONE: WARNING: Por la presente, D&M Holdings Inc., Denon Brand Company, declara que TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT Per scollegare completamente questo prodotto dalla rete di este AVR-4308 cumple con los requisitos esenciales y otras exigencias alimentazione elettrica, scollegare la spina dalla relativa presa a muro. EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. relevantes de la Directiva 1999/5/EC, esta conforme con los siguientes La spina di rete viene utilizzata per interrompere completamente estandares: EN60065, EN55013, EN55020, EN55022, EN55024, EN61000-3-2, l’alimentazione all’unità e deve essere facilmente accessibile EN61000-3-3, EN300328, EN301489-01, EN301489-17 y EN50385. all’utente. Puede consultar a nuestro representante europeo, DENON Europe, acerca R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC PRECAUCIÓN: de la declaración de conformidad. This product may be operated in the following countries; Para desconectar completamente este producto de la alimentación AT BE CZ DK FI • EENVORMIGHEIDSVERKLARING eléctrica, desconecte el enchufe del enchufe de la pared. FR DE GR HU IE Hierbij verklaart D&M Holdings Inc., Denon Brand Company dat het toestel El enchufe de la alimentación eléctrica se utiliza para interrumpir por IT NL PL PT SK AVR-4308 in overeenstemming is met de essentiële eisen en de andere completo el suministro de alimentación eléctrica a la unidad y debe ES SE GB NO CH relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG, in overeenstemming is met de encontrarse en un lugar al que el usuario tenga fácil acceso. de volgende normen: EN60065, EN55013, EN55020, EN55022, EN55024, EN61000-3-2, WAARSCHUWING: EN61000-3-3, EN300328, EN301489-01, EN301489-17 en EN50385. • DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY Om de voeding van dit product volledig te onderbreken moet de De eenvormigheidsverklaring mag worden geconsulteerd aan onze Hereby, D&M Holdings Inc., Denon Brand Company declares that this stekker uit het stopcontact worden getrokken. Europese vertegenwoordiger, DENON Europe. product AVR-4308 is in compliance with the essential requirements and De netstekker wordt gebruikt om de stroomtoevoer naar het toestel other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC, in conformity with the • ÖVERENSSTÄMMELSESINTYG volledig te onderbreken en moet voor de gebruiker gemakkelijk following standards; Denna utrustning är i överensstämmelse med de väsentliga kraven och bereikbaar zijn. EN60065, EN55013, EN55020, EN55022, EN55024, EN61000-3-2, andra relevanta bestämmelser i Direktiv 1999/5/EC, uppfyller foljande EN61000-3-3, EN300328, EN301489-01, EN301489-17 and EN50385. standarder: FÖRSIKTIHETSMÅTT: The declaration of conformity may be consulted to our European EN60065, EN55013, EN55020, EN55022, EN55024, EN61000-3-2, Koppla loss stickproppen från eluttaget för att helt skilja produkten representative, DENON Europe. EN61000-3-3, EN300328, EN301489-01, EN301489-17 och EN50385. från nätet. EU-konformitetsintyget kan på begäran fås från DENON Europe, vår • ÜBEREINSTIMMUNGSERKLÄRUNG Stickproppen används för att helt bryta strömförsörjningen till representant i Europe. Hiermit erklärt D&M Holdings Inc., Denon Brand Company, dass sich apparaten, och den måste vara lättillgänglig för användaren. das Gerät AVR-4308 in Übereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG befindet, den folgenden Standards entspricht: EN60065, EN55013, EN55020, EN55022, EN55024, EN61000-3-2, DENON EUROPE EN61000-3-3, EN300328, EN301489-01, EN301489-17 und EN50385. Division of D&M Germany GmbH Wenden Sie sich bei Fragen zur Konformitätserklärung an unseren An der Landwehr 19, Nettetal, europäischen Vertreter, DENON Europe. D-41334 Germany

I SVENSKA NEDERLANDS ESPAÑOL ITALIANO FRANCAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH n NOTE ON USE / HINWEISE ZUM GEBRAUCH / OBSERVATIONS RELATIVES A L’UTILISATION / NOTE SULL’USO / NOTAS SOBRE EL USO / ALVORENS TE GEBRUIKEN / OBSERVERA ANGÅENDE ANVÄNDNINGEN

CAUTION: • The ventilation should not be impeded by covering the ventilation openings with items, such as newspapers, tablecloths, curtains, etc. • No naked flame sources, such as lighted candles, should be placed on the unit. • Observe and follow local regulations regarding battery disposal. • Do not expose the unit to dripping or splashing fluids. • Do not place objects filled with liquids, such as vases, on the unit. ACHTUNG: • Die Belüftung sollte auf keinen Fall durch das Abdecken der Belüftungsöffnungen durch • Do not let foreign objects into the unit. Gegenstände wie beispielsweise Zeitungen, Tischtücher, Vorhänge o. Ä. behindert • Keep the unit free from moisture, water, and dust. • Lassen Sie keine fremden Gegenstände in das Gerät kommen. werden. • Avoid high temperatures. • Halten Sie das Gerät von Feuchtigkeit, Wasser und Staub • Ne pas laisser des objets étrangers dans l’appareil. • Auf dem Gerät sollten keinerlei direkte Feuerquellen wie beispielsweise angezündete Allow for sufficient heat dispersion when installed in a rack. fern. • Non inserite corpi estranei all’interno dell’unità. Kerzen aufgestellt werden. • Vermeiden Sie hohe Temperaturen. • Protéger l’appareil contre l’humidité, l’eau et la poussière. • No deje objetos extraños dentro del equipo. • Bitte beachten Sie bei der Entsorgung der Batterien die örtlich geltenden Beachten Sie, dass eine ausreichende Belüftung gewährleistet • Tenete l’unità lontana dall’umidità, dall’acqua e dalla • Laat geen vreemde voorwerpen in dit apparaat vallen. Umweltbestimmungen. wird, wenn das Gerät auf ein Regal gestellt wird. polvere. • Se till att främmande föremål inte tränger in i apparaten. • Das Gerät sollte keiner tropfenden oder spritzenden Flüssigkeit ausgesetzt werden. • Eviter des températures élevées. • Mantenga el equipo libre de humedad, agua y polvo. • Auf dem Gerät sollten keine mit Flüssigkeit gefüllten Behälter wie beispielsweise Vasen Tenir compte d’une dispersion de chaleur suffisante lors de • Laat geen vochtigheid, water of stof in het apparaat aufgestellt werden. l’installation sur une étagère. binnendringen. • Evitate di esporre l’unità a temperature elevate. • Utsätt inte apparaten för fukt, vatten och damm. ATTENTION: Assicuratevi che vi sia un’adeguata dispersione del calore • La ventilation ne doit pas être gênée en recouvrant les ouvertures de la ventilation avec des quando installate l’unità in un mobile per componenti audio. objets tels que journaux, rideaux, tissus, etc. • Evite altas temperaturas. • Aucune flamme nue, par exemple une bougie, ne doit être placée sur l’appareil. Permite la suficiente dispersión del calor cuando está • Veillez à respecter les lois en vigueur lorsque vous jetez les piles usagées. instalado en la consola. • L’appareil ne doit pas être exposé à l’eau ou à l’humidité. • Vermijd hoge temperaturen. • Ne pas poser d’objet contenant du liquide, par exemple un vase, sur l’appareil. Zorg er bij installatie in een audiorack voor, dat de door • Do not let insecticides, benzene, and thinner come in het toestel geproduceerde warmte goed kan worden ATTENZIONE: contact with the unit. • Le aperture di ventilazione non devono essere ostruite coprendole con oggetti, quali afgevoerd. • Lassen Sie das Gerät nicht mit Insektiziden, Benzin oder • Undvik höga temperaturer. • Unplug the power cord when not using the unit for long giornali, tovaglie, tende e così via. Verdünnungsmitteln in Berührung kommen. • Non posizionate sull’unità fiamme libere, come ad esempio candele accese. Se till att det finns möjlighet till god värmeavledning vid periods of time. • Ne pas mettre en contact des insecticides, du benzène et montering i ett rack. • Wenn das Gerät längere Zeit nicht verwendet werden soll, • Prestate attenzione agli aspetti legati alla tutela dell’ambiente nello smaltimento delle un diluant avec l’appareil. batterie. trennen Sie das Netzkabel vom Netzstecker. • Assicuratevi che l’unità non entri in contatto con insetticidi, • Débrancher le cordon d’alimentation lorsque l’appareil n’est • L’apparecchiatura non deve essere esposta a gocciolii o spruzzi. benzolo o solventi. • Non posizionate sull’unità alcun oggetto contenente liquidi, come ad esempio i vasi. pas utilisé pendant de longues périodes. • No permita el contacto de insecticidas, gasolina y diluyentes • Scollegate il cavo di alimentazione quando prevedete di non con el equipo. PRECAUCIÓN: utilizzare l’unità per un lungo periodo di tempo. • Voorkom dat insecticiden, benzeen of verfverdunner met dit • La ventilación no debe quedar obstruida por haberse cubierto las aperturas con objetos • Desconecte el cordón de energía cuando no utilice el equipo toestel in contact komen. como periódicos, manteles, cortinas, etc. por mucho tiempo. • Se till att inte insektsmedel på spraybruk, bensen och • No debe colocarse sobre el aparato ninguna fuente inflamable sin protección, como velas • Neem altijd het netsnoer uit het stopkontakt wanneer het thinner kommer i kontakt med apparatens hölje. encendidas. apparaat gedurende een lange periode niet wordt gebruikt. • A la hora de deshacerse de las pilas, respete la normativa para el cuidado del medio • Koppla loss nätkabeln om apparaten inte kommer att ambiente. användas i lång tid. • No exponer el aparato al goteo o salpicaduras cuando se utilice. • Handle the power cord carefully. • No colocar sobre el aparato objetos llenos de líquido, como jarros. Hold the plug when unplugging the cord. • Gehen Sie vorsichtig mit dem Netzkabel um. WAARSCHUWING: Halten Sie das Kabel am Stecker, wenn Sie den Stecker • De ventilatie mag niet worden belemmerd door de ventilatieopeningen af te dekken met herausziehen. bijvoorbeeld kranten, een tafelkleed, gordijnen, enz. • Manipuler le cordon d’alimentation avec précaution. • Plaats geen open vlammen, bijvoorbeeld een brandende kaars, op het apparaat. Tenir la prise lors du débranchement du cordon. • Houd u steeds aan de milieuvoorschriften wanneer u gebruikte batterijen wegdoet. • Manneggiate il cavo di alimentazione con attenzione. • Stel het apparaat niet bloot aan druppels of spatten. Tenete ferma la spina quando scollegate il cavo dalla presa. • Never disassemble or modify the unit in any way. • Plaats geen voorwerpen gevuld met water, bijvoorbeeld een vaas, op het apparaat. * (For apparatuses with ventilation holes) • Maneje el cordón de energía con cuidado. • Versuchen Sie niemals das Gerät auseinander zu nehmen Sostenga el enchufe cuando desconecte el cordón de • Do not obstruct the ventilation holes. oder zu verändern. OBSERVERA: energía. • Decken Sie den Lüftungsbereich nicht ab. • Ne jamais démonter ou modifier l’appareil d’une manière ou • Ventilationen bör inte förhindras genom att täcka för ventilationsöppningarna med föremål • Hanteer het netsnoer voorzichtig. • Ne pas obstruer les trous d’aération. d’une autre. såsom tidningar, bordsdukar, gardiner osv. Houd het snoer bij de stekker vast wanneer deze moet • Non coprite i fori di ventilazione. • Non smontate né modificate l’unità in alcun modo. • Inga blottade brandkällor, såsom tända ljus, får placeras på apparaten. worden aan- of losgekoppeld. • No obstruya los orificios de ventilación. • Nunca desarme o modifique el equipo de ninguna manera. • Tänk på miljöaspekterna när du bortskaffar batterier. • Hantera nätkabeln varsamt. • De ventilatieopeningen mogen niet worden beblokkeerd. • Dit toestel mag niet gedemonteerd of aangepast worden. • Apparaten får inte utsättas för vätska. Håll i kabeln när den kopplas från el-uttaget. • Täpp inte till ventilationsöppningarna. • Ta inte isär apparaten och försök inte bygga om den. • Placera inte föremål fyllda med vätska, t.ex. vaser, på apparaten.

II ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANCAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA

A NOTE ABOUT RECYCLING: 1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS PRODUCT This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets R&TTE directive This product’s packaging materials are recyclable and can be reused. Please dispose of any materials requirements. Modification of the product could result in hazardous Radio and EMC radiation. in accordance with the local recycling regulations. 2. CAUTION When discarding the unit, comply with local rules or regulations. • Separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this product and all persons. Batteries should never be thrown away or incinerated but disposed of in accordance with the local • This product and its antenna must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or regulations concerning battery disposal. transmitter. This product and the supplied accessories, excluding the batteries, constitute the applicable product according to the WEEE directive. 1. WICHTIGER HINWEIS: NEHMEN SIE KEINE VERÄNDERUNGEN AN DIESEM PRODUKT VOR Wenn dieses Produkt entsprechend dieser Bedienungsanleitung aufgebaut wird, entspricht es den Anforderungen HINWEIS ZUM RECYCLING: der R&TTE-Richtlinie. Veränderungen am Produkt können zu gefährlicher Funk- und EMV-Strahlung führen. Das Verpackungsmaterial dieses Produktes ist zum Recyceln geeignet und kann wieder verwendet werden. Bitte 2. VORSICHT entsorgen Sie alle Materialien entsprechend der örtlichen Recycling-Vorschriften. • Zwischen der Antenne dieses Produkts und Personen muss ein Schutzabstand von 20 cm eingehalten werden. Beachten Sie bei der Entsorgung des Gerätes die örtlichen Vorschriften und Bestimmungen. • Dieses Produkt und seine Antenne dürfen nicht neben anderen Antennen oder Sendern aufgestellt oder Die Batterien dürfen nicht in den Hausmüll geworfen oder verbrannt werden; bitte entsorgen Sie die Batterien gemäß zusammen mit ihnen verwendet werden. der örtlichen Vorschriften. Dieses Produkt und das im Lieferumfang enthaltene Zubehör (mit Ausnahme der Batterien!) entsprechen der WEEE- 1. MISE EN GARDE IMPORTANTE : NE JAMAIS MODIFIER CE PRODUIT Direktive. Si toutes les consignes indiquées dans ce mode ont été respectées pendant son installation, ce produit est conforme aux directives R&TTE. Toute modification du produit risquerait alors de générer des radiations radio et UNE REMARQUE CONCERNANT LE RECYCLAGE: EMC dangereuses. Les matériaux d’emballage de ce produit sont recyclables et peuvent être réutilisés. Veuillez disposer des matériaux 2. ATTENTION conformément aux lois sur le recyclage en vigueur. • L’antenne de l’appareil devra être située à une distance de 20 cm au moins des personnes. Lorsque vous mettez cet appareil au rebut, respectez les lois ou réglementations en vigueur. • Ce produit ainsi que son antenne ne devront en aucun cas être utilisés à proximité d’une autre antenne ou Les piles ne doivent jamais être jetées ou incinérées, mais mises au rebut conformément aux lois en vigueur sur la transmetteur. mise au rebut des piles. 1. AVVERTENZA IMPORTANTE: NON MODIFICARE QUESTO PRODOTTO Ce produit et les accessoires inclus, à l’exception des piles, sont des produits conformes à la directive DEEE. Se installato come indicato nelle istruzioni del presente manuale, questo prodotto soddisfa i requisiti della direttiva NOTA RELATIVA AL RICICLAGGIO: R&TTE. Eventuali modifiche apportate al prodotto potrebbero causare pericolose radiazioni radio ed EMC. I materiali di imballaggio di questo prodotto sono riutilizzabili e riciclabili. Smaltire i materiali conformemente alle 2. ATTENZIONE normative locali sul riciclaggio. • È necessario mantenere una distanza minima di 20 cm tra l’antenna di questo prodotto e le persone. • Questo prodotto e la relativa antenna non devono essere posizionati in prossimità di altre antenne o trasmettitori Per lo smaltimento dell’unità, osservare le normative o le leggi locali in vigore. e non devono essere utilizzati congiuntamente a questi ultimi. Non gettare le batterie, né incenerirle, ma smaltirle conformemente alla normativa locale sui rifiuti chimici. Questo prodotto e gli accessori inclusi nell’imballaggio sono applicabili alla direttiva RAEE, ad eccezione delle batterie. 1. NOTA IMPORTANTE: NO MODIFIQUE ESTE PRODUCTO Este producto, si es instalado de acuerdo con las instrucciones contenidas en este manual, cumple los requisitos ACERCA DEL RECICLAJE: de la directiva R&TTE. La modificación del producto puede producir radiación de Radio y EMC peligrosa. Los materiales de embalaje de este producto son reciclables y se pueden volver a utilizar. Disponga de estos materiales 2. PRECAUCIÓN siguiendo los reglamentos de reciclaje de su localidad. • Se debe mantener una separación de al menos 20 cm entre la antena del producto y las personas. Cuando se deshaga de la unidad, cumpla con las reglas o reglamentos locales. • Este producto y su antena no debe instalarse ni utilizarse conjuntamente con otra antena o transmisor. Las pilas nunca deberán tirarse ni incinerarse. Deberá disponer de ellas siguiendo los reglamentos de su localidad relacionados con los desperdicios químicos. 1. BELANGRIJKE MEDEDELING: BRENG AAN DIT PRODUCT GEEN AANPASSINGEN AAN Este producto junto con los accesorios empaquetados es el producto aplicable a la directiva RAEE excepto pilas. Dit product, indien geïnstalleerd volgens de aanwijzingen in deze gebruiksaanwijzing, voldoet aan de vereisten van de R&TTE-richtlijn. Aanpassing van dit product kan gevaarlijke radio- en EMC-straling tot gevolg hebben. EEN AANTEKENING MET BETREKKING TOT DE RECYCLING: 2. LET OP Het inpakmateriaal van dit product is recycleerbaar en kan opnieuw gebruikt worden. Er wordt verzocht om zich van • Houd tussen antenne en personen altijd een afstand van tenminste 20 cm aan. elk afvalmateriaal te ontdoen volgens de plaatselijke voorschriften. • Dit product en zijn antenne mogen niet in de buurt van een andere antenne of zender worden geplaatst of in Volg voor het wegdoen van de speler de voorschriften voor de verwijdering van wit- en bruingoed op. combinatie daarmee worden gebruikt. Batterijen mogen nooit worden weggegooid of verbrand, maar moeten volgens de plaatselijke voorschriften betreffende chemisch afval worden verwijderd. 1. VIKTIGT: APPARATEN FÅR INTE MODIFIERAS Op dit product en de meegeleverde accessoires, m.u.v. de batterijen is de richtlijn voor afgedankte elektrische en Under förutsättning att apparaten installeras enligt anvisningarna i denna bruksanvisning, uppfyller denna kraven i R&TTE-direktivet. Ev. modifiering av apparaten kan resultera i farlig radio- och elektromagnetisk strålning. elektronische apparaten (WEEE) van toepassing. 2. FÖRSIKTIGT OBSERVERA ANGÅENDE ÅTERVINNING: • Se till att det finns ett avstånd på minst 20 cm mellan apparatens antenn och personer i omgivningen. Produktens emballage är återvinningsbart och kan återanvändas. Kassera det enligt lokala återvinningsbestämmelser. • Apparaten och dess antenn får inte placeras eller användas i närheten av andra antenner eller sändare. När du kasserar enheten ska du göra det i överensstämmelse med lokala regler och bestämmelser. Batterier får absolut inte kastas i soporna eller brännas. Kassera dem enligt lokala bestämmelser för kemiskt avfall. Denna apparat och de tillbehör som levereras med den uppfyller gällande WEEE-direktiv, med undantag av batterierna.

III ENGLISH Contents GUI Menu Operations Zone Setup·····················································································37 Example of the Display of the GUI Mark at a Title·····················24 a ZONE2·····················································································37 Example of Display of Default Values··········································24 s ZONE3·····················································································37 Getting Started Examples of GUI Screen Displays················································24 Option Setup··················································································37 Accessories·······················································································3 Example: Browse Menu (Top Menu)············································24 a Amp Assign··············································································37 Cautions on Handling······································································3 Example: Menus with Illustrations (Auto Setup)···························24 s Volume Control········································································38 Cautions on Installation··································································3 Cursor Position Display·································································24 d Source Delete··········································································38 About the Remote Control Unit·····················································4 Operations······················································································24 f GUI···························································································38 Inserting the Batteries·····································································4 GUI Menu Map···············································································25 g Quick Select Name··································································38 Operating Range of the Remote Control Unit·································4 h Trigger Out 1············································································38 Part Names and Functions······························································5 j Trigger Out 2············································································38 Auto Setup Front Panel······················································································5 k Digital Out················································································39 Display····························································································5 Preparations···················································································26 l Remote ID················································································39 Rear Panel·······················································································6 Auto Setup·····················································································27 A0 2Way Remote··········································································39 Remote Control Unit·······································································7 a Auto Setup···············································································27 A1 Dimmer····················································································39 Error Messages········································································28 A2 Setup Lock···············································································39 s Option······················································································28 A3 Maintenance Mode··································································39 Connections d Parameter Check······································································28 A4 Firmware Update·····································································39 Preparations·····················································································8 A5 Add New Feature·····································································40 Cables Used for Connections·························································8 Manual Setup Language························································································40 Video Conversion Function······························································9 Speaker Setup···············································································29 Speaker Connections···································································· 10 a Speaker Configuration······························································29 Speaker Installation······································································· 10 Source Select s Subwoofer Mode·····································································29 Speaker Connections·······························································10, 11 Input Source Selection····························································40, 41 d Distance···················································································29 Connecting Equipment with HDMI connectors·························· 12 Settings Related to Playing Input Sources··································41 f Channel Level··········································································30 Connecting the Monitor································································ 13 a Play··························································································41 g Crossover Frequency·······························································30 Connecting the Playback Components······································· 13 s Auto Preset··············································································41 h Surround Speaker····································································30 DVD Player···················································································· 13 d Preset Skip···············································································41 HDMI Setup····················································································31 Record Player················································································ 14 f Preset Name············································································41 a i/p Scaler··················································································31 CD Player······················································································ 14 g Input Mode··············································································42 s Resolution················································································31 iPod®····························································································· 14 h Rename····················································································42 d Progressive Mode····································································31 TV/CABLE Tuner············································································ 15 j Other························································································42 f Aspect······················································································31 Satellite Receiver·········································································· 15 k Playback Mode (iPod)·······························································42 g Color Space··············································································31 Connecting the Recording Components····································· 16 l Assign······················································································43 h RGB Range··············································································31 Digital Video Recorder··································································· 16 A0 Playback Mode·········································································43 j Auto Lip Sync···········································································31 Video Cassette Recorder······························································ 16 A1 Still Picture···············································································44 k Audio························································································31 CD Recorder / MD Recorder / Tape Deck······································ 17 A2 Auto Tune·················································································44 l Monitor Out·············································································31 Connections to Other Devices······················································ 17 A3 Tuning Aid················································································44 Audio Setup···················································································32 Components Equipped with a DENON LINK connector··············· 17 A4 DRC Value················································································44 a EXT. IN Setup···········································································32 Video Camera / Game Console·····················································18 s 2ch Direct/Stereo·····································································32 Component with Multi-channel Output connectors······················18 d Downmix Option······································································32 External Power Amplifier·······························································18 f Auto Surround Mode·······························································32 USB Port······················································································· 19 g Manual EQ···············································································32 Antenna terminals ········································································20 Network Setup···············································································33 Network Audio··············································································21 a Network Setup·································································33 ~ 36 Multi Zone·····················································································22 s Other························································································36 External Controller········································································22 d Network Information································································36 Connecting the Power Cord·························································23 Once Connections are Completed···············································23

 ENGLISH

Surround Modes Listening to FM/AM Broadcasts··················································52 Remote Control Unit Operations Standard Playback·········································································45 Basic Operation·············································································52 Main Remote Control Unit···························································68 Surround Playback of 2-channel Sources······································45 Presetting Radio Stations (Preset Memory)··································52 Operating DENON Audio Components·········································68 Playing Multi-channel Sources (Dolby Digital, DTS, etc.)··············45 Listening to Preset Stations··························································53 Presetting······················································································68 DSP Simulation Playback·····························································45 RDS (Radio Data System)·····························································53 Operating Preset Components·············································68 ~ 70 Stereo Playback·············································································46 RDS Search···················································································53 Setting the Remote ID··································································71 Direct Playback··············································································46 PTY Search····················································································54 Learning Function··········································································71 Playback in the PURE DIRECT Mode············································46 TP Search······················································································54 System Call Function·····································································72 RT (Radio Text)···············································································55 Punch Through Function································································72 Listening to DAB broadcasts························································55 Setting the Time the Backlight Stays Lit········································73 Parameter Basic Operation·············································································56 Adjusting the Backlight’s Brightness·············································73 Audio······························································································46 Station Order Selection·································································56 Resetting the Main Remote Control Unit······································73 a Surround Parameters·······················································46 ~ 48 Check the DAB Reception Information·········································57 Sub Remote Control Unit Operations···································74, 75 s Tone·························································································48 DAB Initialize·················································································57 Switching Zones············································································ 76 d Room EQ·················································································48 iPod® Playback··············································································57 Setting the Zone for Which the Sub Remote Control Unit is Used f RESTORER···············································································48 Basic Operation·············································································57 (ZONE SELECT LOCK Mode)························································ 76 g Night Mode··············································································49 Listening to Music········································································58 Setting the Remote ID·································································· 76 h Audio Delay··············································································49 Viewing Still Pictures or Videos on the iPod··································58 Resetting the Settings··································································· 76 Picture Adjust·················································································49 Playing Network Audio or USB Memory Devices·······················59 a Contrast···················································································49 Basic Operation·············································································60 Amp Assign / Multi-Zone Connections and Operations s Brightness················································································49 Listening to Internet Radio····························································61 d Chroma Level···········································································49 Presetting Internet Radio Stations················································61 Multi-Zone Settings with the Amp Assign Function··········77 ~ 80 f Hue··························································································49 Registering Internet Radio Stations as Your Favorites···················61 Multi-Zone Settings and Operations with Zone Pre-out Output····80 Playing Files Stored on a Computer··············································62 Multi-Zone Operations··································································81 Information Playing Files Stored on USB Memory Devices·······················62, 63 Turning the Power On and Off······················································81 Selecting the Input Source····························································81 Status·····························································································49 Operating the AVR-4308 Using a Browser (Web control)·······63, 64 Adjusting the Volume····································································81 a MAIN ZONE·············································································49 Turning off the Sound Temporarily·················································81 s ZONE2/3/4···············································································49 Other Operations and Functions Audio Input Signal·········································································50 Other Operations···········································································65 HDMI Information··········································································50 Other Information·································································82 ~ 93 Playing Super Audio CD································································65 a Signal Information····································································50 Recording on an External Device (REC OUT mode)······················65 s Monitor1··················································································50 Convenient Functions···································································66 Troubleshooting····································································94 ~ 97 d Monitor2··················································································50 Channel Level················································································66 Auto Surround···············································································50 Fader Function··············································································66 Specifications···········································································97, 98 Quick Select···················································································50 Quick Select Function···································································66 Preset Station················································································50 Personal Memory Plus Function···················································66 List of preset codes············································ End of this manual Last Function Memory··································································67 Playback Backup Memory············································································67 Preparations···················································································51 Resetting the Microprocessor·······················································67 Turning the Power On···································································51 Operations During Playback··························································51 Playing Video and Audio Equipment············································51 Basic Operation·············································································51

 ENGLISH Cautions on Handling Cautions on Installation Getting Started • Before turning the power switch on Note: Getting Started Check once again that all connections are correct and that there are For proper heat dispersal, do not install this unit in a confined no problems with the connection cables. space, such as a bookcase or similar enclosure.

• Power is supplied to some of the circuitry even when the unit is Connections Thank you for purchasing this DENON product. To ensure proper set to the standby mode. When traveling or leaving home for long b operation, please read these owner’s manual carefully before using Note periods of time, be sure to unplug the power cord from the power the product. outlet. b b After reading them, be sure to keep them for future reference. • About condensation

If there is a major difference in temperature between the inside of Setup the unit and the surroundings, condensation (dew) may form on b Accessories the operating parts inside the unit, causing the unit not to operate Playback Check that the following parts are supplied with the product. properly. If this happens, let the unit sit for an hour or two with the power Wall q Owner’s manual...... 1 turned off and wait until there is little difference in temperature before using the unit. w Service station list...... 1 Remote Control e Power cord (Cord length: Approx. 1.5 m)...... 1 • Cautions on using mobile phones r Main remote control (RC-1068)...... 1 Using a mobile phone near this unit may result in noise. If so, move t LR6/AA batteries (for RC-1068)...... 2 the mobile phone away from this unit when it is in use. y Sub remote control (RC-1070)...... 1 • Moving the unit u R03/AAA batteries (for RC-1070)...... 2 Turn off the power and unplug the power cord from the power

i Multi-Zone FM indoor antenna...... 1 outlet. o AM loop antenna...... 1 Next, disconnect the connection cables to other system units before Q0 DAB indoor antenna...... 1 moving the unit. Q1 Rod antenna for wireless LAN connection...... 1 • Note that the illustrations in these instructions may differ from the Q2 Setup microphone (Cord length: Approx. 7.6 m)...... 1 actual unit for explanation purposes. Information e r y Troubleshooting

i o Specifications

Q0 Q1 Q2

 ENGLISH Getting Started About the Remote Control Unit NOTE Operating Range of the Remote Control • Replace the batteries with new ones if the set does not operate even In addition to the AVR-4308, the included main remote control unit when the remote control unit is operated close to the unit. Unit (RC-1068) can also be used to operate the equipment listed below. • The supplied batteries are only for verifying operation. Point the remote control unit at the remote sensor when operating it. q DENON system components • When inserting the batteries, be sure to do so in the proper direction, w Non-DENON system components q w

Connections following the “ ” and “ ” marks in the battery compartment. • By setting the preset memory (vpage 68 ~ 70) • To prevent damage or leakage of battery fluid: • By using the learn function (vpage 71) • Do not use a new battery together with an old one. • Do not use two different types of batteries. Inserting the Batteries • Do not attempt to charge dry batteries.

Setup • Do not short-circuit, disassemble, heat or dispose of batteries in q flames. Lift the clasp and remove the rear lid. (RC-1070) • If the battery fluid should leak, carefully wipe the fluid off the inside (RC-1068) (RC-1070) 30° Playback of the battery compartment and insert new batteries. 30° • Remove the batteries from the remote control unit if it will not be in or use for long periods. • When replacing the batteries, have the new batteries ready and Approx. 7 m Remote Control insert them as quickly as possible. (RC-1068) NOTE The set may function improperly or the remote control unit may not w Load the two batteries properly as indicated by the marks in the operate if the remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight, Multi-Zone battery compartment. strong artificial light from an inverter type fluorescent lamp or infrared (RC-1068) (RC-1070) light. R03/AAA LR6/AA Information Troubleshooting e Put the rear cover back on. Specifications

 ENGLISH Part Names and Functions W8 INPUT MODE button··································· (42) E1 PURE DIRECT button··································· (46) Getting Started W9 RESTORER button······································· (48) E2 DSP SIMULATION button··························· (45) For buttons not explained here, see the page indicated in parentheses ( ). E0 DIRECT/STEREO button····························· (46) E3 STANDARD button······································ (45)

Front Panel Display Connections

Q5 Q1 o o i u y t Q8 Q7 Q6 Q4 Q3 Q2 Q0 i u y Setup Playback

Q0Q1Q2 Q3 Remote Control q w e r t

q Input signal indicators Q3 ADVANCED AL24 indicator w Input signal channel indicators This lights when Advanced AL24 Processing is These light when digital signals are input. activated (vpage 84).

e Information display Q4 D.LINK indicator Multi-Zone The input source name, surround mode, setting This lights when playing using DENON LINK q w e r values and other information are displayed here. connections. r Output signal channel indicators Q5 Input mode indicators

G H Q0 SOURCE button··········································· (40) Information With the door open t Surround speaker indicators Q6 HDMI indicator Q1 TUNING PRESET button····························· (53) This lights when playing using HDMI E3E2E1E0W9W8 W7W6W5W4 These light according to the settings of the Q2 ZONE 2/3/4 / REC SELECT button······· (65, 81) surround A and B speakers. connections. Q7 Q3 VIDEO SELECT button································ (42) y Monitor output indicators Decoder indicators

These light when the respective decoders are Troubleshooting Q4 Headphones jack (PHONES)······················· (51) These light according to the HDMI monitor output setting. When set to “Auto (Dual)”, the operating. Q5 ZONE2 ON/OFF button······························· (81) indicators light according to the connection Q8 Tuner reception mode indicators Q6 Q4 Q5Q6Q7Q8Q9W0W1 W2 W3 ZONE3 ON/OFF button······························· (81) status. These light according to the reception conditions Q7 ZONE4 ON/OFF button······························· (81) u Master volume indicator when the input source is set to “TUNER” or “DAB”. Q8 MENU button··············································· (24) i AUDYSSEY MULTEQ XT indicator q Power operation button • AUTO Specifications This lights when the room equalizer is selected. (ON/STANDBY)············································ (51) Q9 Cursor buttons (uio p)··························· (24) These light when in the auto tuning mode. o Recording output source indicator w Power indicator············································ (51) W0 CH SEL / ENTER button························ (24, 66) • RDS This lights when the REC OUT mode is These light when receiving RDS broadcasts. e Power switch (hON jOFF)······················ (51) W1 RETURN button··········································· (24) selected. • STEREO W2 V.AUX INPUT connectors···························· (18) r QUICK SELECT buttons / indicators·········· (66) Q0 NIGHT indicator In the FM mode, these light when receiving t MASTER VOLUME control knob··········· (51, 81) W3 SETUP MIC jack··········································· (26) This lights when the night mode is selected. analog stereo broadcasts. • TUNED y Master volume indicator W4 ROOM EQ button········································· (48) Q1 Multi zone indicators Lights when the broadcast is properly tuned in. u Display W5 DIMMER button··········································· (39) These light when the power for the respective zone is turned on. i Remote control sensor·································· (4) W6 USB port······················································· (19) Q2 RESTORER indicator o SOURCE SELECT knob······························· (40) W7 STATUS button············································ (50) This lights when the RESTORER mode is selected.

 ENGLISH Getting Started Rear Panel

Q6 Q5 Q4 Q3 Q2 Q1 Q0 o i Connections Setup Playback W1 Remote Control

Q9Q8 Q9 W1W0 W0Q9 Q9Q8 Q7 Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting

q w e r t y u

Specifications q RS-232C connector······································ (22) i DAB antenna terminal Q4 COMPONENT VIDEO connectors··············· (13) w TRIGGER OUT jacks···································· (22) (DTU ANTENNA)·········································· (20) Q5 HDMI connectors········································· (12) e FM/AM antenna terminals o Digital audio connectors Q6 VIDEO / S-VIDEO connectors····················· (13) (OPTICAL / COAXIAL)··························· (13, 15) (TUNER ANTENNA)····································· (20) Q7 REMOTE CONTROL jacks··························· (22) Q0 WLAN ANTENNA terminal·························· (21) r DOCK CONTROL jack·································· (14) Q8 Analog audio connectors (AUDIO)············· (13) Q1 ETHERNET connector·································· (21) t Speaker terminals (SPEAKERS)················· (10) Q9 PRE OUT connectors····························· (18, 22) Q2 USB port······················································· (19) y AC OUTLET·················································· (23) W0 EXT. IN connectors······································ (18) Q3 DENON LINK connector······························ (17) u AC inlet (AC IN)············································ (23) W1 SIGNAL GND terminal································ (14)

 ENGLISH Getting Started Remote Control Unit n Main remote control unit (RC-1068) n Sub remote control unit (RC-1070) Q5 t System buttons····································· (69, 70) Q1 q ZONE indicators·········································· (76)

y Audio delay button (A. DL)························· (49) w Advanced setup button······························· (76) Connections q u Tuner system buttons································· (52) e Input source select buttons························ (40) q Q2 i Input mode button (INPUT)························ (42) r CHANNEL buttons······································· (52) o MENU button··············································· (24) Q3 t SHIFT button················································ (52)

w w Setup Q0 Cursor buttons (uio p)·························· (24) y MENU button··············································· (24) Q1 Parameter / Search button u Cursor buttons (uio p)·························· (24) Q6 (PARA / SRCH)································· (46, 53, 58) i Playback e Q7 SEARCH button····································· (53, 58) Q2 Monitor select (M. SEL) / o REPEAT button············································· (58) HOME button········································· (31, 68) Q0 RANDOM button········································· (58) r Q3

Channel buttons (CH)·································· (52) Remote Control Q1 Remote control signal transmitter··············· (4) Q4 Input source select / e t Q8 Q2 ZONE SELECT button·································· (76) Number buttons···································· (40, 52) y Q9 Q3 Zone power on/off buttons Q5 Remote control signal transmitter··············· (4) u (ZONE ON / ZONE OFF)······························ (81) W0 Q6 Device select indicators (DEV1 / DEV2)···· (68) i W1 Q4 Master volume control buttons Q7 ZONE3 / ZONE4 select indicators (VOLUME)············································· (51, 81) Multi-Zone (Z3 / Z4)························································ (81) o Q5 Muting button (MUTE)·························· (51, 81) W2 Q8 RESTORER button (RSTR)··························· (48) r Q4 Q6 ENTER button·············································· (24) Q9 Night button (NGT)····································· (49) Q7 RETURN button··········································· (24)

Q0 Information W0 Test tone button (TEST)······························ (30) t Q5 Q8 System buttons······························· (52, 74, 75) W3 W1 Surround speaker select button (SPKR)···· (30) y Q1 Q9 ALL MUSIC/FAVORITES W4 W2 POWER buttons··········································· (51) Q6 (DIRECT PLAY) button································· (74) Q2 W3 Channel select (CH SEL) / u W0 USB (DIRECT PLAY) button························ (74) Troubleshooting ENTER button········································ (24, 66) Q3 W5 NOTE W4 Return button (RTN)···································· (24) i Q7 The AUX-1, AUX-2, AUX-3, SAT TU, DVR-2 and W6 W5 Master volume control buttons OPTION buttons cannot be used. (VOL)······················································· (51, 81) Q8 W6 Muting button (MUTE)·························· (51, 81) o Q9 Q4 W7 Main remote control unit setup button Specifications (RC SETUP)·················································· (68) Q0 W0 W7

The time for which the backlight stays on can be changed (vpage 73 “Setting the Time the Backlight Stays Lit”). NOTE q Signal transmission indicator···················· (68) The SAT TU, ZONE2 mode QUICK SELECT (1 ~ 3), A. w Mode select buttons··································· (68) DL, RSTR, NGT, INPUT, SPKR, TEST and surround mode buttons cannot be used. e Quick select / System call buttons······ (66, 72) r Surround mode buttons······················· (45, 46)  ENGLISH Getting Started Preparations

Connections Cables Used for Connections

Select the cables according to the equipment being connected. Connections Connections for all compatible audio and video signal formats are described in these operating instructions. Please select the types Audio cables Video cables of connections suited for the equipment you are connecting. With some types of connections, certain settings must be made Coaxial digital connections Component video connections on the AVR-4308. For details, refer to the instructions for the (Green) (Y)

Setup (Orange) respective connection items below. Coaxial digital (75 Ω/ohms pin-plug) cable (Blue) (PB/CB) NOTE (Red) (PR/CR)

Playback • Do not plug in the power cord until all connections have been Optical digital connections Component video cable completed. • When making connections, also refer to the operating instructions of the other components. Optical cable S-Video connections Remote Control • Be sure to connect the left and right channels properly (left with left, right with right). Analog connections (stereo) • Do not bundle power cords together with connection cables. Doing (White) L L S-Video cable so can result in humming or noise. (Red) R R Video connections

Multi-Zone Stereo pin-plug cable (Yellow)

Analog connections (monaural, for subwoofer) 75 Ω/ohms pin-plug video cable

(Black)

Information Audio and video cables Pin-plug cable HDMI connections DENON LINK connections

Troubleshooting 19-pin HDMI cable DENON LINK cable

Speaker connections Signal direction

Audio signal: Video signal:

Specifications Output Input Output Input Speaker cables

Network connections (wired LAN)

Input Output Input Output Ethernet cable

 ENGLISH Getting Started Video Conversion Function • When not using this function, connect a monitor output with the same type of connector as the video • This function automatically converts various formats of video signals input to the AVR-4308 into the input connector. format used to output the video signals from the AVR-4308 to a monitor. • The resolution of the HDMI input-compatible monitor connected to the AVR-4308 can be checked at GUI • The AVR-4308’s video input/output circuitry is compatible with the following four types of video signals: menu “Information” – “HDMI Information” – “Monitor1” or “Monitor2” (vpage 50).

Digital video signals: HDMI Connections Analog video signals: Component video, S-Video and Video NOTE • HDMI signals cannot be converted into analog signals. GFlow of video signals inside the AVR-4308H • 1080p component input video signals cannot be output to anything other than component video Main zone connectors. • 480p/576p, 1080i and 720p component video input signals cannot be converted into S-Video or Video Setup High picture format. quality playback HDMI connector HDMI connector • When using the component video output connectors for connection to the ZONE2 monitor, the ZONE2’s on-screen display is not displayed. Playback • When a non-standard video signal from a game machine or some other source is input, the video conversion function might not operate.

Component video Component video Monitor Remote Control connectors connectors

S-Video connector S-Video connector Multi-Zone

Video connector Video connector

Video inputs Video outputs Information : When 480i/576i signals are input in the main zone

GFlow of video signals for ZONE2H

ZONE2 Troubleshooting

High picture quality playback Component video Component video connectors connectors ZONE2 monitor Specifications

S-Video connector

Video connector Video connector

Video inputs Video outputs

 ENGLISH Getting Started Speaker Connections Speaker Connections

Example: 7.1-channels (Surround A+B) Speaker Installation Front speakers Center speaker Surround back Subwoofer The illustration below shows a basic example of installation of the amplifier combined with 8 speakers and speakers Connections a monitor. Subwoofer Center speaker Subwoofer with built-in Surround back speakers (L) (R) (L) (R) amplifier Setup w q w q w q w q w q */ Playback Remote Control

Multi-Zone Front speakers Place the front speakers to the Surround speakers sides of the monitor or screen and as flush with the screen surface as possible. Information

The table below shows a typical speaker configuration for the AVR-4308.

Troubleshooting SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND FRONT A B BACK CENTER SUBWOOFER b L : Left 1 L R L R L R L R R : Right only 7.1-channels S S S S S S S S S – S (L) (R) (L) (R) (Surround A+B) Specifications 7.1-channels S S S S S – – S S – S w q w q w q w q 6.1-channels S S S S S – – – – S S 5.1-channels S S S S S – – – – – S Surround speakers Surround speakers 3.1-channels S S S – – – – – – – S A B 2.1-channels S S – – – – – – – – S 2-channels S S – – – – – – – – –

When using just one surround back speaker, connect it to the left channel (SBL).

10 ENGLISH

Connecting the Speaker Cables Protection circuit Getting Started Carefully check the left (L) and right (R) channels and + (red) and – If speakers with an impedance lower than specified (for example (black) polarities on the speakers being connected to the AVR-4308, 4 Ω/ohms speakers) are used for an extended period of time with and be sure to interconnect the channels and polarities correctly. the volume turned up high, the temperature may rise, activating the protection circuit.

Peel off about 10 mm of sheathing from When the protection circuit is activated, the speaker output is shut Connections 1 the tip of the speaker cable, then either off and the power indicator flashes red. If this happens, unplug twist the core wire tightly or terminate the power cord, then check the speaker cable and input cable connections. If the set is extremely hot, wait for it to cool off and it. improve ventilation around it. Once this is done, plug the power cord

back in and turn the set’s power back on. Setup Turn the speaker terminal If the protection circuit is activated again even though there are no 2 counterclockwise to loosen it. problems in the ventilation around the set nor in the connections, the set may be damaged. Turn the power off, then contact a DENON Playback Insert the speaker cable’s core wire to service center. 3 the hilt into the speaker terminal. Remote Control Turn the speaker terminal clockwise to 4 tighten it. NOTE • Use speakers with an impedance of 6 to 16 Ω/ohms. When using surround A and B speakers simultaneously, use speakers with an Multi-Zone impedance of 8 to 16 Ω/ohms. • Connect the speaker cables in such a way that they do not stick out of the speaker terminals. The protection circuit may be activated if

the core wires touch the rear panel or if the + and – sides touch each Information other (v “Protection circuit”). • Never touch the speaker terminals while the power supply is connected. Doing so could result in electric shock. Troubleshooting Specifications

11 ENGLISH Getting Started Connecting Equipment with HDMI connectors NOTE • Use a CPPM-compatible DVD player to play DVD-Audio discs that are copyright-protected by CPPM. With HDMI connections, the video and audio signals can be transferred with a single cable. • The AVR-4308 cannot be controlled from another device via the HDMI cable. DVD player Monitor b The AVR-4308 is equipped for HDMI version 1.3a. This • The audio signals output from the HDMI connector (sampling frequency, bit rate, etc.) may be restricted version is compatible with other versions, allowing by the connected device. )%.* )%.* Connections connection to all components equipped with an HDMI • Video signals are not output properly when using devices that are not HDCP-compatible. 065 */ connector. • Video signals are not output if the input video signals do not match the monitor’s resolution. In this case, b The AVR-4308 is compatible with 30- and 36-bit Deep switch the DVD player’s resolution to a resolution with which the monitor is compatible. Color. • If the GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “HDMI Setup” – “Audio” setting (vpage 31) is set to “Amp”, the sound may be interrupted when the monitor’s power is turned off. Compatible Discs Setup Details • Use a cable on which the HDMI logo is indicated (a certified HDMI product) for connection to the HDMI audio format (examples) connector. Normal playback may not be possible when using a cable other than one on which the HDMI 2-channel linear 2ch 32-192 kHz CD, DVD-Video, logo is indicated (a non-HDMI-certified product).

Playback PCM 16/20/24 bits DVD-Audio • If the monitor or DVD player does not support deep color, deep color signal transfer is not possible. Multi-channel 8ch 32-192 kHz • If the monitor or DVD player does not support xvYCC, xvYCC signal transfer is not possible. DVD-Audio linear PCM 16/20/24 bits • If the monitor does not support “Auto Lipsync Correction” function, this function will not work.

Remote Control Dolby Digital, DTS Bitstream DVD-Video 2/5.1ch • When the AVR-4308 and DVD player are connected using an HDMI cable, also connect the AVR-4308 and DSD 2.8224 MHz SACD monitor using an HDMI cable. 1 bit • If the connected monitor or DVD player only has a DVI-D connector, use an HDMI/DVI converter cable. Dolby Digital Plus, When using a DVI cable, no audio signals are transmitted. HD DVD, Dolby TrueHD, Bitstream • Use a Deep Color compatible cable for connection to Deep Color compatible devices. Multi-Zone Blu-ray Disc DTS-HD When connecting with an HDMI/DVI converter cable (adapter) Copyright protection system (HDCP) • HDMI video signals are theoretically compatible with the DVI format. When connecting to a monitor, etc., equipped with a DVI-D connector, connection is possible using an Information In order to play the digital video and audio signals of a DVD- HDMI/DVI converter cable, but depending on the combination of components in some cases the video Video or DVD-Audio disc using HDMI/DVI connections, both signals will not be output. the connected DVD player and monitor must be equipped • When connecting using an HDMI/DVI converter adapter, the video signals may not be output properly for a copyright protection system called “HDCP” (High- due to poor connections with the connected cable, etc. bandwidth Digital Content Protection). Troubleshooting HDCP is a copy protection technology consisting of data encoding and mutual identification of the devices. The AVR-4308 is HDCP-compatible. For details on the DVD player or monitor you are using, refer to its operating instructions. Specifications

• By default, the HDMI audio signals are output from the speakers connected to the AVR-4308. • To output the sound from the TV, make the settings at GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “HDMI Setup” – “Audio” – “TV” (vpage 31).

12 ENGLISH Connecting the Monitor Connecting the Playback Components Getting Started • Connect the cables to be used (vpage 9 “Video Conversion Function”). Carefully check the left (L) and right (R) channels and the inputs and outputs, and be sure to interconnect • With HDMI connections, the video and audio signals can be transferred with a single cable. correctly. • To output the audio signals to the monitor with HDMI connections, set GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “HDMI Setup” – “Audio” to “TV” (vpage 31). DVD Player Connections Monitor 7*%&0 • Connect the cables to be used. )%.* 7*%&0 4
7*%&0 $0.10/&/5
7*%&0 • With HDMI connections, the video and audio signals can be transferred with a single cable. */ */ */ */ : 1# 13 DVD player

7*%&0 "6%*0 Setup )%.* 7*%&0 4
7*%&0 $0.10/&/5
7*%&0 "6%*0 $0"9*"- 065 065 065 065 065 065 : 1# 13 - 3 Playback

L R Remote Control

L R Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting

NOTE Specifications • The component video connectors may be indicated differently on your monitor. For details, see the monitor’s operating instructions. • The audio signals output from the HDMI connectors are only the HDMI input signals. • Connect an HDP (High-Definition Player) in the same way. • When using an optical cable for the digital audio connection, make the settings at GUI menu “Source Select” – “DVD” – “Assign” – “Digital” (vpage 43).

13 ENGLISH Getting Started Record Player CD Player iPod®

Connect the cables to be used. Use a DENON Control Dock for iPod (ASD-1R, sold separately) to Turntable (MM cartridge) connect the iPod to the AVR-4308. For instructions on the Control CD player "6%*0 Dock for iPod settings, refer to the Control Dock for iPod’s operating

Connections "6%*0 $0"9*"- instructions. 065 065 - 3 Example : iPod

L R Setup "6%*0 (/% 065

"4%3 L R Playback

L R

Remote Control R L

R L Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting

• When connecting a record player with an MC cartridge, use a commercially available MC head amplifier or a step-up transformer. When using an optical cable for the digital audio connection, make the • Induction humming (a booming sound) may be produced from the settings at GUI menu “Source Select” – “CD” – “Assign” – “Digital” Specifications speakers if the volume is raised with no record player connected. (vpage 43). • With some record players, noise may be generated when the ground wire is connected. If so, disconnect the ground wire. NOTE The AVR-4308’s SIGNAL GND terminal is meant to reduce noise when • With the default settings, the iPod can be used connected to the VCR a record player is connected. This is not a safety ground terminal. (iPod) connector. • To assign the iPod to a connector other than VCR (iPod), make the settings at GUI menu “Source Select” – “(input source to which iPod dock assigned)” – “Assign” – “iPod dock” (vpage 43).

14 ENGLISH Getting Started TV/CABLE Tuner Satellite Receiver

Connect the cables to be used. Connect the cables to be used. TV tuner DBS / BS tuner 7*%&0 "6%*0 7*%&0 "6%*0

7*%&0 4
7*%&0 $0.10/&/5
7*%&0 "6%*0 $0"9*"- 7*%&0 4
7*%&0 "6%*0 015*$"- Connections 065 065 065 065 065 065 065 065 065 : 1# 13 - 3 - 3

L R L R Setup Playback

L R L R Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting

When using an optical cable for the digital audio connection, make the settings at GUI menu “Source • When using a coaxial digital cable for the digital audio connection, make the settings at GUI menu “Source Select” – “TV/CBL” – “Assign” – “Digital” (vpage 43). Select” – “SAT” – “Assign” – “Digital” (vpage 43). • When using a component video cable for the video connection, make the settings at GUI menu “Source Specifications Select” – “SAT” – “Assign” – “Component” (vpage 43).

15 ENGLISH Getting Started Connecting the Recording Components Video Cassette Recorder

Carefully check the left (L) and right (R) channels and the inputs and outputs, and be sure to interconnect Connect the cables to be used. correctly. Video cassette recorder 7*%&0 "6%*0

Connections 7*%&0 4
7*%&0 "6%*0 015*$"- Digital Video Recorder 065 */ */ 065 */ 065 065
*/ - 3 - 3 Connect the cables to be used. Digital video recorder 7*%&0 "6%*0 L R L R

Setup 7*%&0 4
7*%&0 "6%*0 015*$"- 065 */ */ 065 */ 065 065
*/ - 3 - 3

Playback or or L R L R

L R L R Remote Control or or L R L R Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting

• When recording via the AVR-4308, the playback device’s cable must be of the same type as the cable used to connect the AVR-4308’s VCR OUT connector. Specifications Example: TV IN → S-Video cable : VCR OUT → S-Video cable TV IN → Video cable : VCR OUT → Video cable • When using a component video cable for the video connection, make the settings at GUI menu “Source • Make analog connections if you wish to record analog audio signals. Select” – “VCR” – “Assign” – “Component” (vpage 43). • When recording via the AVR-4308, the playback device’s cable must be of the same type as the cable used to connect the AVR-4308’s DVR OUT connector. NOTE Example: TV IN → S-Video cable : DVR OUT → S-Video cable Do not connect the output of the component connected to the AVR-4308’s OPTICAL3 output connector to TV IN → Video cable : DVR OUT → Video cable any input connector other than OPTICAL3. • When using a component video cable for the video connection, make the settings at GUI menu “Source Select” – “DVR” – “Assign” – “Component” (vpage 43). NOTE Do not connect the output of the component connected to the AVR-4308’s OPTICAL2 output connector to any input connector other than OPTICAL2. 16 ENGLISH Getting Started CD Recorder / MD Recorder / Tape Deck Connections to Other Devices

Make analog connections if you wish to record analog audio signals, or digital connections if you wish to Carefully check the left (L) and right (R) channels and the inputs and outputs, and be sure to interconnect record digital audio signals, depending on the types of connectors on the components being used. correctly. CD recorder /

MD recorder / Tape deck Components Equipped with a DENON LINK connector Connections "6%*0 "6%*0 015*$"- Multi-channel playback is possible with DVD-Audio discs, Super Audio CD, etc. 065 */ 065
*/ - 3 - 3 DVD player "6%*0

%&/0/
-*/, Setup

L R L R Playback

or L R L R Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting

NOTE

Do not connect the output of the component connected to the AVR-4308’s OPTICAL3 output connector to Specifications any input connector other than OPTICAL3.

To use with DENON LINK connections, make the settings at GUI menu “Source Select” – “Assign” – “Digital” – “DENON LINK” (vpage 43).

17 ENGLISH Getting Started Video Camera / Game Console Component with Multi-channel Output External Power Amplifier connectors Video camera / Game console Power amplifier 7*%&0 "6%*0 "6%*0 4
7*%&0 7*%&0 "6%*0 015*$"- DVD player / 46# '30/5 $&/5&3 463306/% 463306/% 065 065 065 065 800'&3 #"$,

Connections Super Audio CD player / External decoder - 3 - 3 - 3 - 3 "6%*0 46# '30/5 $&/5&3 463306/% 463306/% 800'&3 #"$, - 3 - 3 - 3 L R L R L R L R Setup

L R L R L R

L R L R L R L R Playback

L R L R L R Remote Control Multi-Zone Information Troubleshooting

When using just one surround back speaker, connect it to the left channel (SBL).

Specifications • To play the analog input signals input to the EXT. IN connectors, press the INPUT MODE button on the main unit or INPUT button on the main remote control unit and select “EXT. IN” or make the settings at GUI menu “Source Select” – “(input source)” – “Input Mode” – “Input Mode” – “EXT. IN” (vpage 42). • The video signal can be connected in the same way as a DVD player (vpage 13). • To play copyright-protected discs, connect the AVR-4308’s EXT. IN connector with the DVD player’s analog multi-channel output connector.

18 ENGLISH Getting Started USB Port n Front panel n Rear panel USB memory device USB memory device Connections Setup Playback Remote Control Multi-Zone Information

• In the initial status, USB memory devices can be used by connecting them to the USB port on the front panel. Troubleshooting • To change the port to be used, see “USB Select” on page 43. • For instructions on playing the files on a USB memory device, see page 62, 63. NOTE • Set to the USB port you want to use. • The AVR-4308 is equipped with two USB ports, one each on the front and rear panels. It is not possible to use the set with USB memory Specifications devices connected to both the ports at the same time. Select the USB port you want to use at the GUI menu “Source Select” – “NET/USB” – “Playback Mode” – “USB Select”.

• Do not use the extension cable for connecting the USB memory device to the AVR-4308’s USB port. Use of the extension cable may cause harmful interference.

19 ENGLISH

Getting Started DAB Antenna terminals

An FM antenna cable plug can be connected directly. Connecting an DAB outdoor antenna If good reception cannot be achieved with the included DAB indoor antenna, use an DAB outdoor antenna. Connect an F male type connector to the coaxial cable and connect the antenna to the DAB COAX 75 AM/FM Ω/ohms terminal. Connections Direction of broadcasting station Installing the DAB indoor antenna q v AM loop antenna DAB station reception ( page 56). FM antenna w v (supplied) Use “Tuning Aid” to set position at which reception sensitivity is optimum ( page 44).

Setup DAB outdoor antenna Playback 75 Ω/ohms Coaxial cable Remote Control DAB indoor antenna (supplied) FM indoor antenna (supplied) Multi-Zone Information

AM outdoor antenna Ground Troubleshooting AM loop antenna assembly DAB indoor antenna assembly Connect to the AM antenna terminals. Connection of AM antennas Mount the antenna’s screw to the stand. 1. Push the 2. Insert the 3. Return the lever. conductor. lever. Specifications Remove the vinyl tie and take Bend in the reverse direction. out the connection line.

a. With the antenna on top of b. With the antenna attached any stable surface. to a wall. NOTE • Do not connect two FM antennas simultaneously. • Even if an external AM antenna is used, do not Mount disconnect the AM loop antenna. Installation hole Mount on wall, etc. • Make sure the AM loop antenna lead terminals do not touch metal parts of the panel.

20 ENGLISH

Required system Getting Started Network Audio n Broadband Internet connection For connections to the Internet, contact an ISP (Internet Service [Wired LAN] A broadband line connection to the Internet is required in order to Provider) or a computer shop. use the AVR-4308’s Internet radio function and firmware update. Computer NOTE Modem n Modem • A contract with an ISP is required to connect to the Internet. Connections This is a device that is connected to the broadband line to No additional contract is needed if you already have a broadband communicate with the Internet. Some are integrated with the Internet connection to the Internet. router. • The types of routers that can be used depend on the ISP. Contact an n Router ISP or a computer shop for details.

• When using the AVR-4308, we recommend you use a router • Depending on the server, video files may be displayed, but they Setup To WAN side equipped with the following functions: cannot be played on the AVR-4308. · Built-in DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server This function automatically assigns IP addresses on the LAN. n Others Playback To LAN port · Built-in 100BASE-TX switch • If you have an Internet provider contract for a line on which network To LAN port LAN port/Ethernet When connecting multiple devices, we recommend a switching settings are made manually, make the settings at GUI menu connector hub with a speed of 100 Mbps or greater. “Manual Setup” – “Network Setup” (vpage 33 ~ 36). Remote Control • When using with a wireless LAN, prepare a broadband router with • With the AVR-4308, it is possible to use the DHCP and Auto IP built-in access point. functions to make the network settings automatically. • When using a broadband router (DHCP function), the AVR-4308 Router n Ethernet cable (CAT-5 or greater recommended) sets the IP address, etc., automatically. Use for wired LAN. When using the AVR-4308 connected to a network with no DHCP • The AVR-4308 does not come with an Ethernet cable. function, make the settings for the IP address, etc., at GUI menu • Some flat type Ethernet cables are easily affected by noise. Multi-Zone “Manual Setup” – “Network Setup” (vpage 33 ~ 36). We recommend using a normal type cable. • The AVR-4308 is not compatible with PPPoE. A PPPoE-compatible • For the Ethernet cable, used a shielded twisted pair (STP) cable. router is required if you have a contract for a line of the type with Do not use an unshielded twisted pair (UTP) cable, as it may exceed which the PPPoE is set. noise standard limits. [Wireless LAN] • Depending on the ISP with which you have your contract, it may Information n Computer be necessary to make proxy server settings to use the Internet Computer Modem A computer with the following specifications is required to use a radio function. If you made proxy server settings on the computer music server: to connect to the Internet, make the proxy server settings on the • OS AVR-4308 in the same way. Troubleshooting Internet Windows® XP Service Pack2, Windows Vista • Software (Prepare one of the following.) · .NET Framework 1.1 and Windows Media Connect (Windows XP) · Windows Media Player ver.11 To WAN side · DLNA-compatible server software • Internet browser Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.01 or later Specifications • LAN port • 300 MB or more free disk space Rod antenna b Free disk space is required to store music and video files. The (supplied) following sizes are approximate.

Turn clockwise. Format Bit rate Per minute Per hour Router with access point 128 kbps Approx. 1 MB Approx. 60 MB MP3 / WMA 192 kbps Approx. 1.5 MB Approx. 90 MB MPEG-4 AAC 256 kbps Approx. 2 MB Approx. 120 MB 392 kbps Approx. 3 MB Approx. 180 MB WAV (LPCM) 1400 kbps Approx. 10 MB Approx. 600 MB FLAC 1080 kbps Approx. 7.7 MB Approx. 464 MB

21 ENGLISH Getting Started Multi Zone External Controller

ZONE2 or ZONE3 Pre-out Connections • If another power amplifier or pre-main (integrated) amplifier is connected, the ZONE2 or ZONE3 pre-out

Connections (variable or fixed level) connectors can be used to play a different program source in ZONE2 or ZONE3 RS-232C connector the same time (vpage 77 ~ 81). • When using a component video cable to connect the AVR-4308 and input device, connect the ZONE2 This connector is used for an external controller. monitor output to the component video connectors. When using an S-Video cable or a video cable, please connect the cable to the video connectors. b If you wish to control the AVR-4308 from Setup • The ZONE2 video out is only for ZONE2. an external controller using the RS-232C Power amplifier connector, perform the operation below Monitor (ZONE2) (ZONE2 or ZONE3) beforehand.

Playback 7*%&0 "6%*0 q Turn the AVR-4308’s power. 7*%&0 $0.10/&/5
7*%&0 "6%*0 */ */ */ w Turn off the AVR-4308’s power from the : 1# 13 - 3 external controller. e Remote Control Check that the AVR-4308 is in the standby mode.

L R

• When using in combination with an RF Remote Controller (RC-7000CI, sold separately) or RF Remote L R Multi-Zone Receiver (RC-7001RCI, sold separately) two-way communication with an RF Remote Controller is possible. The AVR-4308’s status information as well as iPod and Internet audio music files can be browsed watching the RF Remote Controller’s display. For details, refer to the operating instructions of the respective devices. Information • When used in combination with an RF Remote Controller or RF Remote Receiver, make the settings at GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Option Setup” – “2Way Remote” – “Used” (vpage 39).

Trigger output jacks Troubleshooting The power of an external device equipped with a trigger input jack can be turned on and off in association with operations on the AVR-4308. For details, see GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Option Setup” – “Trigger Out 1” or “Trigger Out 2” (vpage 38). Specifications • Output level: 150 mA/12 V Check the trigger input conditions of the connected device. • If the trigger input level of the connected device is higher than 150 mA/12 V and depending on "69
Input 065 Output the short-circuiting conditions, the AVR-4308’s Infrared Infrared Extension jack for future use. protection circuit may be activated, in which case retransmitter sensor “TRIGGER PROTECT” appears on the display. If this happens, turn off the AVR-4308’s power and NOTE disconnect the connected device. • For the audio output, use high quality pin-plug cords so that no induction humming or noise is produced. • For instructions on installing and operating separately sold devices, refer to the respective devices’ operating instructions. • To conduct multi-zone playback, see “Amp Assign / Multi-Zone Connections and Operations” (vpage 77 ~ 81). 22 ENGLISH Connecting the Power Cord Getting Started Wait until all connections have been completed before connecting the power cord.

To household

power outlet Connections Power cord (AC 230 V, 50 Hz) (included) Setup

Connection to the AC outlet Playback • This outlet supply power to external audio devices. • The power supplied from these outlets turns on Remote Control and off together with the set’s power switch. • Audio equipment with a total power consumption of 100 W (0.43 A) can be connected.

NOTE

• Insert the AC plugs securely. Incomplete connections could cause noise. Multi-Zone • Only use the AC outlet to plug in audio devices. Do not use them as power supplies for hairdryers or anything other than audio equipment. Information Once Connections are Completed

v Turning the Power On ( page 51) Troubleshooting Specifications

23 ENGLISH Getting Started Examples of GUI Screen Displays Some typical examples are described below. GUI Menu Operations Example: Browse Menu (Top Menu) Cursor Position Display Connections With the AVR-4308, settings and operations for most functions can be performed by operating while looking at the GUI menus displayed on n Icon the monitor screen. Switch the selected item

Selected item Setup The GUI cannot be superimposed when xvYCC signals and component name Switch to the next item 1080p signal, computer’s resolution (e.g. VGA) are input. List of subsequent items Playback Guidance text for item at Selected item cursor position Example of the Display of the GUI Switch the selected item Remote Control Mark at a Title n List Items for which this mark is indicated at the title can be Selected item operated from the GUI. We recommend performing such operations from the GUI. Example: Menus with Illustrations Assign Switch to the next item Multi-Zone (Auto Setup) Input Mode b Switch the selected item using Rename Auto Setup Operation guidance text Operation step indicators ui. Optimize settings for speakers in use. Other AUTO SETUP Information

STEP1 Speaker Detection 1 2 3 4 5 Please place the microphone at ear Illustration height at main listening position. Operations Troubleshooting This is the GUI icon for this setting item or for the Start menu series to which this item belongs. Config 7.1(B) The same operation is possible on the main unit or remote control unit. Amp Assign Press the MENU button. Enter RETURN Cancel The GUI menu is displayed. Start Auto Setup 1 Example of Display of Default b To operate from the main remote control unit, be sure to set the Specifications Operation remote control unit to the AMP mode. Values Guidance text for item at cursor button guidance position Press the u i p button to select the menu to be set In lists of selectable items or adjustable ranges, the item or operated. surrounded by a border is the default value. 2 b To return to the previous item, press the o or RETURN button.

Press the ENTER button to enter the setting. [Selectable items] 7.1 (B) 7.1 5.1 3 4 Press the MENU button to finish.

24 ENGLISH GUI Menu Map Getting Started Information Source Select (vpage 40 ~ 44) (vpage 49, 50) n TUNER (FM/AM) n PHONO n CD, DVD, HDP, TV/CBL, n NET/USB n DAB n Status • Play • Input Mode SAT, VCR, DVR, V.AUX • Play • Play

• MAIN ZONE • Auto Preset • Rename • Play (iPod) • Playback Mode • Auto Tune Connections • ZONE2/3/4 • Preset Skip • Other • Playback Mode (iPod) • Still Picture • Preset Skip n Audio Input Signal • Preset Name · Video Select • Assign • Input Mode • Tuning Aid n HDMI Information • Input Mode · Source Level • Input Mode • Rename • DRC Value n Auto Surround Mode • Rename • Rename • Other • Input Mode n Quick Select • Other • Other · Video Select • Rename n Preset Station · Video Select · Video Select · Source Level • Other Setup · Source Level · Video Convert (Excluding CDs) · Video Select · Source Level · Source Level Parameter Playback (vpage 46 ~ 49) (vpage 26 ~ 28) n Audio Surround Mode Auto Setup v • Surround Parameters ( page 45, 46) n Auto Setup n Option n Parameter Remote Control · Mode n STEREO • STEP1: Speaker Detection • Room EQ • Speaker Configuration Check · Cinema EQ n DIRECT • STEP2: Measurement • Direct Mode • Distance Check · DRC n STANDARD • STEP3: Calculation • Mic Select • Channel Level Check · D.COMP n DOLBY PLIIx, DOLBY PLII or • STEP4: Check • Crossover Check · LFE DOLBY PL • STEP5: Store • EQ Check · Center Image n DTS NEO:6 • Restore n 7CH STEREO · Panorama Multi-Zone · Dimension n WIDE SCREEN v · Center Width n SUPER STADIUM Manual Setup ( page 29 ~ 40) · Delay Time n ROCK ARENA n Speaker Setup n Network Setup (vpage 33 ~ 36) n Option Setup (vpage 37 ~ 40) · Effect n JAZZ CLUB (vpage 29, 30) • Network Setup • Amp Assign n · Effect Level CLASSIC CONCERT • Speaker Configuration • Other • Volume Control Information · Room Size n MONO MOVIE • Subwoofer Mode · Power Saving · Volume Limit · AFDM n VIDEO GAME • Distance · Character · Power On Level · SB CH Out n MATRIX • Channel Level · PC Language · Mute Level · Subwoofer Att. n VIRTUAL • Crossover Frequency • Network Information • Source Delete n v · Subwoofer • Surround Speaker Zone Setup ( page 37) • GUI Troubleshooting · Default n HDMI Setup (vpage 31) • ZONE2 · Screensaver • Tone • i/p Scaler · Bass · Wall Paper · Tone Defeat • Resolution · Treble · Format · Bass • Progressive Mode · HPF · Text · Treble • Aspect · Lch Level · Master Volume • Room EQ • Color Space · Rch Level · NET/USB

• RESTORER • RGB Range · Channel · iPod Specifications • Night Mode • Auto Lip Sync · Volume Level · Tuner • Audio Delay • Audio · Volume Limit • Quick Select Name n Picture Adjust • Monitor Out · Power On Level • Trigger Out 1 • Contrast n Audio Setup (vpage 32) · Mute Level • Trigger Out 2 • Brightness • EXT. IN Setup • ZONE3 • Digital Out • Chroma Level · Surround Speaker · Bass • Remote ID • Hue · Subwoofer Level · Treble • 2Way Remote • 2ch Direct/Stereo · HPF • Dimmer • Downmix Option · Lch Level • Setup Lock • Auto Surround · Rch Level • Maintenance Mode • Manual EQ · Channel • Firmware Update · Volume Level • Add New Feature When “Screensaver” is set to “ON”, the · Volume Limit n Language (vpage 40) screensaver is activated if no operation is · Power On Level performed for about 3 minutes. · Mute Level 25 ENGLISH Getting Started Preparations Connect the included calibrated setup microphone to 1 the SETUP MIC jack on the main unit. Auto Setup The auto setup screen appears automatically. Connections ® • Audyssey MultEQ XT automatically measures the acoustical Sound problems in the listening environment to create the best audio receptor experience for your home theater. • It optimizes a large listening area where one or more listeners are Setup seated. Measurements are performed by placing the calibrated microphone (DM-A505Z) successively at multiple positions throughout the Playback listening area as shown in Example q. For best results, it is Place the microphone at ear height on a tripod or stand strongly recommended to measure 6 or more positions so that the 2 with the microphone pointing directly up towards the measurements have the proper spatial weighting. ceiling.

Remote Control Even if the listening environment is small as shown in Example w, measuring at multiple points throughout the listening environment results in more effective correction. Example q Example w

Multi-Zone Setup microphone ( :Measuring positions) Information b It is not recommended to hold it in your hand. Be sure that the *M *M path from microphone to the speakers is not blocked by objects. Avoid placing the microphone close to a seat back or wall as sound reflections may give inaccurate results. Troubleshooting

About the main listening position (*M) When using a subwoofer, make the following settings before starting the auto setup procedure: The main listening position refers to the most central position where • Defeat the volume and crossover controls if possible one would normally sit within the listening environment. • If this is not possible then set Specifications MultEQ XT uses the measurements from this position to calculate • Volume: “12 o’clock” position speaker distance, level, polarity, and the optimum crossover value • Crossover frequency: “Maximum/Highest Frequency” for the subwoofer. • Low pass filter: “Off” • Standby mode: “Off”

To make manual adjustments to the settings, see page 29 ~ 31. NOTE • Do not disconnect the setup microphone until the auto setup procedure is completed. • When using headphones, unplug the headphones before starting the auto setup procedure.

26 ENGLISH

Configuration STEP2: Measurement Getting Started Auto Setup The speaker system to be measured can be selected ahead of time After completing a measurement position, move the microphone to Optimize settings for speakers in use. here. the next position. [Selectable items] 7.1 (B) 7.1 5.1 F Menu tree F Auto Setup Measure at least 6 positions (main listening position and at least 5 other Connections surrounding positions). For best results it is recommend measuring 6 a Setting the correct speaker configuration can reduce the time required Auto Setup or more positions (with a maximum of 8 positions). to measure during the auto setup procedure as the system will not s Option have to look for speakers that are not connected. d Parameter STEP3: Calculation Setup Amp Assign When “Calculate” is selected at “STEP2”, the measurements taken Advanced setting : changes power amplifier assignment. are analyzed automatically to determine how the speaker system

a Auto Setup NOTE interacts with the room. Playback The settings are performed automatically. The items selectable at “Config.” differ according to the “Amp Assign” settings. The time required for this analysis depends on the number of speakers GAuto setup flowH connected. The higher the number of speakers, the longer the time Remote Control STEP1 : Speaker Detection STEP1: Speaker Detection required for analysis. The speaker connection and polarity are detected at the first measurement position. The following attributes are also determined STEP4: Check at this time: “Speaker Size”, “Speaker Distance”, “Channel Level”, Once the auto setup procedure is complete, a measuring result check STEP2: Measurement (2 to 8 positions) “Crossover Frequency”.

screen appears. Multi-Zone Once the measurements are completed, the results are displayed. Select any item whose results you want to check to review the NOTE results.

STEP3: Calculation • Loud test tone may be played during Audyssey MultEQ XT Automatic

Speaker Setup. This is part of normal operation. If there is background Information noise in room, these test tones will increase in volume. Values that are different from the actual distance may be set for • Do not stand between the speakers and setup microphone or allow speakers with built-in filters (subwoofers, etc.). This is because filters STEP4: Check obstacles in the path while the measurements are being made. This add electrical delay to the signal that should be compensated. will cause inaccurate readings. • Quiet the listening environment before beginning measurements and STEP5: Store Troubleshooting STEP5: Store refrain from talking. Turn off air conditioning units or other devices The auto setup measurement results are stored in the AVR-4308. that emit noise if at all possible as measurements may be affected by these sounds. NOTE Start • Operating the MASTER VOLUME knob on the main unit or the VOL Do not turn the power off while the settings are being stored. +/– buttons on the remote control unit during the measurements will Start Auto Setup. cancel the measurements. Specifications The Audyssey MultEQ XT Auto Setup process automatically calculates • Do not change the speaker connections or subwoofer volume after the size, level, distance, bass management crossover frequency, and “STEP1”. optimal settings for each speaker and subwoofer. Audyssey MultEQ XT corrects acoustical distortions within the listening area. Before starting, connect and position all your speakers. Once started, MultEQ XT will play a series of test tones through each speaker.

If an error message appears during the measurements, check “Error Messages” (vpage 28), take the advised action, then start the measurements again.

27 ENGLISH Getting Started Error Messages s Option If the auto setup procedure could not be completed due to speaker installation, the measuring environment, etc., an error Select settings for room EQ, mic, etc. message is displayed. If this happens, check the relevant items, be sure to take the necessary measures, then perform the auto setup procedure over again.

Connections Room EQ Error messages (examples) Cause Measures Select room EQ setting method. No microphone or speaker • Included setup microphone is not connected. • Connect the included setup microphone to the SETUP MIC jack on the main unit. [Selectable items] All Assign • Not all speakers could be detected. • Check the speaker connections. Setup Ambient noise is too high • Too much noise in the room for accurate • Either turn off any device generating noise or move it Direct Mode or Level is too low measurements to be made. away. • Try again when the surroundings are quieter. Select room EQ use for DIRECT or PURE DIRECT mode. Playback • Speaker or subwoofer sound is too low for • Check the speaker installation and the direction in which [Selectable items] ON OFF accurate measurements to be made. the speakers are facing. • Adjust the subwoofer’s volume. Mic Select Remote Control None • Displayed speaker could not be detected. • Check the connections of the displayed speaker. · The front L and front R speakers were not Select the microphone type if not using supplied mic. properly detected. The microphone connected to V.AUX Lch is used. · Only one channel of the surround (A) and surround (B) speakers was detected. [Selectable items] Mic V.AUX L · Sound was output from the R channel when only

Multi-Zone one surround back speaker was connected. · The surround back or the surround (B) speaker Only a professionally certified installer should ever connect a was detected, but the surround (A) speaker professionally-calibrated microphone to the V.AUX L input on the front was not detected. panel.

Information Phase • Displayed speaker connected with the polarities • Check the polarities of the displayed speaker. reversed. • For some speakers, this error message may be displayed even if the speaker is properly connected. If you are sure d that the wiring is correct, select “Skip”. Parameter Check Check auto setup measurement results. Troubleshooting Select “Retry” to make the measurements again. This is displayed after the auto setup procedure is completed. NOTE Be sure to turn the power off before checking the speaker connections.

[Items to be checked] Spkr Config Check Distance Check Ch. Level Check Crossover Check Specifications EQ Check

The auto setup results can be reset to what was originally calculated by MultEQ XT when “Restore” is selected.

28 ENGLISH

Surround A Getting Started d Distance Select surround speakers A use and size. Set distance from listening position to speakers. [Selectable items] Large Small None Before making the settings, measure the distance from Manual Setup the listening position to the different speakers.

Surround B Connections Meters / Feet Make detail settings for various parameters. Select surround speakers B use and size. Select unit for distance. [Selectable items] Large Small None Speaker Setup Step Setup Use this procedure to set the speakers Surround Back Select step. (smallest distance) manually or if you wish to change the Select surround back speaker use and size. settings made with the auto setup [Selectable items] Playback procedure. [Selectable items] Large Small None 0.1m 0.01m : Can be selected when “Meters” is set. F Menu tree F 2spkrs 1spkr

Remote Control Manual Setup 1ft 0.1ft : Can be selected when “Feet” is set. Speaker Setup Large : Select this for a large speaker with strong bass Default a Speaker Configuration reproduction. Resets the settings to the default values. s Subwoofer Mode Small : Select this for a smaller speaker with weaker bass reproduction. d Distance Distance measurement Multi-Zone f Channel Level Select the speaker you want to set, then set the distance. g Crossover Frequency • Select “Large” or “Small” not according to the physical size of the Set the value closest to the measured distance. speaker but according to the low frequency reproduction capabilities h Surround Speaker v based on the frequency set at “Crossover Frequency” ( page [Variable range] Information 30). • When “Front” is set to “Small”, “Subwoofer” is automatically set to 0.00m ~ 18.00m : Display when “Meters” is set. a Speaker Configuration “Yes”. Select speaker configuration and size. • If “Subwoofer” is set to “No”, “Front” is automatically set to 0.0ft ~ 60.0ft : Display when “Feet” is set. (bass reproduction capability) “Large”. Troubleshooting • If “Surround A” is set to “None”, “Surround B” and “Surround Back” NOTE are automatically set to “None”. Set the distance between the listening position and the various Front • When using just one surround back speaker, connect it to the left speakers to no more than 6.00 meters (20.0 ft). channel (SBL). Select front speaker size.

[Selectable items] Large Small Specifications s Subwoofer Mode Center Select low range signal to be reproduced by subwoofer. Select center speaker use and size. [Selectable items] LFE LFE+Main

[Selectable items] Large Small None • This can be set when GUI menu “Speaker Configuration” – Subwoofer “Subwoofer” is set to “Yes”. Select subwoofer use. • Play music or a movie source and select the mode offering the strongest bass. [Selectable items] Yes No • Select “LFE+Main” if you want the bass signals to always be produced from the subwoofer.

29 ENGLISH Getting Started f Channel Level g Crossover Frequency h Surround Speaker Adjust channel levels to obtain equal volume from all Select crossover frequency from which subwoofer handles Select surround speakers to use for each surround mode. speakers. low range signal. [Selectable items] A B A+B

Connections Mode [Selectable items] Operating from the main remote control unit Select test tone playback method. 40Hz 60Hz 80Hz 90Hz 100Hz 110Hz Press the SPKR button. 120Hz 150Hz 200Hz 250Hz Surround A Surround B [Selectable items] Auto Manual Only the portion of the bass sound of the various speakers output Surround A+B Setup Surround from the subwoofer that has a frequency below the frequency set here is output. Select surround speaker from which test tone is output.

Playback Set this according to the low frequency reproduction capabilities of the speakers you are using. • This can be set when GUI menu “Speaker Configuration” – “Surround [Selectable items] A B A+B A” and “Surround B” are used (vpage 29). • When using the pre-out connectors, select and use either “Surround Advanced :

Remote Control A” or “Surround B”. Start Set the crossover frequency separately for the different speakers. • Make the surround speaker settings when the input mode is set to Output test tone. “EXT. IN” at GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Audio Setup” – “EXT. IN Setup” (vpage 32). ~ ~ • The “Crossover Frequency” can be set when there are speakers that [Variable range] –12dB 0dB +12dB have been set to “Small” at GUI menu “Speaker Configuration” or About Speaker Type Setting when Using Both Default when “Subwoofer” is set to “Yes” (vpage 29). Multi-Zone • If in the “Advanced” settings, “Subwoofer Mode” (vpage 29) Surround speakers A and B Resets the settings to the default values. in the GUI menu is set to “LFE”, it is possible to make this setting If “Small” is set for either surround speakers A or B, the output is the for speakers set to “Small” at “Speaker Configuration”. If set to same as when “Small” is set for both A and B. Operating from the main remote control unit “LFE+Main”, this setting can be made regardless of the speaker

Information Adjusting with the main remote control unit using the test tones is size. only possible in the “Auto” mode and only effective in the STANDARD • For speakers set to “Small”, sound below the crossover frequency mode. The adjusted levels for the different modes are automatically is cut from the sound output. The cut bass sound is output from the stored in the memory. subwoofer or front speakers. GAdjusting using test tonesH • Always set the crossover frequency to “80Hz”. When using small Troubleshooting q Press the TEST button. speakers, however, we recommend setting the crossover frequency Test tones are output from the various speakers. to a higher frequency. w Use the o p button to adjust so that the volume is equal for all speakers. e When the adjustments are completed, press the TEST button again. Specifications

• When the GUI menu “Speaker Configuration” – “Surround Back” setting (vpage 29) is set to “1spkr”, the surround back speaker display is set to “Surround Back”. • Speakers set to “None” in the “Speaker Configuration” settings are not displayed. • “Surround” can be set when GUI menu “Speaker Configuration” – “Surround B” is set to “Large” or “Small” (vpage 29). • When using surround speakers, be sure to adjust the volume of the different speakers. • When “Channel Level” is adjusted, the adjusted values are set for all the surround modes. To adjust the channel level separately for the different surround modes, use the operation see page 66. 30 ENGLISH Getting Started HDMI Setup d Progressive Mode j Auto Lip Sync Make settings for HDMI video/audio output. Select optimum progressive mode for video material. Automatic compensation for timing shift in audio and video output. [Selectable items] Auto Video1 Video2 F Menu tree F

[Selectable items] ON OFF Connections Manual Setup HDMI Setup This can be set when “i/p Scaler” is set to anything other than “OFF”. k a i/p Scaler Audio Select HDMI audio output device. s Resolution f Aspect Setup d Progressive Mode This sets the aspect ratio when outputting 480i/576i or [Selectable items] Amp TV f Aspect 480p/576p input signals from the HDMI output connector. Playback g Color Space [Selectable items] Full Normal l Monitor Out h RGB Range Make settings for HDMI monitor output.

j Auto Lip Sync Remote Control k Audio This can be set when “i/p Scaler” is set to anything other than “OFF”. [Selectable items] Auto (Dual) Monitor 1 Monitor 2 l Monitor Out g Color Space Operating from the main remote control unit Press the M. SEL button. Make settings for output color space. a i/p Scaler Auto (Dual) Monitor 1 Multi-Zone Make settings for i/p scaler function. Monitor 2 [Selectable items] YCbCr RGB

[Selectable items] A to H A to H & H to H OFF Information When connected to a monitor with a DVI-D connector (HDCP • When “Monitor Out” is set to “Auto (Dual)”, connections with compatible) using an HDMI/DVI converter cable, the signals are output the MONITOR 1 or MONITOR 2 connectors are recognized A to H & H to H setting in RGB format, regardless of this setting. automatically. • Deep color (10 bit/12 bit) signals are converted into 8-bit signals. • If both the MONITOR 1 and 2 connectors are connected and • The i/p scaler function does not work if xvYCC or computer’s h “Resolution” is set to “Auto”, the signals are output with a resolution Troubleshooting resolution signals are input. RGB Range compatible with both monitors. Make settings for RGB output range. • If “Resolution” is set to something other than “Auto”, check the resolutions with which your monitor is compatible at GUI menu s Resolution “Information” – “HDMI Information” – “Monitor 1” and “Monitor 2” [Selectable items] Normal Enhanced Make settings for resolution of HDMI video output signal. and set accordingly (vpage 50).

NOTE Specifications [Selectable items] Auto 480p/576p 1080i 720p 1080p When “YCbCr” is selected under “Color Space”, “RGB Range” will Depending on the monitor you have connected, the display may not have no effect. be correct when you set to “Auto (Dual)”. In such a case, set to either “Monitor 1” or “Monitor 2”. This can be set when “i/p Scaler” is set to anything other than “OFF”. NOTE • It is not possible to convert “1080i” signals into “720p” format. • It is not possible to convert “720p” signals into “1080i” format.

31 ENGLISH

Getting Started Front Audio Setup f Auto Surround Mode Select front speaker size. Make settings for audio playback. Make setting for memorizing surround mode setting for each input signal type. [Selectable items] Large Small F Menu tree F

Connections [Selectable items] ON OFF Manual Setup Subwoofer Audio Setup Select subwoofer use. a EXT.IN Setup • The auto surround mode function lets you store in the memory the [Selectable items] Yes No s 2ch Direct/Stereo surround mode last used for playing the four types of input signals Setup listed below. d Downmix Option Subwoofer Mode q Analog and PCM 2-channel signals f Auto Surround Mode Select low range signal to be reproduced by subwoofer. w Dolby Digital and DTS 2-channel signals Playback e Dolby Digital and DTS multi-channel signals g Manual EQ r [Selectable items] LFE LFE+Main Multi-channel signals other than Dolby Digital and DTS (PCM, DSD, etc.)

Remote Control a Crossover • When playing in the PURE DIRECT mode, the surround mode does EXT. IN Setup not change even if the input signal is changed. Make speaker settings for EXT. IN mode playback. Select crossover frequency from which subwoofer handles low range signal. Surround Speaker [Selectable items] 40Hz 60Hz 80Hz 90Hz 100Hz g Manual EQ

Multi-Zone Select the surround speakers to use. 110Hz 120Hz 150Hz 200Hz 250Hz Adjust tonal quality for each speaker using graphic equalizer. [Selectable items] A B A+B Distance FL Subwoofer Level Set distance from listening position to front left speaker. Adjust CH Information Set the subwoofer level for playback. [Variable range] 0.00m ~ 18.00m Select speaker adjustment method. Select according to the player in use. [Selectable items] Each L/R All Distance FR [Selectable items] 0dB +5dB +10dB +15dB Troubleshooting Set distance from listening position to front right speaker. Manual EQ Select the speaker and frequency band and adjust the level. We recommend setting to “+15 dB”. [Variable range] 0.00m ~ 18.00m [Selectable items] 63 125 250 500 1k 2k 4k 8k 16k Specifications s 2ch Direct/Stereo d Downmix Option Make speaker settings for 2-channel mode playback. Set dynamic range for downmix playback of Dolby Digital [Variable range] –20dB ~ 0dB ~ +6dB sources. Setting Curve Copy [Selectable items] ON OFF To change the settings, select “Custom”. Copy the Room EQ’s “Audyssey Flat” correction curve. [Selectable items] z Basic Custom [Selectable items] Yes No • Set this to “ON” if the sound from the front speakers seems z:Use the same settings as in “Speaker Setup”. distorted. • When not using the center speaker or surround speakers, the “Curve Copy” is displayed after the auto setup procedure has been playback sound is down-mixed and output from the front speakers. performed.

Default 32 Resets the settings to the default values. ENGLISH Getting Started a Network Setup e Use the ui p button to input the address and press the ENTER Network Setup button. Make network settings. Make settings for wired or wireless LAN. IP Address : Set the IP address within the ranges shown below. The Network F Menu tree F Wired LAN settings Audio function cannot be used if other IP addresses are set. Manual Setup Use this procedure to configure the Wired LAN settings. CLASS A: 10.0.0.0 ~ 10.255.255.255 Connections CLASS B: 172.16.0.0 ~ 172.31.255.255 Network Setup Connect the LAN cable (vpage 21). CLASS C: 192.168.0.0 ~ 192.168.255.255 a Network Setup 1 Subnet Mask : s Other When connecting an xDSL modem or terminal adapter Setup d Network Information Turn on the AVR-4308 (vpage 51). directly to the AVR-4308, input the subnet mask indicated in 2 AVR-4308 performs automatic network setup due to the DHCP the documentation supplied by your provider. Normally input

function. 255.255.255.0. Playback When connecting to a network that has no DHCP function, Default Gateway : perform the setting in step 3. • If you are using a broadband router (DHCP function), there is no need When connected to a gateway (router), input its IP address. to make the settings at “Setting the IP Address” and “Setting the Proxy”, since the DHCP function is set to “ON” in the AVR-4308’s Set the IP address at the GUI menu “Manual Setup” Primary DNS Secondary DNS : Remote Control default settings. 3 “Network Setup” – “Network Setup”. If there is only one DNS address indicated in the documentation • If the AVR-4308 is being used connected to a network without the supplied by your provider, input it at “Primary DNS”. If there are DHCP function, the network settings must be made. In this case, two or more DNS addresses, input the first one at “Secondary some knowledge of networks is required. For details, consult a DNS”. network administrator. r Use the i button to select “Exit” and press the ENTER button. • If you cannot connect to the Internet, recheck the connections and Setup is complete. Multi-Zone settings (vpage 21). b When connecting to the network via a Proxy server, select “Proxy” • If you do not understand about Internet connection, contact your ISP q Select “Detail”. and press the ENTER button (vpage 36 “Proxy settings”). (Internet Service Provider) or the store from which you purchased

your computer. Information e Input the address.

• DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) :

These are systems by which the IP address and other network Troubleshooting settings are automatically set for the AVR-4308, computer, broadband w Set “OFF”. router and network devices. • DNS (Domain Name System) : This is a system for converting the domain names used when browsing Internet sites (for example, “www.denon.jp”) into the IP addresses actually used for communications (for example, r Select “Exit”. Specifications “202.221.192.106”). q Select “Detail” and press the ENTER button. w Use the o p button to set “DHCP” to “OFF”, then press the i button. The DHCP function is disabled.

33 ENGLISH Getting Started Wireless LAN settings b If the access points are not detected automatically, use the i Use the uio p button to input the “Key” (encryption key) and Use this procedure to configure the Wireless LAN settings. button to select the “Manual” and press the ENTER button. press the ENTER button. Setting becomes manual. For details, see “Manual settings” Enter the same encryption key as used for the access point. Fitting a rod antenna (vpage 21). (vpage 35). [Characters that can be input] 1 A ~ Z a ~ z 0 ~ 9 ! “ # % & ’ ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] (space) Connections b If a LAN cable is connected, remove it. When no security settings have been used in the Internet Select when access connection settings, this step is not necessary. Turn on the AVR-4308 (vpage 51). points cannot be searched automatically. r When encryption is by “WEP”, select the “Default Key” using 2 the i button, and then press the o p button. Setup Set the access point at the GUI menu “Manual Setup” [Selectable items] 1 2 3 4 3 – “Network Setup” – “Network Setup”. Select the same default key as used for the access point. This Playback When searching access points to connect automatically, refer to should normally be set to “1”. “Automatic settings”. t Use the i button to select “Connection” and press the ENTER When searching access points to connect manually, refer to button. b If the access points are repeat search, use the i button to select “Manual settings”. Network connection starts. Remote Control the “Search” and press the ENTER button. n Automatic settings When connection is established with the access point, “Connection completed.” is displayed.

q Select “Search”. Select when searching Multi-Zone access points again. Information w Select the access point. Example) DENON e If there is an encryption setting for the access point you selected in step w, enter same encryption key as used for the access AVR-4308 performs automatic network setup due to the DHCP Troubleshooting point. (If there is no encryption setting, proceed to step t. function. When connecting to a network that has no DHCP function, e Enter perform the setting in step 4. encryption key. Specifications q Select “Search” and press the ENTER button. The access point you have set is displayed. r Set only during w Use the ui button to select the access point, and then press w the ENTER button. “WEP” in step . t Select “Connection”.

34 ENGLISH Getting Started n Manual settings r Use the ui button to select the Security and press the i Set the IP address. button. 4 [Selectable items] b For details, see page 33 “Wired LAN settings” in step 3. None :

q Select “Detail”. Select if not encrypted. Connections Can also be used even without encryption, through we recommend encryption for improved security. If you are using a router with no DHCP function to automatically assign the IP address, set the IP address manually. WEP WPA-PSK(TKIP) WPA-PSK(AES) WPA2-PSK(TKIP) w Select the communication mode. Example) Infrastructure WPA2-PSK(AES) : Setup Select the encryption method according to the encryption setting of the access point you are using. Playback t Use the uio p button to input the “Key” (encryption key) and press the ENTER button. Enter the same encryption key as used for the access point. e Input the SSID. r Select the [Characters that can be input] Remote Control encryption method. A ~ Z a ~ z 0 ~ 9 ! “ # % & ’ ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] (space) Example) WEP When no security settings have been used in the Internet t Enter encryption key. connection settings, this step is not necessary. y When encryption is by “WEP”, select the “Default Key” using the i button, and then press the o p button. Multi-Zone [Selectable items] 1 2 3 4 Select the same default key as used for the access point. This y Set only should normally be set to “1”. during “WEP” Information u  i u Select “Connection”. in step r. Use the button to select “Connection” and press the ENTER button. q Select “Detail” and press the ENTER button. Network connection starts. When connection is established with the access point,

w  o p i Troubleshooting Use the button to select the Mode and press the button. “Connection completed.” is displayed. [Selectable items] Infrastructure : Select when communication is via an access point. Ad-hoc : Select during direct communication, when an

access point is not used. Specifications e Use the uio p button to input the name of the wireless network (SSID) and press the ENTER button. [Characters that can be input] A ~ Z a ~ z 0 ~ 9 ! “ # % & ’ ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] (space)

AVR-4308 performs automatic network setup due to the DHCP function. When connecting to a network that has no DHCP function, perform the setting in step 4.

35 ENGLISH

Getting Started y  uio p n Proxy settings Use the button to input the proxy server port number and d Make this setting when connecting to the Internet via a proxy server. press the ENTER button. Network Information u Use the i button to select “Exit” and press the ENTER button. Display network information. Setup is complete. [Items to be checked] Wired or Wireless SSID

Connections q Select “Detail”. DHCP= ON or OFF IP Address s Other MAC Address Make setting for amp power save mode and computer language environment. Setup Power Saving

Playback Make setting for power saving when not connected to network. w Select “Proxy”.

[Selectable items] ON OFF

Remote Control Character r Selecting the input method. e Set “ON”. Example) Address Set the character code type of the MP3 ID3-Tag played by USB.

t Input the [Selectable items] Auto Latin Japanese address

Multi-Zone or domain name. If the characters are not properly displayed when set to “Auto”, set to y Input the port “Latin” or “Japanese”. number.

Information u Select “Exit”. PC Language

q On the GUI menu, select “Manual Setup” – “Network Setup” Select computer environment language. – “Network Setup” – “Detail” and press the ENTER button. [Selectable items] ara chi (smpl) chi (trad) cze dan w Use the ui button to set “Proxy” and press the ENTER button Troubleshooting e Use the o p button to set “Proxy” to “ON” and press the i dut eng fin fre ger gre heb button. hun ita jpn kor nor pol por The proxy server is enabled. por (BR) rus spa swe r Use the o p button to select the proxy server input method, and tur then press the i button.

Specifications [Selectable items] Address : Select when inputting by address. Name : Select when inputting by domain name. t Use the ui p button to input the proxy server address or domain name and press the ENTER button. When “Address” is selected in step r : Input the address When “Name” is selected in step r : Input the domain name [Characters that can be input] A ~ Z a ~ z 0 ~ 9 ! “ # % & ’ ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] (space)

36 ENGLISH

Rch Level Getting Started Zone Setup Option Setup Adjust the right channel output level. Make settings for audio playback in a multi- Make various other settings. zone system. ~ ~ [Variable range] –12dB 0dB +12dB F Menu tree F F Menu tree F Manual Setup Channel Manual Setup Connections Zone Setup Switch between stereo and mono output. Option Setup a a Amp Assign ZONE2 [Selectable items] Stereo Mono s s ZONE3 Volume Control d Source Delete Setup When GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Option Setup” – “Amp Assign” f GUI

a ZONE2 (vpage 37) is set to “ZONE (MONO)”, “Bi-Wiring & ZONE (MONO)” g Quick Select Name Playback or “ZONE2/3 (MONO)”, the “Channel” setting is automatically set to Make settings for audio playback in a ZONE2 system. h Trigger Out 1 “Mono”. s j Trigger Out 2 ZONE3 Remote Control k Digital Out Make settings for audio playback in a ZONE3 system. Volume Level l Adjust the main volume level. Remote ID Bass A0 2Way Remote [Selectable items] Variable –40dB 0dB A1 Dimmer Adjust low frequency range (bass). A2 Maintenance Mode Multi-Zone [Variable range] –10dB ~ 0dB ~ +10dB A3 Service-Modus “Variable” is displayed when a power amplifier is assigned to the ZONE2 output channel at GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Option Setup” A4 Firmware Update Treble – “Amp Assign”(vpage 37). A5 Add New Feature

Adjust high frequency range (treble). Information Volume Limit ~ ~ [Variable range] –10dB 0dB +10dB Make a setting for maximum volume. a Amp Assign HPF [Selectable items] OFF –20dB –10dB 0dB Define how the amplifier for the surround and/or surround Troubleshooting When using speakers that cannot satisfactorily play low frequencies, back speaker channels is used. distortion of the bass sound can be reduced by setting “HPF” to Power On Level “ON”. The places where the surround amplifier and surround back amplifier Define the volume setting that is active when the power is turned on. are used can be set freely according to the usage environment. This [Selectable items] ON OFF makes it possible to output sound to rooms other than the room [Selectable items] Last – – – –70dB ~ +18dB (the main zone) where surround playback is performed (multi-zone Specifications Lch Level playback) or play the sound with high quality using the front speakers (bi-wiring/bi-amp connections). Adjust the left channel output level. Mute Level Set the amount of attenuation when muting is on. [Selectable items] ~ ~ [Variable range] –12dB 0dB +12dB [Selectable items] Full –40dB –20dB 7.1CH ZONE2 ZONE3 ZONE(MONO) Bi-Wiring Bi & ZONE2 Bi & ZONE3 Bi & ZONE(MONO) Bi-Amp ZONE2/3 ZONE2/3(MONO) 2CH Bi-Wiring 2CH Bi-Amp

For details, see “Amp Assign / Multi-Zone Connections and Operations” (vpage 77 ~ 81). 37 ENGLISH

Getting Started Format s Volume Control h Trigger Out 1 Select the video output signal format to match the monitor. Set the main zone volume setting. Select the conditions to turn on the trigger out 1 with respect to the zone, input source, surround mode, HDMI [Selectable items] PAL NTSC Volume Limit monitor, etc. NOTE

Connections For details about the trigger out function, see page 22. Make a setting for maximum volume. When a format other than the video format of the connected monitor j Trigger Out 2 [Selectable items] OFF –20dB –10dB 0dB is set, the picture will not be displayed properly. Use the procedure described below to change the video format. This sets the conditions to turn on the trigger out 2, in the same way as “Trigger Out 1” above. Power On Level Setup Operating from the main unit This sets the volume set when the main zone’s power is turned on. q Press and hold the STATUS and RETURN buttons for at least 3 [Selectable items] ON – – – seconds. Playback “Video Format” appears on the display. [Selectable items] Last – – – –80dB ~ +18dB w Use the o p button to make the setting. Setting with Respect to the Zone Mute Level e Press the ENTER, MENU or RETURN button to complete the setting. • When the power of the zone turned on/off, the trigger out turns on.

Remote Control • Associated with the power supply of zones set to “ON”. This sets the amount of attenuation of the volume when the mute mode is set in the main zone. Setting with Respect to the Input Source

[Selectable items] Full –40dB –20dB • When the input source set to on is selected, the trigger out turns on. Text • Associated with respect to the input source for zones set to “ON” at Multi-Zone d Source Delete “Setting with Respect to the Zone”. Remove input sources that are not used from the display. Text information display. Setting with Respect to the Surround Mode [Selectable items] ON OFF [Selectable items] ON Delete • When the surround mode set to on is selected, the trigger out turns Information on. NOTE Master Volume • Associated with respect to surround modes that are set to “ON”. • Input sources being used in the various zones cannot be deleted. Master volume display during adjustment. • This can be set if the “MAIN ZONE” setting at “Setting with Respect • Input sources set to “Delete” cannot be selected from GUI menu to the Zone” is set to “ON”. “Source Select” or using the SOURCE SELECT knob on the main unit [Selectable items] ON OFF • Associated when an input source for which “Setting with Respect to Troubleshooting or SOURCE SELECT button on the remote control unit. the Input Source” is set to “ON” is selected. NET/USB / iPod / Tuner Setting with Respect to the Monitor f GUI This sets the time the on-screen display is displayed when an operation • When the HDMI monitor set to on is selected, the trigger out turns Make GUI related settings. is performed. on. Specifications [Selectable items] Always 30s 10s OFF • Associated with respect to HDMI monitor that are set to “ON”. Screensaver • This can be set if the “MAIN ZONE” setting at “Setting with Respect to the Zone” is set to “ON”. Make screensaver settings. g Quick Select Name • Associated when an input source for which “Setting with Respect to Use the screensaver to prevent burn-in on the monitor screen. the Input Source” is set to “ON” is selected. When set to “ON”, the screensaver is activated if there is no activity Change the Quick Select name. for about 3 minutes. Up to 16 characters can be input.

[Selectable items] ON OFF [Input characters]

Wall Paper A ~ Z a ~ z 0 ~ 9 Change the GUI background. ! “ # % & ’ ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] (space)

[Selectable items] Picture Black Gray Blue 38 ENGLISH Getting Started k Digital Out A1 Dimmer A3 Maintenance Mode Set usage of OPT3 OUT. Adjust display brightness of the receiver. This sets the function for maintenance by a DENON serviceperson or installer. (For professional use only.) [Selectable items] ZONE4 Select Rec Select [Selectable items] Bright Dim Dark OFF This function allows a DENON serviceperson or installer to check the AVR-4308’s status and make settings via the Internet. Connections NOTE Operating from the main unit The ZONE4 operations cannot be performed when set to “Rec Press the DIMMER button. NOTE Select”. Bright Dim Only use this function if so instructed by a DENON serviceperson or installer.

OFF Dark Setup l Remote ID Set remote control ID. Match the ID setting of the remote control unit and the A4 Playback A2 Firmware Update receiver. Setup Lock Update the firmware of the receiver. Protect settings from inadvertent change.

[Selectable items] 1 2 3 4 Remote Control Check for Update [Selectable items] ON OFF You can check for firmware updates. You can also check approximately • When changing the remote ID, also change the AMP, iPod, TU and how long it will take to complete an update. NET/DTU modes of the main remote control unit at the same time • When “Setup Lock” is set to “ON”, the settings listed below can (vpage 71). no longer be changed. Also, “SETUP LOCKED!” is displayed if you Start Multi-Zone • When changing the remote ID, also change the sub remote control attempt to operate related buttons. Execute the update process. v unit at the same time ( page 76). ⋅ GUI menu operations When updating starts, the power indicator becomes red and the GUI ⋅ RESTORER screen is shut down. The amount of update time which has elapsed A0 ⋅ Night Mode is displayed.

2Way Remote Information ⋅ Parameter When updating is complete the power indicator becomes green and Make setting for 2-way remote control unit. ⋅ Room EQ normal status is resumed. ⋅ Channel Level b ⋅ Audio Delay If the display reads as shown below, check the settings and network [Selectable items] Used Not Used • To cancel the setting, press the MENU button to re-display the “Setup environment, then update again. Lock” screen, then change the setting to “OFF”. Display Description Troubleshooting When using a 2-way remote control unit (RC-7000CI and RC-7001RCI, Updating failed Updating failed. sold separately), set this to “Used”. Login failed Failure to log into server. Server is busy Server is busy. Wait a while then try again. Connection fail Failure connecting to server. Specifications

39 ENGLISH Getting Started A5 Add New Feature Notes concerning use of “Firmware Update” Display the new functions (payment required) which can be and “Add New Feature” purchased for downloading to the AVR-4308 and upgrade. • In order to use these functions, you must have the correct system When you purchase a new function and register your user information, requirements and settings for a broadband Internet connection. Source Select

Connections • Do not turn off the power until updating / upgrading is completed. “Registered” is displayed on this menu and you can proceed with the • Even with a broadband connection to the Internet, approximately Use this procedure to select the input source and make the settings upgrade. 1 hour is required for the updating / upgrading procedure to be related to playing input sources. completed. Once updating / upgrading starts, normal operations on the When “Not Registered” is displayed on the Add New Feature screen,

Setup AVR-4308 cannot be performed until updating / upgrading is you cannot upgrade. completed. Input Source Selection To use the upgrade function, you should purchase an upgrade package Furthermore, updating / upgrading the firmware may reset the F Menu tree F

Playback from the DENON website. backup data for the parameters, etc., set for the AVR-4308. Source Select To purchase the package, you will need the ID number shown on this screen. TUNER To display the ID number on the screen, hold the p and STATUS PHONO Remote Control buttons on the main unit down for 3 seconds or more. Information regarding the “Firmware Update” function and “Add New Feature” will be announced on the DENON web site each time related CD Upgrade plans are defined. DVD HDP Execute the upgrade process. When updating starts, the power indicator becomes red and the GUI TV/CBL

Multi-Zone screen is shut down. The amount of update time which has elapsed SAT is displayed. Language When updating is complete the power indicator becomes green and This sets the language used on the display VCR normal status is resumed. screens. DVR b If the upgrade is not successful, an error message identical to those F F Information Menu tree V.AUX in “Firmware Update” will appear on the display, check the settings Manual Setup NET/USB and network environment, then update again. Language DAB Upgrade Status

Troubleshooting [Selectable items] A list of the additional functions provided by the Upgrade will be Operating from the main unit or main remote control unit displayed. English Deutsch Français Italiano GOperation on the main unitH Español Nederlands Svenska Turn the SOURCE SELECT knob. b If “Rec Select” or “Video Select” is selected for the input source, press the SOURCE button before turning the SOURCE SELECT knob. Specifications Operating from the main unit b The GUI menu is not displayed when performing this setting. GOperation on the main remote control unitH q Press and hold the STATUS and RETURN buttons for at least 3 Press the SOURCE SELECT button. seconds. The desired input source can be selected directly. “Video Format” appears on the display. w Use the ui button to set “GUI Language”. e Use the o p button to make the setting. r Press the ENTER, MENU or RETURN button to complete the setting.

(Main unit) (Main remote control unit)

40 ENGLISH Getting Started Source Select d Preset Skip To operate the AVR-4308 using the main remote control unit, set the DAB Set the preset memories that you do not want to display remote control unit to the AMP mode (vpage 68 “Remote Control a Play when tuning. Unit Operations”). A2 Auto Tune A ~ G d Preset Skip Connections Select the preset channel(s) you do not want to display. A3 Tuning Aid Settings Related to Playing A4 DRC Value [Input source] TUNER DAB Input Sources g Input Mode

[Selectable items] 2 4 6 8 Setup h Rename All 1 3 5 7 F Menu tree F j Other Source Select [Selectable items] ON Skip

Playback TUNER z : “Play” and “Playback Mode (iPod)” are displayed for input sources a Play for which “iPod dock” is assigned. s Auto Preset When set “All” to “Skip”, it is possible to skip entire preset memory blocks (A to G). Remote Control d Preset Skip a Play f Preset Name The playback screen is displayed. g Input Mode f Preset Name h Rename [Input source] TUNER NET/USB DAB iPod Assign name to a preset memory. ( ) j Other Names containing up to 8 characters can be input. Multi-Zone PHONO s Auto Preset A1 ~ G8 g Input Mode Use the auto preset function to program radio stations. Select the preset memory number. h Rename Information j Other [Input source] TUNER [Input source] TUNER CD, DVD, HDP, TV/CBL, SAT, VCR, DVR, V.AUX [Characters that can be input] a Playz [Selectable items] Start k Playback Mode (iPod)z A ~ Z a ~ z 0 ~ 9 ! “ # % & ’ ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] (space)

Troubleshooting l Assign If an FM station cannot be preset automatically, select the desired g Input Mode station by tuning it in manually, then preset it manually. h Rename j Other

NET/USB Specifications a Play A0 Playback Mode A1 Still Picture g Input Mode h Rename j Other

41 ENGLISH

Getting Started Decode Mode Video Convert g Input Mode Set the decode mode for this source. Automatically convert video input signal to monitor output format. Make input mode and decode mode settings for this source. [Input source] CD DVD HDP TV/CBL SAT VCR [Input source] DVD HDP TV/CBL SAT VCR DVR The selectable input modes depend on the input source (vpage 43) DVR V.AUX V.AUX Connections and “Assign” setting . ON OFF Input Mode [Selectable items] Auto PCM DTS [Selectable items] Set the input mode for this source. NOTE When a non-standard video signal from a game machine or some other Setup [Input source] TUNER PHONO iPod • This can be selected for input sources for which the GUI menu ( ) “Assign” setting is set to “HDMI” or “Digital” (vpage 43). source is input, the video conversion function might not operate. If this happens, please set the conversion mode to “OFF”. [Selectable items] Analog EXT. IN • Only set “PCM” and “DTS” when playing the respective signals.

Playback Source Level [Input source] NET/USB DAB h Rename Corrects the playback level of the selected input source’s audio input. Change the display name for this source.

Remote Control [Selectable items] Auto EXT. IN ~ ~ Names containing up to 8 characters can be input. [Variable range] –12dB 0dB +12dB [Input source] [Characters that can be input] CD DVD HDP TV/CBL SAT VCR DVR V.AUX For input sources for which “HDMI” and “Digital” are set at the GUI A ~ Z a ~ z 0 ~ 9 ! “ # % & ’ ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] (space) [Selectable items] menu “Assign” setting, the analog input level and digital input level can

Multi-Zone be set separately. Auto HDMI Digital Analog EXT. IN j Other k Make various other settings. Playback Mode (iPod) Make settings for“iPod”playback. Information • When a digital signal is properly input, the “ ” indicator lights on Video Select the display. If the “ ” indicator does not light, check the digital Repeat input connector assignment and the connections. Switch video input source while listening to audio signal. • The surround mode cannot be set if the input mode is set to “EXT. Make settings for repeat mode. IN”. [Selectable items] Troubleshooting [Input source] CD DVD HDP TV/CBL SAT VCR Operating from the main unit or main remote DVD HDP TV/CBL SAT VCR DVR V.AUX SOURCE DVR V.AUX control unit Operating from the main unit Press the INPUT MODE button on the main unit or the INPUT button on [Selectable items] All One OFF the main remote control unit. Press the VIDEO SELECT button, then turn the SOURCE SELECT knob until the desired picture appears. Specifications Auto HDMI z1 Digital z2 b To cancel, press the main unit’s VIDEO SELECT button, then turn the Shuffle main unit’s SOURCE SELECT knob and select “SOURCE”. EXT. IN Analog Make settings for shuffle mode. NOTE z1: This can be selected for input sources for which the GUI menu [Input source] CD DVD HDP TV/CBL SAT VCR v • It is not possible to select HDMI input signals. “Assign” setting is set to “HDMI” ( page 43). Excluding CD. DVR V.AUX z2: This can be selected for input sources for which the GUI menu • When playing HDMI video input signals, the analog video signal of “Assign” setting is set to “Digital” (vpage 43). another input source cannot be selected for the HDMI video output. • Input sources for which “Delete” is selected at “Source Delete” [Selectable items] Songs Albums OFF cannot be selected.

This can be selected for input sources for which “Assign” is assigned at the “iPod dock” setting.

42 ENGLISH

Digital iPod dock Getting Started l Assign Select digital input connector to assign to this source. Assign Control Dock for iPod to this source. Assign input sources to input connectors. [Input source] CD DVD HDP TV/CBL SAT [Input source] CD DVD HDP TV/CBL SAT VCR HDMI VCR DVR V.AUX DVR V.AUX

Select HDMI connector to assign to this source. Connections [Selectable items] Coaxial1 ~ 3 Optical1 ~ 4 [Selectable items] Assign None [Input source] DVD HDP TV/CBL SAT VCR DENON LINK z None DVR V.AUX

Input • With the default settings, the Control Dock for iPod can be used Setup CD DVD HDP TV/CBL SAT VCR DVR V.AUX [Selectable items] 1 2 3 4 None source connected to the VCR (iPod) connector. Input Default Coaxial Coaxial Coaxial Optical Optical Optical Optical • Even if “iPod dock” is set to “Assign”, if the AVR-4308 is not connected

DVD HDP TV/CBL SAT VCR DVR V.AUX None Playback source setting 3 1 2 1 3 2 4 to a Control dock for iPod, the input source can be used as the normal Default input source. HDMI1 HDMI2 HDMI3 None None HDMI4 None z: When a DENON DVD player and the DENON LINK have been setting connected, be sure to make a setting to “DENON LINK”. A0 Playback Mode Remote Control NOTE Make settings for “NET/USB” playback. • With HDMI, the video and audio signals are transferred simultaneously. • This cannot be set for input sources for which “iPod dock” is To play the video signal assigned at “HDMI” combined with the audio assigned. signal assigned at “Digital”, select “Digital” at GUI menu “Source • When an input source to which “DENON LINK” has been assigned [Input source] NET/USB Select” – “Input Mode” (vpage 42). is selected in the MAIN ZONE, the PCM signal and network audio

• When the AVR-4308 and monitor are connected with an HDMI cable, signal (Internet radio, music server or USB) input from the digital USB Select Multi-Zone if the monitor is not compatible with HDMI audio signal playback, input connector cannot be output to the analog REC OUT connector Select USB port to use. only the video signals are output to the monitor. or multi-zone. • The audio signals input from the analog, digital and EXT. IN connectors [Selectable items] Front Rear are not output to the monitor. Component Information NOTE Select component video input to assign to this source. This cannot be set for input sources for which “iPod dock” is Match the port to be used and the setting. assigned. [Input source] DVD HDP TV/CBL SAT VCR Repeat DVR V.AUX Troubleshooting Make settings for repeat mode. [Selectable items] 1 2 3 None [Selectable items] All One OFF Input DVD HDP TV/CBL SAT VCR DVR V.AUX source Random

Default Component Component Component Specifications None None None None setting 1 2 3 Make random mode settings.

NOTE [Selectable items] ON OFF This cannot be set for input sources for which “iPod dock” is assigned. Direct Play Set the folder to be played using the DIRECT PLAY button on the sub remote control unit.

[Selectable items] Favorites All Music

43 ENGLISH Getting Started A1 Still Picture A3 Tuning Aid Make settings for still picture (JPEG) playback. Adjust antenna angle and position while checking signal strength indication. [Input source] NET/USB The reception sensitivity of the currently tuned in frequency

Connections is displayed. Slide Show Make slideshow settings. [Input source] DAB After selecting “Tuning Aid”, perform the following operation: [Selectable items] ON OFF Press the ui button to display the frequency of the ensemble that you

Setup want to receive. Interval Display the signal strength for that ensemble.

Playback Set the playback time per image. A4 DRC Value [Variable range] 5s ~ 60s Change DRC (dynamic range control) value from broadcast Remote Control station setting. A2 Auto Tune The DRC (Dynamic Range Control) function lets you change Search for available stations. Use this the first time or after the dynamic range of the received sound depending on moving. the content of the broadcast so that the sound is easier to hear even when the volume is low.

Multi-Zone The dynamic range can be fine-adjusted in three steps. [Input source] DAB [Input source] DAB Full Band Select full band (band III or L band). [Selectable items] OFF 1/2 1 Information BandIII Select band III. Troubleshooting UK Band Select UK band.

[Selectable items] Start Specifications

44 ENGLISH Getting Started DSP Simulation Playback Select the “Cinema”, “Music”, “Game” and “Pro Logic” modes at GUI The desired mode according to the program source and menu “Parameter” – “Audio” – “Surround Parameters” – “Mode” (vpage 46 ~ 48). viewing situation can be selected from among 10 DENON Surround Modes original surround modes.

The surround parameters can be adjusted (vpage 85, 86) Connections Playing Multi-channel Sources to achieve an even more realistic, powerful sound field. (Dolby Digital, DTS, etc.) Standard Playback [Selectable items] This is the standard mode for enjoying surround sound [Selectable items] according to the program source. 7CH STEREO : This mode is for enjoying stereo sound from Setup STANDARD : all speakers. To select these surround modes pressing the STANDARD button on the This mode is for decoding the input signals according to their format WIDE SCREEN : This mode is for enjoying the atmosphere of Playback main unit or press the STD button on the main remote control unit. The and playing surround sound. viewing a movie on a large screen. mode switches each time the button is pressed. The display when the STANDARD mode is selected depends on the SUPER STADIUM : This mode is suited for viewing sports input signal and surround back output playback mode. programs. Remote Control Surround Playback of 2-channel Sources Input signal Display ROCK ARENA : This mode is for enjoying the atmosphere of a DOLBY DIGITAL DOLBY DIGITAL live concert in an arena. n When using a surround back speaker DOLBY DIGITAL EX (other than 2ch) / JAZZ CLUB : This mode is for enjoying the atmosphere of a Dolby DOLBY DIGITAL+PLgx CINEMA [Selectable items] DOLBY PLgx DTS NEO:6 DOLBY DIGITAL live concert in a jazz club. Digital EX DOLBY DIGITAL+PLgx MUSIC n When not using a surround back speaker Source DOLBY DIGITAL CLASSIC CONCERT : This mode is for appreciating classical concert Plus DOLBY DIGITAL + programs. Multi-Zone z [Selectable items] DOLBY PLg DTS NEO:6 DOLBY TrueHD DOLBY TrueHD MONO MOVIE : This mode is for playing monaural movie DTS (5.1ch) / DTS SURROUND sources with surround sound. DOLBY PLgx g DTS+PLgx CINEMA : The signals are decoded in DOLBY PL x or DTS-ES Discrete VIDEO GAME : This mode is suited for achieving surround g g DTS+PLgx MUSIC or DOLBY PL DOLBY PL for playback. 6.1 / sound with video games. Information DTS-ES Matrix DTS+NEO:6 DTS DTS ES MTRX6.1 (z1) MATRIX : This mode lets you add a sense of expansion Cinema : This mode is suited for movie sources. 6.1 / Surround DTS ES DSCRT6.1 (z2) to stereo music sources. DTS 96/24 z Music : This mode is suited for music sources. Source DTS 96/24 ( 3) DTS-HD High VIRTUAL : This mode is for enjoying surround effects DTS-HD HI RES using only the front speakers or headphones. Troubleshooting Game : This mode is suited for games. Resolution Audio DTS-HD Master z DTS-HD MSTR : When playing sources recorded in monaural in the MONO MOVIE Pro Logic : This is the Pro Logic playback mode. This can Audio mode, the sound will be off balance with a single channel (left or MULTI CH IN be selected when playing with a DOLBY PLg DVD- right), so input to both channels. PCM (multi ch) / MULTI IN+PLgx CINEMA decoder. When this mode is selected, “DOLBY Audio, DSD (multi ch) MULTI IN+PLgx MUSIC PL” is displayed. SACD MULTI CH IN 7.1 • To select these surround modes using the buttons on the main Specifications z1 : This is displayed when the input signal is “DTS-ES Matrix 6.1” DTS NEO:6 : The signals are decoded in DTS NEO:6 for remote control unit, press the SIMU button. The mode switches each and the AVR-4308’s “AFDM” setting is set to “ON”. playback. time the button is pressed. z2 : This is displayed when the input signal is “DTS-ES Discrete • Depending on the program source being played, it may not be Cinema : This mode is suited for movie sources. 6.1”. possible to achieve a satisfactory surround effect. In this case, try z3 : This is displayed when the input signal is “DTS 96/24”. other modes to achieve a sound field suited to your tastes. Music : This mode is suited for music sources.

For details, see page 87.

45 ENGLISH Getting Started Stereo Playback Playback in the PURE DIRECT Mode This is the mode that recreates the original sound most [Selectable items] faithfully, providing extremely high quality sound. : Parameter STEREO Press the PURE DIRECT button on the main unit or the Connections This is the mode for playing in stereo. The tone can be adjusted. PURE button on the main remote control unit. Sound is output from the front left and right speakers and subwoofer. Parameters can be called out directly by pressing the PARA button on the main remote control unit.

• When in the PURE DIRECT mode, the GUI screen is not displayed Setup Direct Playback and the display on the main unit is turned off. Audio • If the HDMI input connector is selected, video outputs are output in Adjust various audio parameters.

Playback [Selectable items] the PURE DIRECT mode. • The channel level and surround parameters in the PURE DIRECT DIRECT : mode are the same as in the DIRECT mode. F Menu tree F In this mode the signals bypass the tone control circuitry for high Parameter Remote Control quality sound. Audio The sound is output to the same channels as the input signal. a Surround Parameters The display when the DIRECT mode is selected depends on the input signal. s Tone For multi-channel sources, the display depends on the surround back d Room EQ output’s play mode. f RESTORER Multi-Zone Input signal Display g Night Mode Analog signal / h Audio Delay PCM (2ch) / Dolby Digital source / DIRECT Information DTS source / a Other 2-channel digital signals Surround Parameters DSD (2ch) DSD DIRECT (z) Adjust surround sound parameters. MULTI CH DIRECT The adjustable parameters differ for the different surround M DIRECT + PLgx CINEMA modes (vpage 85, 86). Troubleshooting PCM (multi ch) M DIRECT + PLgx MUSIC M DIRECT 7.1 Mode DSD (multi ch) DSD MULTI DIRECT (z) Select the mode according to the playback source. z : When DSD signals are converted to PCM signals as set by the audio parameters and speaker settings, “DIRECT” or “MULTI CH [Selectable items] DIRECT” is displayed. Specifications In the PLgx or PLg mode: Cinema Music Game Pro Logic z For details, see page 88. In the DTS NEO:6 mode: Cinema Music z: Can be selected in the PLg mode.

The “Music” mode is also effective for movie sources including a lot of stereo music.

46 ENGLISH

Cinema EQ Dimension AFDM Getting Started Soften the treble range of movie soundtracks for better Shift sound image center to front or rear, to adjust playback balance. Auto-select surround mode by source. understanding. This function only works for software containing a special identification [Variable range] 0 ~ 3 ~ 6 signal. [Selectable items] ON OFF If the software being played is recorded in Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES,

Center Width it is played in 6.1-channels. If not, it is played in 5.1-channels. Connections DRC Assign center channel signal to front left and right channels for wider [Selectable items] ON OFF Compress dynamic range (difference between loud and soft sounds). sound. Example : Playing Dolby Digital software (with EX flag) [Selectable items] Auto Low Middle High OFF [Variable range] 0 ~ 3 ~ 7

• When “AFDM” is set to “ON”, the surround mode is automatically Setup set to the DOLBY D + PLgx C mode. Delay Time • To play in the DOLBY DIGITAL EX mode, set “AFDM” to “OFF” and

This can be set in the Dolby TrueHD mode. “SB CH Out” to “MTRX ON”. Playback Adjust delay time to control sound stage size. D.COMP [Variable range] 0 ms ~ 30 ms ~ 300 ms Some Dolby Digital EX sources do not include EX flags. If the playback

Compress dynamic range (difference between loud and soft sounds). Remote Control Effect mode does not switch automatically even when “AFDM” is set to [Selectable items] OFF Low Middle High “ON”, set “SB CH Out” to “MTRX ON” or “PLgx CINEMA”. Switch effect signal for multi-surround speakers on and off. SB CH Out (for Multi-channel sources) [Selectable items] ON OFF When playing DTS sources, this is only displayed for compatible Select playback mode for surround back channels. software. Multi-Zone Effect Level [Selectable items] LFE Adjust effect signal level. z1 z2 NON MTRX MTRX ON PLIIx CINEMA PLIIx MUSIC z z Adjust the low-frequency effects level (LFE). [Variable range] 1 ~ 10 ~ 15 ES MTRX 3 ES DSCRT 4 DSCRT ON OFF Information z1: This can be selected when “Surround Back” is set to “2spkrs” [Variable range] –10dB ~ 0dB at the GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Speaker Setup” – “Speaker Set to a lower level if the positioning and sense of phase of the Configuration” setting (vpage 29). surround signals seems unnatural. z2: This can be selected when “Surround Back” is set to “2spkrs” For proper playback of the different program sources, we recommend Troubleshooting or “1spkr” at the GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Speaker Setup” setting to the values below. Room Size • Dolby Digital sources: “0 dB” –“Speaker Configuration” setting. • DTS movie sources: “0 dB” Determine size of acoustic environment. z3: This can be selected when playing DTS sources. • DTS music sources: “–10 dB” z4: This can be selected when playing DTS sources including a discrete 6.1-channel signal identification signal. [Selectable items] Small Medium small Medium

Center Image Specifications Medium large Large Assign center channel signal to front left and right channels for wider When using the surround back speaker, you can change the “SB sound. NOTE CH Out” setting by pressing the STANDARD button. “Room Size” does not indicate the size of the room in which sources [Variable range] 0.0 ~ 0.3 ~ 1.0 are played. SB CH Out (for 2-channel sources) Panorama Determine whether to use surround back speakers. Assign front L/R signal also to surround channels, for wider sound. [Selectable items] ON OFF [Selectable items] ON OFF

47 ENGLISH

Getting Started Subwoofer Att. d Room EQ f RESTORER Attenuate subwoofer level when using EXT. IN mode. Select room equalizer for current environment. This function restores compressed audio signals to how [Selectable items] ON OFF they were before compression and corrects the sense of [Selectable items] volume of the bass and treble to obtain richer playback

Connections sound. Audyssey : Optimize frequency response of all speakers. Set this to “ON” if the subwoofer channel level seems too high when playing Super Audio CD. [Selectable items] Audyssey Byp. L/R : Optimize frequency response of speakers except front L and R speakers. Subwoofer OFF Setup Audyssey Flat : Optimize frequency response of all speakers to Mode1 (RESTORER 64) Turn subwoofer output on and off. flat response. Mode2 (RESTORER 96) Playback [Selectable items] ON OFF Manual : Apply frequency response set with “Manual EQ” (vpage 32). Mode3 (RESTORER HQ) Default OFF : Turn equalizer off. Remote Control Resets the settings to the default values. The default setting for “NET/USB” and “iPod” is “Mode3”. All others are set to “OFF”. Operating from the main unit or main remote control unit Operating from the main unit or main remote s Tone Press the ROOM EQ button on the main unit or the EQ button on the control unit main remote control. Adjust the tonal quality of the sound. During playback, press the RESTORER button on the main unit or the Multi-Zone OFF Audyssey Audyssey Byp. L/R RSTR button on the main remote control unit. Tone Defeat Manual Audyssey Flat When set to something other than “OFF”, “ ” is displayed. Turn tone adjustments off. When “Audyssey” is selected, “ ” lights. OFF Mode 1 Mode 2

Information (RESTORER 64) (RESTORER 96) [Selectable items] ON OFF When “Audyssey Byp. L/R” or “Audyssey Flat” is selected, or when the auto setup measuring results have changed, “ ” lights. Mode 3 (RESTORER HQ) The tone cannot be adjusted when in the DIRECT mode.

Troubleshooting • “Audyssey”, “Audyssey Byp. L/R” and “Audyssey Flat” can be About the RESTORER function selected after the auto setup procedure has been performed. Bass • Such compressed audio formats as MP3, WMA (Windows Media • If the settings of the speakers for which “None” has been determined Audio) and MPEG-4 AAC reduce the amount of data by eliminating Adjust low frequency range (bass). at “Auto Setup” are changed, “Audyssey”, “Audyssey Byp. L/R” and signal components that are hard for the human ear to hear. The “Audyssey Flat” cannot be selected and measurements have to be [Variable range] –6dB ~ +6dB RESTORER function generates the signals eliminated upon taken again to include the newly-added speakers. compression, restoring the sound to conditions near those of the

Specifications • When using headphones, “Room EQ” is always set to “OFF”. Treble original sound before compression. It also corrects the sense of volume of the bass to obtain richer sound with compressed audio Adjust high frequency range (treble). signals. • This is displayed on the GUI menu and can be set when the input [Variable range] –6dB ~ +6dB source is set to “DAB” or “NET/USB”, or when analog signals (including AM/FM signals) or PCM signals (fs = 44.1/48 kHz) are input. “Bass” and “Treble” can be set when “Tone Defeat” is set to “OFF”.

48 ENGLISH Getting Started g Night Mode Picture Adjust Optimized setting for late-night listening. Adjust the picture quality.

[Selectable items] OFF Low Middle High Information F Menu tree F Parameter Connections Operating from the main remote control unit Picture Adjust Press the NGT button. a Contrast Status The “ ” indicator lights when “Low”, “Middle” or “High” is s Brightness Shows information about current settings.

selected. Setup d Chroma Level OFF Low Middle f Hue F F High Menu tree Playback Information a Contrast Status h a MAIN ZONE Audio Delay Adjust picture contrast. Remote Control Compensate for mismatched timing between video and s ZONE2/3/4 audio. [Variable range] –6 ~ 0 ~ +6 Delay audio. a MAIN ZONE This sets the delay time for audio signals. s Brightness Shows information about settings for main zone. Multi-Zone [Variable range] 0 ms ~ 200 ms Adjust picture brightness. The items displayed differ according to the input source.

[Variable range] 0 ~ +12 [Items to be checked] Operating from the main remote control unit q Press the A. DL button. Information Select Source Name Surround Mode Input Mode w Use the o p button to set. d Chroma Level Assign Room EQ Video Select Src Level Rec Select Adjust picture chroma level (saturation). Night Mode RESTORER etc. • This cannot be adjusted when playing in the EXT. IN, DIRECT or Troubleshooting STEREO mode (with “Front” set to “Large”, “Tone Defeat” to “ON” [Variable range] –6 ~ 0 ~ +6 and “Room EQ” to “OFF”.) • The adjustment range is 0 to 100 ms when the Auto Lipsync f s ZONE2/3/4 Correction function is activated. Hue Adjust color hue. Shows information about settings for multi-zone.

[Items to be checked] Power Select Source Volume Level Specifications [Variable range] –6 ~ 0 ~ +6

• Adjusting the “Contrast”, “Brightness”, “Chroma Level” and “Hue” settings does not affect the HDMI input signal. • “Hue” can be adjusted for composite video and S-Video signals. • The adjustment values are stored for the individual input sources.

49 ENGLISH Getting Started Audio Input Signal HDMI Information Quick Select Shows information about audio input Shows information about HDMI input/output Shows information about quick select signals. signals and monitor. settings. F Menu tree F F Menu tree F F Menu tree F Connections Information Information Information Audio Input Signal HDMI Information Quick Select a Signal Information 1 [Items to be checked] s Monitor1 2 Setup d Monitor2 3 Surround Mode : The currently set surround mode is displayed.

Playback Signal : The input signal type is displayed. [Items to be checked] a Signal Information Select Source Input Mode Room EQ fs : The input signal’s sampling frequency is The HDMI input/output signal information is displayed.

Remote Control displayed. Auto Surround Mode setting Volume Level Format : The number of channels in the input signal (front, [Items to be checked] Resolution Color Space Pixel Depth surround, LFE) is displayed. Offset : The dialogue normalization correction value is s For instructions on storing settings at Quick Select 1 to 3, see page displayed. Monitor1 66. Flag : “MATRIX” is displayed if the input signal has The HDMI monitor 1 information is displayed.

Multi-Zone undergone matrix processing, “DISCRETE” if the d input signal has undergone discrete processing. Monitor2 The HDMI monitor 2 information is displayed. Preset Station Dialogue normalization function Shows information about preset stations. Information This is automatically activated when playing Dolby Digital sources. [Items to be checked] Interface Supported resol. This function automatically corrects the standard signal level for individual program sources. F Menu tree F The correction value can be checked using the STATUS button on Information

Troubleshooting the main unit. Auto Surround Preset Station Shows information about auto surround A mode settings. B The surround mode for which the last C memory function was used for the different The figure is the correction value when the standard level is D corrected. input signal types is displayed. Specifications E F Menu tree F F Information G Auto Surround

[Input source] TUNER DAB NET/USB [Items to be checked] [Items to be checked] A1 ~ G8 Analog/PCM 2ch Digital 2ch Digital 5.1ch Multi ch

When the STATUS button on the main unit is pressed, the set’s status can be checked on the display. 50 ENGLISH

Turning Off the Sound Temporarily (Muting) Getting Started SOURCE SELECT Press [MUTE]. Playback

To cancel, press [MUTE] again. Muting can also be canceled by adjusting Connections Preparations the master volume.

Turning the Power On Listening with Headphones

Plug the headphones into . Setup Press . The sound from the speakers and pre-out connectors is automatically 1 The power indicator lights red and the power is set to the standby cut.

mode. Playback NOTE Press or [POWER ON]. Be careful not to set the volume too high when using headphones. The power indicator flashes green and the power turns on. 2 Remote Control [ AMP] To operate the AVR-4308 using the main remote control unit, set the Playing Video and Audio Equipment remote control unit to the AMP mode (vpage 68 “Remote Control Unit Operations”). Basic Operation Multi-Zone Turning the Power Off Prepare the equipment. q Press or [POWER OFF]. 1 The power is set to the standby mode. q Load the DVD, CD or other software in the player.

[POWER ON] v Information [POWER OFF] w Press . ( See the operating instructions of the respective devices.) The power indicator turns off, and so does the power. w To play a video device, switch the monitor input. (vSee the monitor’s operating instructions.) NOTE Power continues to be supplied to some of the circuitry even when To operate using the main remote control unit, set the Troubleshooting the power is in the standby mode. When leaving home for long periods remote control unit to the AMP mode. [MASTER VOLUME] of time or when traveling, either press to turn off the power, 2 [MUTE] v or unplug the power cord from the power outlet. ( page 68 “Remote Control Unit Operations”) SOURCE SELECT Use SOURCE SELECT to select the input source. Operations During Playback 3 Specifications : “Source Select” (vpage 40, 41) Adjusting the Master Volume Either turn or press [MASTER Start playback. (vSee the operating instructions of the respective devices.) About the button names in these explanations VOLUME]. 4 < > : Buttons on the main unit [ ] : Buttons on the remote control unit Button name only: Buttons on the main unit and remote control unit

51 ENGLISH Getting Started Listening to FM/AM Broadcasts Presetting Radio Stations (Preset Memory) Basic Operation Your favorite broadcast stations can be preset so that you can tune them in easily. Up to 56 stations can be preset. Either turn or press

Connections [TUNER] (AMP mode) to select “TUNER”. Tune in the broadcast station you want to preset. 1 : ”Source Select” (vpage 40, 41) 1 Press [MEMO].

Setup To operate using the main remote control unit, set the 2 2 remote control unit to the TUNER ( ) mode. (vpage 68 “Remote Control Unit Operations”) Press [A ~ G] to select the block in which the station is Playback 3 to be preset, then press [CHANNEL] or [1 ~ 8] to select Press [BAND] to select “FM” or “AM”. the preset number. 3 b The memory block can also be selected by pressing [SHIFT]. Remote Control Tune in the desired broadcast station. Press [MEMO] again to complete the setting. [ TU] 4 q To tune in automatically (Auto Tuning) 4 ( mode) Press [MODE] to light the “AUTO” indicator on the display, then use [df] to select the station you want to hear. Multi-Zone [A ~ G] w To tune in manually (Manual Tuning) • To preset other stations, repeat steps 1 to 4. [df] Press [MODE] to turn off the display’s “AUTO” indicator, then use • Stations can be preset automatically at GUI menu “Source Select” [BAND] [df] to select the station you want to hear. – “Tuner” – “Auto Preset” (vpage 41). [MEMO] NOTE Information [MODE] Preset stations are erased by overwriting them. • It is also possible to switch to “FM” or “AM” in step 1 by pressing [TUNER]. [SEARCH] • If the desired station cannot be tuned in with auto tuning, tune it in

Troubleshooting manually. [CHANNEL] • When tuning in stations manually, press and hold [df] to change frequencies continuously. [1 ~ 8] • The time for which the GUI menus are displayed can be set at GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Option Setup” – “GUI” – “Tuner” (vpage [TUNER] 38). Specifications (AMP mode), [SHIFT]

About the button names in these explanations < > : Buttons on the main unit [ ] : Buttons on the remote control unit Button name only: Buttons on the main unit and remote control unit

52 ENGLISH Getting Started Listening to Preset Stations RDS (Radio Data System) RDS Search RDS (works only on the FM band) is a broadcasting service Use this function to automatically tune to FM stations that Operation on the Main Unit which allows a station to send additional information along provide the RDS service. with the regular radio program signal. Press , then turn The following three types of RDS information can be Either turn or press [TUNER] Connections to select the preset radio station. received with this unit: 1 (AMP mode) to select “TUNER”.

Operation on the Main Remote Control Unit Program Type (PTY) To operate using the main remote control unit, set the 2 remote control unit to the TUNER ( ) mode. Press [A ~ G] to select the memory block. PTY identifies the type of RDS program. (vpage 68 “Remote Control Unit Operations”) Setup 1 The program types and their displays are as follows: Press [SEARCH] to select “RDS”. Press [CHANNEL] or [1 ~ 8] to select the desired preset NEWS News WEATHER Weather 3 Playback 2 channel. AFFAIRS Current Affairs FINANCE Finance INFO Information Children’s CHILDREN Press [CHANNEL]. n Default settings SPORT Sports programmes 4 The search for RDS stations begins automatically. Remote Control EDUCATE Education SOCIAL Social Affairs Auto tuner presets b If no RDS stations are found with the above operation, all the DRAMA Drama RELIGION Religion 87.5 / 89.1 / 98.1 / 108.0 / 90.1 / 90.1 / 90.1 / reception bands are searched. A1 ~ A8 PHONE IN Phone In 90.1 MHz CULTURE Culture b When a broadcast station is found, that station’s name appears on TRAVEL Travel the display. 522 / 603 / 999 / 1404 / 1611 kHz, SCIENCE Science B1 ~ B8 VARIED Varied LEISURE Leisure

90.1 / 90.1 / 90.1 MHz Multi-Zone To continue searching, repeat steps 2 to 3. C1 ~ C8 90.1 MHz POP M Pop Music JAZZ Jazz Music D1 ~ D8 90.1 MHz ROCK M Rock Music COUNTRY Country Music 5 b Easy Listening NATION M National Music If no RDS station is found when all the frequencies have been E1 ~ E8 90.1 MHz EASY M Music OLDIES Oldies Music searched, “NO RDS” is displayed. F1 ~ F8 90.1 MHz Information G1 ~ G8 90.1 MHz LIGHT M Light Classical FOLK M Folk Music CLASSICS Serious Classical DOCUMENT Documentary OTHER M Other Music Troubleshooting Traffic Program (TP) TP identifies programs that carry traffic announcements. This allows you to easily find out the latest traffic conditions in your area before leaving home.

Radio Text (RT) Specifications RT allows RDS stations to send text messages that appear on the display. NOTE The operations described below using [SEARCH] will not function in areas in which there are no RDS broadcasts.

53 ENGLISH Getting Started PTY Search TP Search Use this function to find RDS stations broadcasting a Use this function to find RDS stations broadcasting traffic designated program type (PTY). programs (TP stations). For a description of each program type, refer to “Program Type (PTY)”. Either turn or press [TUNER] Connections (AMP mode) to select “TUNER”. Either turn or press [TUNER] 1 1 (AMP mode) to select “TUNER”. To operate using the main remote control unit, set the 2 remote control unit to the TUNER ( ) mode.

Setup To operate using the main remote control unit, set the (vpage 68 “Remote Control Unit Operations”) 2 remote control unit to the TUNER ( ) mode. (vpage 68 “Remote Control Unit Operations”) Press [SEARCH] to select “TP”. Playback uiop Press [SEARCH] to select “PTY”. 3 3 Press [CHANNEL]. Remote Control TP search begins automatically. Watching the display, press ui to call out the desired 4 b If no TP station is found with the above operation, all the reception [ TU] 4 program type. bands are searched. b The station name is displayed on the display after searching ( mode) Press [CHANNEL]. stops. PTY search begins automatically.

Multi-Zone 5 b If there is no station broadcasting the designated program type To continue searching, repeat steps 2 to 3. with the above operation, all the reception bands are searched. 5 b The station name is displayed on the display after searching b If no other TP station is found when all the frequencies have been stops. searched, “NO PROGRAMME” is displayed. Information To continue searching, repeat steps 2 to 4. uiop 6 [SEARCH] b If no station broadcasting the designated program type is found

Troubleshooting when all the frequencies have been searched, “NO PROGRAMME” [CHANNEL] is displayed.

[TUNER] Specifications (AMP mode)

About the button names in these explanations < > : Buttons on the main unit [ ] : Buttons on the remote control unit Button name only: Buttons on the main unit and remote control unit

54 ENGLISH Getting Started RT (Radio Text) Listening to DAB broadcasts “RT” appears on the display when radio text data is About DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) received. • Since the DAB system is broadcasted in digital format, DAB system can supply crystal-clear audio and stable reception even in mobile objects. Either turn or press [TUNER] DAB is a new generation radio which can provide data service and supplementary multi-media services. (AMP mode) to select “TUNER”. • DAB broadcasts multiple services under one Ensemble that are called service components. Connections 1 • Each component contains inherent programmes; news, music, sports, and many more. To operate using the main remote control unit, set the • Each Ensemble and service component has its label, and users can recognize a current broadcasting station and service contents by using the label. 2 remote control unit to the TUNER ( ) mode. • The main service component is broadcast as Primary while the others are broadcast as Secondary. (vpage 68 “Remote Control Unit Operations”) • Also rich character information is serviced through Dynamic Labels; song title, artist composer etc. Setup

Press [SEARCH] to select “RT”. DAB Service Diagram 3 Playback b While receiving an RDS broadcast station, the text data broadcast DAB Signal from the station is displayed. b To turn the display off, press op. Remote Control b If no text data is being broadcast, “NO TEXT DATA” is displayed. Ensemble Ensemble National DAB Name

(Service 1) (Service 2) (Service 3) (Service 4) Multi-Zone

Service Components Alpha 1 Parliament Alpha 2 Alpha 3 Alpha 4 Station Name (Primary) (Secondary) Information

Pop Music News Sports Classic Educate Programme type Troubleshooting Specifications

55 ENGLISH Getting Started Basic Operation Station Order Selection Either turn or press [DTU] (AMP Press [SEARCH]. 1 mode) to select “DAB”. 1 The Station Order selection mode is set. : ”Source Select” (vpage 40, 41) Connections Use ui to select the desired mode. 2 To operate using the main remote control unit, set the Alphanumeric 2 remote control unit to the NET/DTU ( ) mode. Select “Alphanumeric” to browse through all of the registered DAB v ( page 68 “Remote Control Unit Operations”) services in the alphanumeric order. Setup ↓ Press [d f] to select the station. Active station If the station you select is in stereo, the “STEREO” indicator will Playback 3 Select “Active Station” to browse through all of the receivable DAB ui light up. services in the alphabetical order. ENTER b About secondary service ↓ When receiving a Secondary service, “>>” is indicated to the right Favourite station

Remote Control of “station name”. Select “Favourite Station” to browse through the top 10 services When [d] is pressed, the Secondary service Component is most frequently selected with this unit. received and “<<” indicator lights. ↓ Press [f] to go back to the primary service again. Ensemble [ iPod] Select “Ensemble” to browse through the registered DAB services [ NET/ from the lowest to the highest channel labels.

Multi-Zone DTU] ( mode) • When using DABs function for the first time, perform the GUI menu Press ENTER to set. “Source Select” – “DAB” – “Auto Tune” procedure (vpage 44).

[df] • DAB stations can be preset using the same procedure as for FM/ 3 AM stations (vpage 52, 53 “Presetting Radio Stations (Preset Information Memory)” and “Listening to Preset Stations”). ENTER [POWER OFF] • The time for which the GUI menu is displayed can be set at GUI menu v ui “Manual Setup” – “Option Setup” – “GUI” – “Tuner” ( page 38).

Troubleshooting [SEARCH] [SEARCH]

[DTU] [iPod] (AMP mode) (AMP mode) Specifications

About the button names in these explanations < > : Buttons on the main unit [ ] : Buttons on the remote control unit Button name only: Buttons on the main unit and remote control unit

56 ENGLISH Getting Started Check the DAB Reception Information iPod® Playback Press [SEARCH] and hold it down for a 2 seconds or The music on an iPod can be played by using the Control 4 more to select the display mode. Press to switch the DAB reception Dock for iPod (ASD-1R, sold separately). To switch between modes, press and hold down the button. information. The operation can also be performed using the buttons on When remote mode is active, “Remote” is displayed. b The display switches as shown below each time is the main unit or remote control unit while watching the GUI [Display mode] Browse mode Remote mode Connections pressed. menus. q DLS (Dynamic Label Segment) : Display location Main unit display iPod display The text data included in the broadcast scrolls. iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. ↓ and other countries. Playable Audio file S S b files A Sz w PTY (Programme Type) : The iPod may only be used to copy or play contents that are not Video file Setup The category of the broadcast being received is displayed. copyrighted or contents for which copying or playback is legally Remote ↓ permitted for your private use as an individual. Be sure to comply Active control unit S S

e Ensemble Name : with applicable copyright legislation. buttons (AVR-4308) Playback The ensemble name is displayed. iPod A S ↓ z r Channel and Frequency : Basic Operation : Video may not be output, depending on the combination of ASD- The frequency is displayed. 1R and iPod. Remote Control Audio Information : Make the necessary preparations. The bit rate and mode of the broadcast being received is 1 q displayed. Set the iPod in the DENON Control Dock for iPod. • With the default settings, the iPod can be used connected to the VCR v ↓ ( See the Control Dock for iPod’s operating instructions.) (iPod) connector. t w Time and Date : Assign the Control Dock for iPod’s input. • Use the RESTORER mode to expand the low and high frequency The current time and date are displayed. Multi-Zone : ”Source Select” – “(input source)” – “Assign”– components of compressed audio files and achieve a richer sound. Signal Quality : ”iPod dock” (vpage 43) The default setting is “Mode3”. The reception signal sensitivity is displayed (0 to 100). • Press or [POWER OFF] and set the AVR-4308’s power b If the reception signal sensitivity is 80 or greater, the to the standby mode before disconnecting the iPod. Also switch program can be received without noise. Either turn or press [iPod] (AMP the input source to one to which the GUI menu “iPod dock” is not Information 2 mode) to select the input source assigned in step 1-w assigned before disconnecting the iPod. above. DAB Initialize NOTE • Depending on the type of iPod and the software version, some When the “DAB Initialize” procedure is performed, all the functions may not operate. Troubleshooting preset memory settings for the stations and DABs are • DENON will accept no responsibility whatsoever for any loss of iPod reset. data.

Tune off the power using . OK to disconnect. 1 (iPod screen) Specifications Press while simultaneously pressing b If the screens above are not displayed, the iPod may not be and . 2 properly connected. Try connecting again. After the “Initialize” procedure is performed, the : ”Source Select” – “(input source)” – “Play” 3 “Auto Tune” procedure is conducted automatically. (vpage 41) Once the “Auto Tune” procedure is completed, 4 receivable channels are played. To operate using the main remote control unit, set the 3 remote control unit to the iPod mode. (vpage 68 “Remote Control Unit Operations”)

57 ENGLISH

Getting Started Shuffling playback Listening to Music Press [CHANNEL +] or [RANDOM] on the sub remote control unit. Use ui to select the menu, then press ENTER or p [Selectable items] Albums Songs OFF 1 to select the music file to be played. : ”Source Select” – “(input source)” – Connections Press ENTER or p. ”Playback Mode (iPod)” – “Shuffle” (vpage 42) 2 Playback starts. Searching up or down pages Press [SEARCH], then press o (down) or p (up). Stopping playback temporarily To cancel, press ui or [SEARCH].

Setup During playback, press ENTER, [1] or [1/3] on the sub remote control unit. To switch between the Browse and Remote modes uiop Press again to resume playback. Either press and hold [SEARCH].

Playback ENTER Fast-forwarding or fast-reversing During playback, either press and hold u (to fast-reverse) or i (to fast- • The title name, artist name and album name can be checked by forward), or press [6] or [7]. pressing during playback. Remote Control [ iPod] To cue to the beginning of a track • On the AVR-4308, folder and file names can be displayed as titles. Any During playback, either press u (to cue to the previous track) or i (to characters that cannot be displayed are replaced with “ . (period)”. cue to the next track), or press [8] or [9]. • The time for which the GUI menus are displayed can be set at GUI v [8], [9], To stop menu “Manual Setup” – “Option Setup” – “GUI” – “iPod” ( page 38). [6], [7], During playback, either press and hold ENTER or press [2]. Multi-Zone [1], [2] Playing repeatedly Press [CHANNEL –] or [REPEAT] on the sub remote control unit. Viewing Still Pictures or Videos on the iPod ENTER [Selectable items] All One OFF Photo and video data on the iPod can be viewed on the Information uiop monitor. (Only for iPods equipped with slideshow or video : ”Source Select” – “(input source)” – [SEARCH] ”Playback Mode (iPod)” – “Repeat” (vpage 42) functions.) [CHANNEL +/–] Press and hold [SEARCH] to set the Remote mode. Troubleshooting [iPod] 1 (AMP mode) (Main remote control unit) Watching the iPod’s screen, use ui to select 2 “Photos” or “Video”. ENTER uio p Press ENTER until the image you want to view is Specifications 3 displayed. [2] [1/3] [8] [9] [REPEAT] [RANDOM] • “TV Out” at the iPod’s “Slideshow Settings” or “Video Settings” must be set to “On” in order to display the iPod’s photo data or videos (Sub remote control unit) on the monitor. For details, see the iPod’s operating instructions. • When unable to operate by the remote control unit, use the iPod About the button names in these explanations unit. < > : Buttons on the main unit [ ] : Buttons on the remote control unit Button name only: Buttons on the main unit and remote control unit

58 ENGLISH Playing Network Audio or USB GSlide show functionH [Compatible formats] Getting Started Still picture (JPEG) files stored in folders on a music server can be Internet b b Music server USB Memory Devices played as slide shows. radio The time for which each picture is displayed can be set. WMA (Windows This procedure can be used to play Internet radio stations S S Sz or music or still picture (JPEG) files stored on a computer or Media Audio)

MP3 (MPEG-1 Connections USB memory device. S S S When still picture (JPEG) files are played on the AVR-4308, they are Audio Layer-3) n About the Internet radio function played in the direction in which they are stored in the folder, so store WAVz – S S in them in the direction in which you want them to play. • Internet radio refers to radio broadcasts distributed over the MPEG-4 AAC – Sz Sz Internet. Internet radio stations from around the world can be FLAC (Free

tuned in. Setup Installing Windows Media Player ver. 11 Lossless Audio – S S The AVR-4308 is equipped with the following Internet radio q If Windows XP Service Pack 2 has not yet been installed, either Codec) functions: download it free of charge from Microsoft or install it via a JPEG – S S · Stations can be selected by genre and region. Playback Windows update installer. · Up to 56 Internet radio stations can be preset. w Download the latest version of Windows Media Player ver. A server or server software compatible with distribution in the · Internet radio stations in MP3 and WMA (Windows Media Audio) 11, either directly from Microsoft or using a Windows update corresponding formats is required to play music files via a network. format can be listened to.

installer. z: Only files that are not protected by copyright can be played on the Remote Control · Your favorite radio stations can be registered by accessing an b When using Windows Vista, there is no need to download a new AVR-4308. exclusive DENON Internet radio URL from a Web browser on a version of Windows Media Player. Contents downloaded from pay sites on the Internet are copyright computer. protected. Also, files encoded in WMA format when ripped from a b The function is managed for individual users, so you must n CD, etc., on a computer may be copyright protected, depending on provide your MAC or e-mail address. USB memory devices the computer’s settings. Exclusive URL: http://www.radiodenon.com A USB memory device can be connected to the AVR-4308’s USB b The radio station database service may be suspended without port to play music and still picture (JPEG) files stored on the USB b Music server and USB Multi-Zone notice. memory device. · The AVR-4308 is compatible with MP3 ID3-Tag (Ver. 2) standards. • The AVR-4308’s Internet radio station list is created using a radio · Only USB memory devices conforming to mass storage class and · The AVR-4308 is compatible with WMA META tags. station database service (vTuner). This database service provides a MTP (Media Transfer Protocol) standards can be played on the AVR-4308. [Playable formats] list edited and created for the AVR-4308. Information vTuner services may be discontinued without notice. · The AVR-4308 is compatible with USB memory devices in Sampling Bit rate Extension “FAT16” or “FAT32” format. frequency n Music server G H WMA (Windows This function lets you play music files and playlists (m3u, wpl) Album art function 32/44.1/48 kHz 48~192 kbps .wma When an MP3 music file includes album art data, the album art can Media Audio) stored on a computer (music server) connected to the AVR-4308 Troubleshooting MP3 (MPEG-1 via a network. be displayed while playing the file. 32/44.1/48 kHz 32~320 kbps .mp3 Audio Layer-3) With the AVR-4308’s network audio playback function, connection GSlide show functionH WAV 32/44.1/48 kHz – .wav to the server is possible using one of the technologies below. Still picture (JPEG) files stored on USB memory devices can be MPEG-4 AAC 32/44.1/48 kHz 16~320 kbps .aac/.m4a/.mp4 · Windows Media Player Network Sharing Service played as slide shows. FLAC (Free · Windows Media DRM10 The time for which each picture is displayed can be set.

Lossless Audio 32/44.1/48 kHz – .flac Specifications GAlbum art functionH Codec) When a WMA (Windows Media Audio), MP3 or MPEG-4 AAC file When still picture (JPEG) files are played on the AVR-4308, they are includes album art data, the album art can be displayed while the WAV format Quantization bit rate: 16 bits. played in the direction in which they are stored in the folder, so store music files are playing. in them in the direction in which you want them to play.

For music files in WMA (Windows Media Audio) format, the album art is only played when using Windows Media Player ver. 11.

59 ENGLISH

Getting Started Stopping playback temporarily Basic Operation During playback, press ENTER. uiop Make the necessary preparations. Press again to resume playback. 1 To stop q Check the network environment, then turn on the AVR-4308’s During the play or pause mode, press and hold ENTER.

Connections power. (vpage 21 “Network Audio”) w If settings are required, make the network settings. Searching up or down pages (vpage 33 ~ 36 “Network Setup”) Press [SEARCH], then press o (down) or p(up). e Prepare the computer. (vComputer’s operating instructions) To cancel, press ui or [SEARCH]. Install “Windows Media Player ver. 11”.

Setup Searching by first letter(Character search) Either turn or press [NET/USB] This operation is convenient for choosing items from the menu screens for Internet radio stations or files stored on the computer. (AMP mode) to select “NET/USB”. Playback 2 q When the menu screen is displayed, press [SEARCH] twice. ENTER : “Source Select” –“NET/USB” –“Play” w Use o p to select the first letter you want to search for. (vpage 41) If there are multiple items starting with the selected letter, they are displayed in alphabetical order. Remote Control If it is not possible to search the list, “unsorted list.” is displayed. To operate using the main remote control unit, set the 3 remote control unit to the NET/DTU ( ) mode. [ NET/DTU] (vpage 68 “Remote Control Unit Operations”) • Use the RESTORER mode to expand the low and high frequency ( mode) components of compressed audio files and achieve a richer sound. Use ui to select the menu, then press ENTER or p The default setting is “Mode3”. Multi-Zone [A ~ G] to select the file you want to play. • The time for which the GUI menus are displayed can be set at GUI 4 menu “Manual Setup” – “Option Setup” – “GUI” – “NET/USB” v [MEMO] Press ENTER or p. ( page 38). • The display can be switched between the artist name, track name, Playback starts.

Information 5 album name. ENTER • The track display order differs with the server specification. When, uiop due to the server specification, track display is not in alphabetical order, character search may not operate correctly. [SEARCH] Troubleshooting

[1 ~ 8] [NET/USB] (AMP mode) Specifications

About the button names in these explanations < > : Buttons on the main unit [ ] : Buttons on the remote control unit Button name only: Buttons on the main unit and remote control unit

60 ENGLISH Getting Started Listening to Internet Radio Presetting Internet Radio Stations Registering Internet Radio Stations as Use ui to select “Internet Radio”, then press ENTER Preset Internet radio stations can be selected directly. Your Favorites Favorites are listed at the top of the menu screen, so 1 or p. While the Internet radio station you want to preset is when a station is registered as a favorite it can be tuned playing, press [MEMO]. Use ui to select the item you want to play, then 1 in easily. Connections 2 press ENTER or p. Use ui to select “Preset”, then press ENTER. The station list is displayed. Press [MEMO] while the Internet radio station you 2 1 want to register is playing. Use ui to select the station, then press ENTER or

Press [A ~ G], then press [1 ~ 8] to select the desired Setup Use ui to select “Favorites”, then press ENTER. 3 p. 3 preset number. Playback starts once buffering reaches “100%”. The Internet radio station is now preset. 2 Press o to select “Yes”. Playback NOTE 3 The Internet radio station is registered. • There are many Internet radio stations on the Internet, and the If registered at a number that has already been preset, the previously If you do not want to register it, press p.

quality of the programs they broadcast as well as the bit rate of the registered setting is cleared. Remote Control tracks varies widely. Listening to Internet Radio Stations Registered in Generally, the higher the bit rate, the higher the sound quality, but Listening to Preset Internet Radio Stations depending on the communication lines and server traffic, the music Your Favorites or audio signals being streamed may be interrupted. With the input source set to “NET/USB”, press [A ~ G], Use ui to select “Favorites”, then press ENTER or Inversely, lower bit rates mean a lower sound quality but less then press [1 ~ 8]. p.

tendency for the sound to be interrupted. The AVR-4308 automatically connects to the Internet and playback 1 Multi-Zone • “Server Full” or “Connection Down” is displayed if the station is begins. ui busy or not broadcasting. Use to select the Internet radio station, then • On the AVR-4308, folder and file names can be displayed as titles. Any 2 press ENTER or p. characters that cannot be displayed are replaced with “ . (period)”. The AVR-4308 automatically connects to the Internet and playback begins. Information Recently Played Internet Radio Stations Recently played internet radio stations can be selected from “Recently Clearing Internet Radio Stations from Your Favorites Played” in top menu. Use ui to select “Favorites”, then press ENTER or Troubleshooting p. Use ui to select “Recently Played”, then press 1 p 1 ENTER or . Use ui to select the Internet radio station you want to clear, then press . Use ui to select the item you want to play, then 2 [MEMO] press ENTER or p. 2 Press o to select “Delete”. Specifications 3 The selected Internet radio station is cleared. NOTE To cancel the operation without clearing the station, press p. Up to 20 stations stored in “Recently Played”.

61 ENGLISH Getting Started Playing Files Stored on a Computer Playing Files Stored on USB Memory Use this procedure to play music files, image files or Devices playlists. Only USB memory devices conforming to mass storage class and MTP (Media Transfer Protocol) standards can be Use ui to select the host name of the computer on

Connections played on the AVR-4308. 1 which the music file you want to play is located, then press ENTER or p. Basic Operation ui Use to select the search item or folder, then press Make the necessary preparations. Setup ENTER or p. ENTER uip 2 1 • Set the USB port to be used. Use ui to select the file, then pressENTER or p. : “Source Select” – “NET/USB” – Playback 3 Playback starts once buffering reaches “100%”. “Playback Mode” – “USB Select” (vpage 43) • Connect the USB memory device to the set USB port. Selecting tracks Remote Control [ NET/ Use ui to select “USB”, then press ENTER or p. During playback, either press u (previous track) or i (next track). DTU] 2 ( mode) Use ui to select the search item or folder, then press • When playing still picture (JPEG) files, files can also be selected p [df] using the operation described below. 3 ENTER or . During playback, either press [d] (previous file) or[ f] (next file). Multi-Zone • Connections to the required system and specific settings must be Use ui to select the file, then pressENTER or p. ENTER made in order to play music files v( page 21). 4 Playback starts once buffering reaches “100%”. uip • Before starting, you must launch the computer’s server software and set the files as server contents. For details, see the operating Information instructions of your server software. • Depending on the size of the still picture (JPEG) file, some time may • By default, the front panel’s USB port will be used. be required for the file to be displayed. • Depending on the size of the still picture (JPEG) file, some time may be required for the file to be displayed. Playing files that have been Preset or Registered in Troubleshooting [NET/USB] Your Favorites (AMP mode) Files can be preset, registered in your favorites and played using the (Main remote control unit) same operations as for Internet radio stations. NOTE

Specifications ENTER ui p • Presettings are erased by overwriting them. • When the operation described below is performed, the music server’s database is updated and it may no longer be possible to play preset or favorite music files. [RANDOM] • When you quit the music server and then restart it. [REPEAT] [USB] • When music files are deleted or added on the music server.

(Sub remote control unit)

About the button names in these explanations < > : Buttons on the main unit [ ] : Buttons on the remote control unit Button name only: Buttons on the main unit and remote control unit 62 ENGLISH

Playing repeatedly Getting Started When the top menu is displayed, click on the menu Press [REPEAT] on the sub remote control unit. Operating the AVR-4308 Using a Browser (Web control) 4 you want to operate. [Selectable items] All One OFF This function lets you operate the AVR-4308 using Internet Click when Click when you Explorer. you operate : “Source Select” – “NET/USB” – operate the setup

each zone. Connections “Playback Mode” – “Repeat” (vpage 43) Switch “OFF” the “Power Saving” setting under menu. (vExample 2) (vExample 1) “Manual Setup” – “Network Setup” – “Other” on the Playing in random order 1 GUI menu (vpage 36). Press [RANDOM] on the sub remote control unit. Click to change Click when you zone name. Check the AVR-4308’s IP address with “Manual (vExample 3) Setup [Selectable items] ON OFF operate a small screen 2 Setup” – “Network Setup” – “Network Information” such as a PDA screen, : “Source Select” – “NET/USB” – on the GUI menu (vpage 36). etc. (vExample 4) “Playback Mode” – “Random” (vpage 43) Playback Operate. Selecting tracks Checking the IP address. 5 [Example 1] Main zone control screen During playback, either press u (previous track) or i (next track). Remote Control Click when you update to the latest information. (*1) • When playing still picture (JPEG) files, tracks can also be selected using the operation described below. Click to perform each d f During playback, either press [ ] (previous file) or[ ] (next file). operation. Multi-Zone • If the USB memory device is divided into multiple partitions, only the Changes to each operation top partition can be selected. screen. • The AVR-4308 is compatible with MP3 files conforming to “MPEG-1 (vExample 5) Audio Layer-3” standards. Enter the AVR-4308 IP address in Internet Explorer’s

• If [USB] on the sub remote control unit is pressed when the USB Information 3 address box. Click to return to the top memory device or folder is selected, all the tracks on the USB For example, if the IP address of AVR-4308 is “192.168.11.3”, menu. (*2) memory device or in the folder are played. enter “http://192.168.11.3”. NOTE Click to add a setting to the “Favorites” in your browser. (*3)

• The AVR-4308 is equipped with two USB ports, one each on the *1 : Normally, there is a change to the latest information each time Troubleshooting front and rear panels. It is not possible to use the set with USB you operate. When operated from the main unit, click because memory devices connected to both the ports at the same time. the screen is not updated. Select the USB port you want to use at the “Source Select” – “NET/ *2 : Displayed when setting “Top Menu Link Setup” to “ON” in USB” – “Playback Mode” – “USB Select” menu. [Example 3]. Entering the IP address. • DENON will accept no responsibility whatsoever for any loss or *3 : To avoid mistakenly performing menu operations of a zone you

damage to data on USB memory devices when using the USB are not operating, we recommend that you register the setting Specifications memory device connected to the AVR-4308. contents for each zone under Favorites in your browser. • USB memory devices will not work via a USB hub. • DENON does not guarantee that all USB memory devices will operate or receive power. When using a USB connection type portable hard disk of the type for which power can be supplied by connecting an AC adapter, we recommend using the AC adapter. • It is not possible to connect and use a computer via the AVR-4308’s USB port using a USB cable. • The AVR-4308 is not compatible with the iPod shuffle.

63 ENGLISH Getting Started [Example 2] Setup menu screen [Example 4] PDA menu screen Click to INPUT MODE determine a Click “v” and select Surround mode setting. from the displayed items. Select to

Connections operate each zone. After entering characters, click “Set” to set, or click

Setup “Def” to return to initial setting. NOTE

Playback Enter figures or click You cannot change setup menu operations and zone name on the “<” or “>” to make PDA menu screen. the setting, and then click “Set”. [Example 5] Net Audio operating screen Remote Control Click to move up/down the menu pages. Click the menu from which you want to make settings. The display on the right becomes each setting Click the menu from which you want to screen. make settings. Multi-Zone

Click “SAVE” when you want to save settings, and click “LOAD” when you want to call settings. Click when selecting menu. Surround mode Becomes each operation screen.

Information Click to stop play. [Example 3] Zone name change screen INPUT MODE Click to repeat play. Click “ON” when Click to random play. performing Top Menu Enter zone Troubleshooting Link Setup. name. When set up, return to the top menu from each When registering presets, click “v” to operation screen. Click to set select the channel you want to register, (Default setting : “OFF”) zone name. and then click “MEMORY”.

Click when Click “v” to select the preset channel you want Specifications changing the to play. [SOURCE SELECT] background color of each Click to When searching using an acronym, click “v” and select operation return to the from the displayed characters. screen. top menu. NOTE • To perform web control, you must connect a web control device About the button names in these explanations such as a PC to the same network as the AVR-4308. < > : Buttons on the main unit • With web control, some network settings, etc., cannot be set. [ ] : Buttons on the remote control unit • When updating firmware, settings made by the web controller may Button name only: be reset. Buttons on the main unit and remote control unit

64 ENGLISH Getting Started Recording on an External Device (REC OUT mode) • To cancel, press , then turn until “ZONE2 SOURCE” is displayed. Other Operations and You can listen to one program source while recording a • Make a test recording before starting the actual recording. Functions different program source. • Signals are only output to the analog REC OUT connectors when the digital signals input to the digital input connectors (OPTICAL/ Connections Press . COAXIAL) are PCM (2-channel) signals. 1 “ZONE2 SOURCE” is shown on the display. • Digital audio signals input to the DENON LINK or HDMI connectors Other Operations ZONE2 SOURCE ZONE2 TUNER ···· ZONE2 DAB are not output to the REC OUT connectors, so connect using the OPTICAL or COAXIAL connectors.

• Sources selected with the REC OUT mode are output from ZONE2 Setup Playing Super Audio CD RECOUT DAB RECOUT NET/USB ···· RECOUT SOURCE as well. • In the REC OUT mode, the remote control unit’s ZONE2 mode Assign “DENON LINK” or “HDMI” at the “Digital” buttons cannot be operated. Playback Turn until “RECOUT SOURCE” 1 or “HDMI” setting (vpage 43). • When the “Digital Out” setting is set to “ZONE4 Select”, the 2 is displayed. OPTICAL3 output connector becomes the ZONE4 output. When The “ ” indicator lights. using for recording, set to “Rec Select”. Either turn or press [SOURCE Remote Control 2 SELECT] to select the input source assigned in step 1. • The “DAB” digital audio output signals are not output from the The “ ” or “ ” indicator lights on the display. Turn to choose the input source OPTICAL2 or OPTICAL3 output connectors. Also, network audio 3 to be recorded. signals (Internet radio, music server, USB) are not output if they are Use INPUT MODE to select the input mode (vpage copyright-protected. 3 42). Play the program source. NOTE For operating instructions, refer to the respective equipment’s Multi-Zone Select the input mode according to the program source to be 4 • Recordings you make are for your personal enjoyment and should operating instructions. played. not be used for other purposes without permission of the copyright To record FM or AM broadcasts, select the broadcast (vpage holder. 52). Select the surround mode (vpage 45, 46). • When an input source to which “DENON LINK” has been assigned 4 We recommend playing in the DIRECT mode. is selected in the MAIN ZONE, the PCM signal and network audio Information Start recording. signal (Internet radio, music server or USB) input from the digital input Start playing the Super Audio CD. 5 For operating instructions, refer to the respective equipment’s connector cannot be output to the analog REC OUT connectors. operating instructions. 5 The “ ” indicator lights on the display. • Input sources for which “Delete” is selected at “Source Delete” For operating instructions, refer to the respective equipment’s cannot be selected. operating instructions. Troubleshooting

• When playing DSD signals in the DIRECT or PURE DIRECT mode, the DSD signals are converted as such into analog signals. When

playing in other surround modes, the DSD signals are first converted Specifications into PCM format, then into analog signals. • “DSD DIRECT” is shown on the display when playing DSD 2-channel signals in the DIRECT mode. “DSD MULTI DIRECT” is shown on the display when playing DSD multi--channel signals in the DIRECT mode.

65 ENGLISH Getting Started Convenient Functions Quick Select Function With this function, the currently playing input source, input uiop Channel Level mode, surround mode, room EQ settings and volume can be stored in the memory. You can adjust the channel level either according to the Connections playback sources or to suit your taste, as described Set the input source, input mode, surround mode, below. 1 room EQ settings and volume to the conditions you want to store. Press CH SELECT.

Setup 1 Press and hold the desired QUICK SELECT. Keep pressing the button until the quick select indicator lights. Use ui or CH SELECT to select the speaker. 2

Playback The speaker that can be set switches each time one of the 2 [Quick Select Defaults] buttons is pressed. CH SELECT QUICK SELECT Input Source Volume Use o p to adjust the volume. Quick Select 1 DVD –40 dB Remote Control Quick Select 2 TV/CBL –40 dB 3 Quick Select 3 VCR –40 dB b “OFF” can be set by pressing o when the subwoofer’s volume is set to –12 dB.

• To call out the settings, press QUICK SELECT at which the desired

Multi-Zone Fader Function settings were stored. QUICK SELECT This function lets you adjust (fade) the sound from all the • The Quick Select name can be changed (vpage 38). front or rear speakers at once. NOTE Press . Input sources stored with the quick select function cannot be selected Information CH SELECT if they have been deleted at GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Option 1 Setup” – “Source Delete” (vpage 38). In this case, store them again. CH SELECT Press ui or CH SELECT to select “Fader”.

Troubleshooting uiop 2 Personal Memory Plus Function Use o p to adjust the volume of the speakers. This function sets the settings (input mode, surround 3 (o: front, p: rear) mode, etc.) last selected for the individual input sources. When you switch to an input source, the settings are automatically set to the ones that were set the last time Specifications • The fader function does not affect the subwoofer. that input source was used. • The fader can be adjusted until the volume of the speaker adjusted to the lowest value is –12 dB. The surround parameters, tone control, room EQ settings and the volumes of the different speakers are stored for the individual surround modes.

About the button names in these explanations < > : Buttons on the main unit [ ] : Buttons on the remote control unit Button name only: Buttons on the main unit and remote control unit

66 ENGLISH Getting Started Last Function Memory This stores the settings as they were directly before the standby mode was set. When the power is turned back on, the settings are restored to as they were directly before the standby mode Connections was set.

Backup Memory

The various settings are backed up for about 1 week, Setup even if the power is turned off or the power cord is disconnected. Playback

Resetting the Microprocessor Remote Control Perform this procedure if the display is abnormal or if operations cannot be performed. When the microprocessor is reset, all the settings are reset to their default values. Turn off the power using . 1 Multi-Zone Press while simultaneously pressing

2 and . Information

Once the display starts flashing at intervals of about 1 3 second, release the two buttons. Troubleshooting

If in step 3 the display does not flash at intervals of about 1 second, start over from step 1. Specifications

67 ENGLISH Getting Started Operating DENON Audio Components Presetting Press [MODE SELECTOR] for the component to be The included main remote control unit can be preset to operate devices of various brands. Remote Control Unit Operations 1 operated. The indicator for the component to be operated flashes. Press [MODE SELECTOR] for the device you want to Connections : AMP / ZONE2 / ZONE3 / ZONE4 : iPod 1 preset. Main Remote Control Unit / SYSTEM CALL • On the main remote control unit, the display switches : DVD player (Recorder) / : TUNER (FM/AM) CD player (Recorder) Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds. according to the device being operated and the mode. The signal transmission indicator flashes twice. : NETWORK/USB / 2 : VCR / TAPE Setup • In modes other than iPod, the mode switches between DIGITAL TUNER (DAB) “ ” and “ ” each time the [MODE SELECTOR] is Press [NUMBER] and input the 5-digit number of the : Satellite Receiver / Cable TV : TV pressed. 3 brand of the component to be preset. The numbers Playback • In the AMP, TUNER, NET/DTU and iPod modes, when the b On the AVR-4308, the TUNER ( ) mode is not used. are shown in the Preset Code Table (v End of this remote ID is set, the AVR-4308 can be used independently manual). even in an environment containing multiple DENON b The mode switches each time [AMP] is pressed. When the code is registered, the signal transmission indicator

Remote Control amplifiers. GAMP modeH GZONE2 modeH GZONE3 modeH flashes twice. When the preset code is transmitted, the mode indicator for the Signal transmission component to which that code belongs flashes. indicator [ AMP] b The input mode is canceled if no button is operated for 10 [MODE SELECTOR] seconds. Multi-Zone

Some brands have more than one preset code. If the component does not operate, try inputting a different code. Information Operating Preset Components Press [MODE SELECTOR] for the component to be GSYSTEM CALL modeH GZONE4 modeH operated. Troubleshooting 1 The mode indicator of the device to be operated flashes. [HOME] 2 Operate the component. b For details, refer to the component’s operating instructions.

Specifications [NUMBER] [RC SETUP] 2 Operate the component. b For details, refer to the component’s operating instructions.

Depending on the model and year of manufacture of your equipment, some buttons may not operate. [HOME] is used to return to the AMP mode (AMP, ZONE2, ZONE3, NOTE ZONE4 or SYSTEM CALL) when in any mode other than AMP. The device mode (“ ” or “ ”) cannot be changed while the setting is being made.

68 ENGLISH

Functions of Buttons by Component Getting Started

EL Display EL Display MODE SELECTOR DVD VCR iPod Device Mode [MODE Connections [1], DVD CD SELECTOR] Device operated DVD Recorder CD Recorder VCR TAPE iPod [8 9], (Default setting) (Default setting) [6 7], [3], 1 Playback Playback Playback Playback Playback Playback Playback/Pause 2 [ ], 8 9 Auto search Auto search Auto search Auto search Auto search Auto search Auto search [SOURCE ON], (cue) (cue) (cue) (cue) (cue) (cue) (cue) Setup [SOURCE OFF] Manual search Manual search Manual search Manual search Manual search Manual search Manual search 6 7 (fast-reverse/ (fast-reverse/ (fast-reverse/ (fast-reverse/ (fast-reverse/ (fast-reverse/ (fast-reverse/ fast-forward) fast-forward) fast-forward) fast-forward) fast-forward) fast-forward) fast-forward) Playback [MENU] [ENTER] 3 Pause Pause Pause Pause Pause Pause – [SETUP/ [uiop] 2 Stop Stop Stop Stop Stop Stop Stop SEARCH] [RETURN] SOURCE ON Power on Power on – – Power on – – Remote Control SOURCE OFF Power off Power off – – Power off – – [CH + / Buttons SHUFFLE], MENU Menu/guide Menu/guide – – Menu/guide – Menu [CH – / u i o p Cursor Cursor – – Cursor – Cursor [0 ~ 9, +10] REPEAT] ENTER Enter setting Enter setting – – Enter setting – Enter Multi-Zone Page forward screen / Browse/ Buttons SETUP/SEARCH Set up Set up – – Set up – Remote mode

switching (Press Information and hold) RETURN Return Return – – Cancel – Return 1-track/album CH + / SHUFFLE – – – – Switch channels – shuffle play Troubleshooting 1-track/All-track CH – / REPEAT – – – – Switch channels – repeat play 0 ~ 9, +10 Select track Select track Select track Select track – – – Special Remarks q, w q q q – GSpecial RemarksH q Only one component can be preset for each mode. If a new code is preset, the previous code is automatically cleared. Specifications w The names of the functions for the DVD remote control buttons differ from brand to brand. Check beforehand. NOTE • Preset a DVD player or DVD recorder for the “DVD” – “ ” mode. Preset a CD player or CD recorder for the “DVD” – “ ” mode. • Preset a VCR for the “VCR” – “ ” mode. Preset a tape deck for the “VCR” – “ ” mode.

69 ENGLISH

Getting Started EL Display EL Display MODE SELECTOR TV Satellite Receiver / Cable TV [MODE Device Mode [1], SELECTOR] 8 9 Device operated TV (HITACHI) TV (SONY) SAT SAT [ ], 1 Connections 6 7 3 [ ], [ ], 8 9 2 [ ], 6 7 Punch through Punch through Punch through Punch through [SOURCE ON], 3 [SOURCE OFF] 2 Setup SOURCE ON Power on Power on Power on Power on [MENU] [ENTER] SOURCE OFF Power off Power off Power off Power off

Playback [uiop] Buttons MENU Menu/guide Menu/guide Menu/guide Menu/guide [SETUP] [DISPLAY] u i o p Cursor Cursor Cursor Cursor

Remote Control [CH +/–] ENTER Enter setting Enter setting Enter setting Enter setting SETUP Set up Set up Set up Set up DISPLAY Display Display Display Display [0 ~ 9, +10] CH + / – Switch channels Switch channels Switch channels Switch channels [TV/VCR] 0 ~ 9, +10 Channel selection Channel selection Channel selection Channel selection TV/VCR Switch inputs Switch inputs – – Multi-Zone Buttons Special Remarks q, e q, e q, e q, e GSpecial RemarksH q Only one component can be preset for each mode. If a new code is preset, the previous code is automatically cleared.

Information e  v EL Display The CD, VCR or DVD buttons (one only set) can be assigned to the TV, satellite receiver and cable TV mode ( page 72 “Punch Through Function”). [MODE SELECTOR] EL Display Troubleshooting [A ~ G], [d f], MODE SELECTOR TU NET / DTU [BAND], Device Mode [MODE], Device operated Analog tuner NET / USB DAB [MEMO] A ~ G Preset memory block selection Preset memory block selection Preset memory block selection d f Tuning + / – – Channel selection Specifications [ENTER] BAND AM/FM switching – – [uiop] MODE Switch search modes – Switch search modes Favorites / MEMO Preset memory registration – [SEARCH] Preset memory registration [CH +/–] Buttons u i o p – Cursor – ENTER – Enter, Playback/Pause – [0 ~ 9] SEARCH RDS search Search Station order selection [SHIFT] CH + / – Preset channel selection Preset channel selection Preset channel selection Preset channel selection Preset channel selection Preset channel selection 0 ~ 9 Buttons (1 ~ 8) (1 ~ 8) (1 ~ 8) SHIFT Switch memory block Switch memory block Switch memory block 70 ENGLISH Getting Started Signal transmission MODE TUNER Point the main remote control units directly at each SELECTOR NET/DTU [ AMP] indicator other and press and hold the button on the other AMP 5 iPod [ TU] [MODE SELECTOR] (MAIN) device’s remote control unit that you want to learn. (Analog (Net (DAB) Once learning is completed normally, the display lights and the TUNER) [ NET/DTU] [ iPod] Remote ID Audio) signal transmission indicator flashes twice. Connections 1 81001 52863 72815 62865 62840 Other device’s (Default) remote control unit 2 82001 52795 72816 62837 62841 3 83001 52800 72817 62838 62842

4 84001 52805 72818 62839 62843 Setup

NOTE • When changing a setting, be sure to set the same remote ID as the AVR-4308’s main remote Playback AVR-4308’s (vpage 39). control unit (RC-1068) • When changing the AMP mode’s remote ID, also change the b “TUNER”, “iPod” and “NET/DTU” remote ID at the same time. If you want to learn other buttons, repeat steps 4 and 5. b Remote Control • Set the remote ID of an analog tuner for “TUNER” – “ ”. The mode can be switched by pressing [MODE SELECTOR]. b The signal transmission indicator lights once for a long time if [NUMBER] learning was not possible [RC SETUP] Learning Function If your AV devices are of a brand other than DENON or if Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds. they cannot be operated with the preset memory function, The signal transmission indicator flashes twice and the setting 6 Multi-Zone their remote control signals can be transfered to stored in is completed. the AVR-4308’s main remote control unit.

Setting the Remote ID Press [MODE SELECTOR] for the device you want to • With some remote control units, the signals cannot be learned or the When using multiple DENON AV receivers in the same 1 set. device will not operate properly even when the signals have been Information room, make this setting so that only the desired AV receiver learned. In this case, use the device’s own remote control unit. operates. Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds. • Learned buttons have priority over the preset memory. If you no 2 The signal transmission indicator flashes twice. longer need the learned setting, reset the learning function (vpage

Press [AMP] to set the main remote control unit to the 73). Troubleshooting 1 AMP mode. Press [9], [7] and [5], in that order. 3 The signal transmission indicator flashes twice and the learning NOTE Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds. mode is set. • [HOME] cannot be learned. The signal transmission indicator flashes twice. • Do not learn any remote control signals at [RC SETUP]. 2 Press the button to be set. • The AMP, ZONE2, ZONE3, ZONE4 and SYSTEM CALL modes cannot be learned. Refer to the table at the right, and use [NUMBER] to 4 The main remote control unit’s display turns off. Specifications 3 input the 5-digit number corresponding to the remote b If a button that cannot be learned is pressed, the signal transmission ID to be changed. indicator lights but the signal is not learned. The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.

Press [TU], [iPod] or [NET/DTU] to select the mode to 4 be set. Repeat steps 2 to 4 to set the remote IDs for all 5 modes.

71 ENGLISH

Getting Started Signal Registering transmission Punch Through Function indicator Press [MODE SELECTOR] for the device you want to CD, DVD or VCR mode buttons can be stored at unused TV 1 register. or SAT/CBL mode buttons. [ AMP] For example, when DVD mode buttons are assigned to Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds. the TV mode, the DVD mode operations can be performed Connections [MODE [8], The signal transmission indicator flashes twice. SELECTOR] 2 while in the TV mode. [9], Press [9], [7] and [8], in that order. [SYSTEM [6], Press [MODE SELECTOR] for the device you want to 3 The signal transmission indicator flashes twice and the system punch through (CD, DVD or VCR). CALL] [7], call registration mode is set. 1 Setup [1], [3], Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds. Press ( , or ) at which you want to [POWER [2] [SYSTEM CALL] 1 2 3 2 The signal transmission indicator flashes twice. Playback ON] 4 register the signals. Press [9], [8] and [4], in that order. Press the buttons you want to register in the same 3 The signal transmission indicator flashes twice and the punch sequence as the operations you want to perform. through setting mode is set. Remote Control 5 [CHANNEL The signal transmission indicator lights when a button is pressed. Press the button you want to punch through (1, 2, +/–] Example : Press [POWER ON]. 4 6, 7, 8, 9 or 3). [NUMBER] ↓ Press [MODE SELECTOR] – [DVD]. Press [MODE SELECTOR] for the device you want to ↓ Multi-Zone [RC SETUP] Press [1]. 5 punch through (TV or SAT/CBL). b The mode can be switched by pressing [MODE SELECTOR]. b Perform the registration procedure for all the buttons you want to Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds. register. 6 The signal transmission indicator flashes twice and the setting Information System Call Function is completed. Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds. This function lets you register a series of operations at a 6 The signal transmission indicator flashes twice and the setting single button. is completed. For example, the amplifier can be turned on, the input Troubleshooting source selected, the monitor’s power turned on, the source device’s power turned on and the play mode set all Calling out by pressing a single button. Press [AMP], to select “SYSTEM CALL”. Up to 32 signals each can be registered at [SYSTEM CALL] 1 (1, 2 or 3). Press [SYSTEM CALL] (1, 2 or 3) at which the signals Specifications 2 were registered. The registered signals are transmitted in the registered sequence.

72 ENGLISH Getting Started Setting the Time the Backlight Stays Lit Resetting the Main Remote Control Unit System call function Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds. Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds. Learning Function 1 The signal transmission indicator flashes twice. The signal transmission indicator flashes twice. 1 GResetting button by buttonH Press [9], [7] and [8], in that order. Press [9], [7] and [3], in that order. Press [MODE SELECTOR] for the device you want to 2 The signal transmission indicator flashes twice. Connections 2 The signal transmission indicator flashes twice and the backlight 1 reset. on time setting mode is set. Press [SYSTEM CALL] (1, 2 or 3) you want to reset. Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds. 3 Set the light on time. The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.

2 Setup 3 The signal transmission indicator flashes twice. Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds. [Settable times] : [1] : 5 sec. Press [9], [7] and [6], in that order. 4 The signal transmission indicator flashes twice. [2] : 10 sec. (Default) The signal transmission indicator flashes twice. [3] : 15 sec. 3 Playback [4] : 20 sec. Press the button you want to reset twice. Punch-through function [5] : 25 sec. 4 The signal transmission indicator flashes twice. Press [MODE SELECTOR] for the device you want to 1 reset (TV or SAT/CBL). Remote Control GResetting by device modeH Adjusting the Backlight’s Brightness Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds. The display’s brightness can be adjusted in 5 steps. Press [MODE SELECTOR] for the device you want to 2 The signal transmission indicator flashes twice. (Default: Step 3) 1 reset. Press [9], [8] and [4], in that order. Press and hold in for at least 3 seconds. Multi-Zone [RC SETUP] Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds. The signal transmission indicator flashes twice. The signal transmission indicator flashes twice. 3 1 The signal transmission indicator flashes twice. 2 Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds. Press [CHANNEL +] or [CHANNEL –]. Press [9], [7] and [6], in that order. 4 The signal transmission indicator flashes twice. The display gets one step brighter when [+] is pressed. Information 2 The signal transmission indicator flashes twice. The display gets one step darker when [–] is pressed. 3 Press [MODE SELECTOR] for the device you want to All settings Press to complete the setting. [RC SETUP] Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds. 4 reset twice. 3 The signal transmission indicator flashes twice. 1 The signal transmission indicator flashes twice. Troubleshooting Press [9], [8] and [1], in that order. 2 The signal transmission indicator flashes 4 times. All the settings are restored to their defaults. Specifications

73 ENGLISH

Getting Started Functions of Buttons by Component Sub Remote Control Unit Operations DVD, HDP, TV / CBL, DVR1, VCR, V.AUX, TUNER DTU • The sub remote control unit is equipped with frequently Device operated SAT, CD, PHONO (AM/FM) (DAB) used buttons, so it can be used for simple remote control unit operations. Zone selection M Z2 Z3 Z4 M Z2 Z3 Z4 M Z2 Z3 Z4 • The sub remote control unit can also be used for multi- ZONE SELECT Zone operation mode selection Zone operation mode selection Zone operation mode selection Connections b b b zone, so you can use it to control the AVR-4308 from other ZONE OFF Power turned off ( 1) Power turned off ( 1) Power turned off ( 1) rooms. ZONE ON Power turned on (b1) Power turned on (b1) Power turned on (b1) • The operations listed below can be performed with the SOURCE SELECT Input source selection (b2) Input source selection – Input source selection – sub remote control unit. CHANNEL + / – – Preset channel selection – Preset channel selection –

Setup • Preset channel memory Preset channel memory Switching the input source SHIFT – – – • Adjusting the volume block selection block selection • Tuner (AM/FM), DAB and iPod operations VOLUME + / – Adjustment of volume (b1) – Adjustment of volume (b1) – Adjustment of volume (b1) – Playback • NET/USB direct play MUTE Muting (b1) – Muting (b1) – Muting (b1) – • GUI menu and ZONE2 on-screen display operations MENU Selected zone menu – Selected zone menu – Selected zone menu – • Zone power on/off u i o p – – – – Remote Control • It is not possible to operate devices other than the SEARCH – RDS search – Station order selection – amplifier. 8 9, – Tuning – Channel selection – TUNING d f USB b3 – b3 – b3 – ALL MUSIC * [ZONE SELECT] b4 – b4 – b4 – Multi-Zone [ZONE OFF] (Music server only) [ZONE ON] FAVORITES * b5 – b5 – b5 – b1: Affects the currently selected zone. b2: In ZONE4, it is not possible to select “DAB”, or sources with no digital input signals (“TUNER”, “PHONO”, “iPod”, etc.). Information [SOURCE SELECT] Network audio signals (Internet radio, music server, USB) can be played as long as they are not copyright-protected. b3: The input source switches to “NET/USB” and the files on the USB memory device are played. b4: The input source switches to “NET/USB” and the files in “All Music” on the music server are played. b5: The input source switches to “NET/USB” and the files in “Favorites” are played. *: Whether “All Music” or “Favorites” is selected depends on the “Direct Play” setting (vpage 43). Troubleshooting [CHANNEL +/–] [VOLUME +/–] DIRECT PLAY button [MUTE] [SHIFT] • Playback is possible in the mode selected at GUI menu “Source Select” – “NET/USB” – “Playback Mode” – “Direct Play”. [MENU] [ENTER] FAVORITES: Playback starts from the first track registered in the favorites. [uiop] ALL MUSIC: Playback starts from the first track registered in the “All Music” folder. [RETURN] • When [USB] is pressed, playback starts from the first track on the USB memory device. Specifications [SEARCH] [8 9], [2], [1/3], [TUNING d f] NOTE [REPEAT] [ALL MUSIC], When the music server is stopped or restarted, it may no longer be possible to play tracks stored in the favorites. [RANDOM] [FAVORITES] [USB]

74 ENGLISH

Device operated NET / USB iPod Getting Started Zone selection M Z2 Z3 Z4 M Z2 Z3 Z4 ZONE SELECT Zone operation mode selection Zone operation mode selection ZONE OFF Power turned off (b1) Power turned off (b1) ZONE ON Power turned on (b1) Power turned on (b1) SOURCE SELECT Input source selection (b2) Input source selection – Connections CHANNEL + / – Preset channel selection – Preset channel memory block SHIFT – selection b b VOLUME + / – Adjustment of volume ( 1) – Adjustment of volume ( 1) – Setup MUTE Muting (b1) – Muting (b1) – MENU Selected zone menu – Selected zone menu – Playback u i o p File operations – File operations – ENTER File operations – File operations – Page forward screen / Page forward screen / SEARCH – Browse/Remote mode – Remote Control Character search switching (press and hold) RETURN File operations – – 8 9, Track search Track search – TUNING d f 2 Stop Stop – Multi-Zone 1/3 Play/pause Play/pause – REPEAT 1-track/All-track repeat play (USB) 1-track/All-track repeat play – RANDOM 1-track random play (USB) 1-track/album shuffle play – b b USB 3 3 – Information ALL MUSIC * b4 b4 – (Music server only) FAVORITES * b5 b5 –

b1: Affects the currently selected zone. Troubleshooting b2: In ZONE4, it is not possible to select “DAB”, or sources with no digital input signals (“TUNER”, “PHONO”, “iPod”, etc.). Network audio signals (Internet radio, music server, USB) can be played as long as they are not copyright-protected. b3: The input source switches to “NET/USB” and the files on the USB memory device are played. b4: The input source switches to “NET/USB” and the files in “All Music” on the music server are played. b5: The input source switches to “NET/USB” and the files in “Favorites” are played.

*: Whether “All Music” or “Favorites” is selected depends on the “Direct Play” setting (vpage 43). Specifications

75 ENGLISH Getting Started Setting the Zone for Which the Sub Setting the Remote ID When using multiple DENON AV receivers in the same Multi-zone indicator [ZONE SELECT] Remote Control Unit is Used (ZONE SELECT LOCK Mode) room, make this setting so that no AV receiver other than [ADVANCED SETUP] the desired one operates. [ZONE OFF] We recommend always using the sub remote control unit Connections for the same room. When this is done, the unit can be While pressing [MENU], press [ADVANCED SETUP] set so that the zone does not switch when buttons are 1 with the tip of a pen. operated. The multi-zone indicator corresponding to the currently selected Use the tip of a pen to press [ADVANCED SETUP]. remote ID flashes. Setup All the multi-zone indicators light. 1 Select the remote ID to be set. Select the multi-zone to be set. 2 Playback The selected multi-zone indicator lights. q To set to 1 : Press [REPEAT]. 2 The “M” indicator flashes. [MENU] q To set to main zone : Press [REPEAT]. w To set to 2 : Press [RANDOM]. w To set to ZONE2 : Press [RANDOM].

Remote Control The “Z2” indicator flashes. e To set to ZONE3 : Press [USB]. e To set to 3 : Press [USB]. r To set to ZONE4 : Press [ALL MUSIC/FAVORITES]. The “Z3” indicator flashes. [RANDOM] [USB] r To set to 4 : Press [ALL MUSIC/FAVORITES].

Use the tip of a pen to press [ADVANCED SETUP]. The “Z4” indicator flashes. [REPEAT] [ALL MUSIC/ The multi-zone indicator turns off. FAVORITES] 3

Multi-Zone While pressing [MENU], press [ADVANCED SETUP] To Cancel 3 with the tip of a pen. The multi-zone indicator turns off. Use the tip of a pen to press [ADVANCED SETUP]. The currently selected multi-zone indicator lights. NOTE Information Switching Zones 1 Press [ZONE SELECT]. When changing a setting, be sure to set the same remote ID as the Use this procedure to select the zone to be operated by AVR-4308’s (vpage 39). the sub remote control unit. 2 All the multi-zone indicators light.

Troubleshooting Press [ZONE SELECT]. Use the tip of a pen to press [ADVANCED SETUP]. Resetting the Settings 1 The currently selected multi-zone indicator lights. 3 The multi-zone indicator turns off. While pressing [ZONE OFF], press [ADVANCED SETUP] While the multi-zone indicator is light, press [ZONE with the tip of a pen. 2 SELECT] to select the zone to be operated. All the multi-zone indicators flash 4 times, then all the settings are The currently selected multi-zone indicator lights. restored to their defaults. Specifications

76 ENGLISH Getting Started Setting 1: F 7.1-channel playback

Amp Assign / Multi-Zone Connections and Main zone Operations FL SW C FR Connections

The AVR-4308 is compatible with the following types of playback: Amp Assign mode: • Multi-zone playback (ZONE2 & ZONE3) SL 7.1ch SR 7.1CH (Default) • Bi-amp playback (front speaker) A A

• Bi-wiring playback (front speaker) B B Setup NOTE SBL SBR

• For bi-amp and bi-wiring playback, use speakers compatible with that type of connection. Playback • When conducting bi-amp or bi-wiring playback, remove the short-circuiting boards (or wires) from the speaker terminals. n Speaker connections Remote Control SURR. SURR-B/ AMP ASSIGN- FRONT SURR-A Multi-Zone Settings with the Amp Assign Function Speaker terminal CENTER BACK AMP ASSIGN 2 The amp assign function lets you assign the amplifiers for the different channels built into the AVR-4308 to R L R L R L R L R L the speaker outputs for the different zones. Speaker to connect FR FL C SR-A SL-A SBR SBL SR-B SL-B – – Select the desired playback environment from among “Setting 2” to “Setting 7”, then set the corresponding Multi-Zone “Amp Assign” mode at GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Option Setup” – “Amp Assign” (vpage 37). n Channels outputting to the various speaker terminals Connect the speakers as described at “Speaker connections”. Speaker terminal SURR. SURR-B/ AMP ASSIGN- FRONT SURR-A CENTER BACK AMP ASSIGN 2 With “Setting 5” to “Setting 7”, it is possible to switch the Amp Assign mode between the 7.1-channel Amp Information mode and the multizone mode without changing the speaker connections. Assign mode R L R L R L R L R L 7.1CH FR FL C SR-A SL-A SBR SBL SR-B SL-B – – Troubleshooting Specifications

77 ENGLISH Getting Started Setting 2: With this setting it is possible to switch between the following two playback modes. Setting 3: Setting 4: F 7.1-channel playback F Making bi-amp connections for F Making bi-wiring connections F Switching between bi-amp and bi-wiring playback using speakers the FL and FR channels in the for the FL and FR channels in the exclusively for 2-channel playback main zone and conducting 5.1- main zone and conducting 7.1- Switching·················Surround Mode switching

Connections channel playback channel playback (switching with other modes not possible) (switching with other modes not possible) Main zone Main zone Amp Assign FL L C R FR FL L C R FR Main zone Main zone mode: For 2-channel FL SW C FR FL SW C FR Surround Mode 2ch 2CH Bi-Amp Setup SW SW bi-amp Bi-Amp DIRECT / STEREO playback 5.1ch 7.1ch 7.1ch or Amp Assign mode: Amp Assign mode: FL/FR FL/FR SL-A SR-A Multi Channel / SL-A 2ch SR-A SL SR SL SR Playback For 2-channel Bi-Amp Bi-Amp Bi-Wiring Bi-Wiring Surround Bi-Wiring A A A A bi-wiring 2CH Bi-Wiring B B B B playback SBL SBR SBL SBR

Remote Control Both A and B can be installed Both A and B can be installed SBL SBR for SR and SL. for SR and SL. n Speaker connections n Speaker connections SURR. SURR-B/ AMP ASSIGN- FRONT SURR-A BACK AMP ASSIGN 2 Speaker terminal CENTER SURR. SURR-B / AMP AMP FRONT SURR-A

Multi-Zone Amp Assign Speaker R L R L R L R L R L CENTER BACK ASSIGN ASSIGN-2 mode terminal R L R L R L R L R L R L R L 2ch L/R Bi-Amp connection Speaker to connect FR FL C SR-A SL-A SBR SBL FR FL or Information 2ch L/R Bi-Wiring connection Bi-Amp FR FL C SR-A SL-A – – SR-B SL-B FL/FR Bi-Amp connection n Channels outputting to the various speaker terminals Speaker to connect FR FL Speaker Troubleshooting SURR. SURR-B/ AMP ASSIGN- FL/FR Status FRONT SURR-A Bi-Wiring FR FL C SR-A SL-A SBR SBL SR-B SL-B terminal BACK AMP ASSIGN 2 Bi-Wiring CENTER connection Amp Surround R L R L R L R L R L Assign mode Mode n R L R L Channels outputting to the various speaker terminals 2CH Bi-Amp DIRECT / 2ch L/R Bi-Amp connection Speaker terminal Specifications – – – – – – – SURR. SURR-B / AMP AMP STEREO R L R L FRONT SURR-A 2CH Bi-Wiring CENTER BACK ASSIGN ASSIGN-2 2ch L/R Bi-Wiring connection Amp Assign mode R L R L R L R L R L 2CH Bi-Amp Multi FR FL Channel / FR FL C SR-A SL-A SBR SBL – – – – Surround Bi-Amp FR FL C SR-A SL-A – – SR-B SL-B FL/FR 2CH Bi-Wiring Bi-Amp connection

FR FL Bi-Wiring FR FL C SR-A SL-A SBR SBL SR-B SL-B FL/FR Bi-Wiring connection

78 ENGLISH Getting Started Setting 5: With this setting it is possible to switch between the following two playback modes. Setting 6: With this setting it is possible to switch between the following two playback modes. F 7.1-channel playback F 7.1-channel playback F Multi-zone playback F Multi-zone playback • 5.1-channel playback + ZONE2 or ZONE3 stereo playback with bi-wiring connections • 5.1-channel playback + ZONE2 or ZONE3 stereo playback • 5.1-channel playback + ZONE2 monaural playback + ZONE3 monaural playback with bi-wiring • 5.1-channel playback + ZONE2 monaural playback + ZONE3 monaural playback connections Switching·················ZONE2 ON/OFF button, ZONE3 ON/OFF button Connections Switching·················ZONE2 ON/OFF button, ZONE3 ON/OFF button Main zone Main zone Amp Assign Amp Assign FL SW C FR FL SW C FR ZONE2 ZONE3 Main zone Main zone mode: Z2L Z2R Z3L Z3R FL SW C FR FL SW C FR ZONE2 ZONE3 mode: Z2L Z2R Z3L Z3R + ZONE2 Setup Bi & ZONE2 & 3 Stereo + POWER ZONE2 & 3 Stereo ZONE2 SL 7.1ch SR SL 5.1ch SR Z2L Z2R Z3L Z3R

7.1ch POWER 5.1ch “ON” Playback Z2L Z2R Z3L Z3R A A A A + ZONE3 FL/FR “ON” FL/FR + Bi & Stereo SL-A Bi-Wiring SR-A SL-A Bi-Wiring SR-A ZONE3 B B “OFF” B B Stereo Z2 Z3 “OFF” Z2 Z3 + ZONE (MONO)

Bi & ZONE Remote Control + SBL SBR Mono Mono (MONO) SBL SBR Mono Mono

Both A and B can be installed Both A and B can be installed Both A and B can be installed Both A and B can be installed for SR and SL. for SR and SL. for SR and SL. for SR and SL. Multi-Zone n Speaker connections n Speaker connections SURR. SURR-B / AMP AMP FRONT SURR-A SURR. SURR-B / AMP AMP BACK ASSIGN ASSIGN-2 FRONT SURR-A Speaker terminal CENTER Information BACK ASSIGN ASSIGN-2 Speaker terminal CENTER R L R L R L R L R L R L R L R L R L R L Z2R Z2L FR FL Z2R Z2L Z3R Z3L Speaker to connect FR FL C SR-A SL-A SBR SBL SR-B SL-B Z3R Z3L Z3 Z2 Troubleshooting Speaker to connect FR FL C SR-A SL-A SBR SBL FL/FR Bi-Wiring Z3 Z2 (MONO) (MONO) connection (MONO) (MONO) n Channels outputting to the various speaker terminals n Channels outputting to the various speaker terminals Speaker SURR. SURR-B / AMP Status FRONT SURR-A Speaker SURR. SURR-B / AMP terminal Specifications Status FRONT SURR-A BACK AMP ASSIGN ASSIGN-2 terminal BACK AMP ASSIGN ASSIGN-2 CENTER CENTER Amp ZONE2 & ZONE2 & R L R L R L R L R L Amp R L R L R L R L R L Assign mode ZONE3 Assign mode ZONE3 ZONE2 Z2R Z2L Bi & ZONE2 FR FL Z2R Z2L ZONE3 ON FR FL C SR-A SL-A – – SR-B SL-B Z3R Z3L Bi & ZONE3 ON FR FL C SR-A SL-A – – FL/FR Z3R Z3L Bi-Wiring ZONE (MONO) Z3 Z2 connection Z3 Z2 (MONO) (MONO) Bi & ZONE (MONO) (MONO) (MONO) ZONE2 Bi & ZONE2 FR FL ZONE3 OFF FR FL C SR-A SL-A SBR SBL SR-B SL-B – – Bi & ZONE3 OFF FR FL C SR-A SL-A SBR SBL FL/FR – – Bi-Wiring ZONE (MONO) Bi & ZONE (MONO) connection 79 ENGLISH Getting Started Setting 7: With this setting it is possible to switch between the following two playback modes. Multi-Zone Settings and Operations with Zone Pre-out F 7.1-channel playback Output F Multi-zone playback • 3.1-channel playback + ZONE2 stereo playback + ZONE3 stereo playback Prepare power amplifiers for ZONE2 and ZONE3, an amplifier that is compatible with bit-stream input for • 3.1-channel playback + ZONE2 monaural playback + ZONE3 monaural playback ZONE4. Connections Switching·················ZONE2 ON/OFF button, ZONE3 ON/OFF button Connectors for audio output Audio signals Connectors for video output Main zone Main zone ZONE2 VIDEO OUT, Amp Assign ZONE2 ZONE2 PRE OUT Stereo FL SW C FR FL SW C FR ZONE2 ZONE3 ZONE2 COMPONENT VIDEO OUT Z2L Z2R Z3L Z3R mode: ZONE3 ZONE3 PRE OUT Stereo – Setup + ZONE2/3 ZONE2 & 3 Stereo Stereo POWER ZONE4 ZONE4 OPTICAL3 OUT Bit-stream – 7.1ch 3.1ch Z2 Z3 ZONE2/3 Playback “ON” + SL-A SR-A (MONO) Mono Mono Main zone (7.1-channel system) ZONE2 ZONE4 “OFF” Monitor Monitor

Remote Control SBL SBR

'- 48 '3 '- 48 '3 $ $ Power amplifier AV amplifier • When the ZONE2 ON/OFF button is set to “ON” and the ZONE3 ON/OFF button is set to “OFF”, the main zone DVD player AVR-4308 ZONE2 video is set to 5.1-channel playback. output

Multi-Zone • When the ZONE3 ON/OFF button is set to “ON”, the main zone is set to 3.1-channel playback. Input ZONE2 audio output 4- 43 n Speaker connections 4- 43 ZONE3

SURR. SURR-B / AMP AMP Remote

Information FRONT SURR-A 4# 4# Power amplifier Speaker terminal CENTER BACK ASSIGN ASSIGN-2 control unit - 3

R L R L R L R L R L ZONE4 ZONE3 audio output digital output Z3R Z3L Z2R Z2L

Troubleshooting Speaker to connect FR FL C SR-A SL-A SBR SBL : Multi-zone video cable Z3 (MONO) Z2 (MONO) : Multi-zone audio cable

n Channels outputting to the various speaker terminals • When only using one speaker for ZONE2 or ZONE3, set to “Mono”. In this case, the ZONE2 (ZONE3) Speaker SURR. SURR-B / AMP monaural output is output from the ZONE2 (ZONE3) pre-out L and R connectors, so connect as desired. terminal Status FRONT SURR-A Specifications BACK AMP ASSIGN ASSIGN-2 • Separate power amplifiers are needed for ZONE2 and ZONE3. CENTER Amp ZONE2 & R L R L R L R L R L Assign mode ZONE3 ZONE2/3 Z3R Z3L Z2R Z2L ON FR FL C – – – – ZONE2/3 (MONO) Z3 (MONO) Z2 (MONO)

ZONE2/3 OFF FR FL C SR-A SL-A SBR SBL – – – – ZONE2/3 (MONO)

80 ENGLISH Getting Started Multi-Zone Operations Turning off the Sound Temporarily In the zone mode for which you want to mute the sound, press Turning the Power On and Off [MUTE]. The sound is reduced to the level set at GUI menu “Manual Setup” G H v Operation on the main unit – “Zone Setup” – “(select the zone)” – “Mute Level” ( page 37). Connections Press , or for the zone To cancel, either adjust the volume or press [MUTE] again. to be operated. The setting is canceled when the zone’s power is turned off. When the power turns on, the multi-zone indicator lights on the display.

• The source selected for ZONE2 is also output from the recording Setup GOperation on the remote control unitH output connectors. In the zone mode you want to operate, press [ON] or [OFF]. • For ZONE2, the “Zone Setup” can be made while watching the on-

screen display. Also, when ZONE3 is operated, the on-screen display Playback Selecting the Input Source appears on the ZONE2 monitor, so operation can be performed watching this on-screen display. G H Operation on the main unit ZONE2 MENU Remote Control q Press and select the zone to be adjusted. INPUT :DVD ZONE2 MENU w Turn . SIGNAL:ANALOG VOL. :-40dB >Channel STEREO GOperation on the remote control unitH Vol.Lev. VAR >Bass 0dB Vol.Limit OFF [ AMP] In the zone mode you want to operate, press [SOURCE SELECT]. Treble 0dB P.On Lev. LAST HPF OFF Mute Lev. FULL

Lch Lev. 0dB Multi-Zone Adjusting the Volume Rch Lev. 0dB [ON] [ON] GOperation on the main unitH [OFF] [OFF] q Press and select the zone to be adjusted. NOTE (ZONE2 (ZONE3 Information w Turn to adjust. • When connected to the component video output connectors, the mode) or ZONE4 on-screen display is not displayed. mode) GOperation on the remote control unitH • When the input source to which the digital input connectors In the zone mode whose volume you want to adjust, press [VOLUME]. (OPTICAL/COAXIAL) are assigned is selected in ZONE2 or ZONE3, [Variable range] – – – –70dB ~ –40dB ~ +18dB playback is only possible if the digital signal being input is in PCM Troubleshooting (2-channel) format. [VOLUME] • Digital audio signals input from the DENON LINK or HDMI connectors cannot be played in multi-zone. [MUTE] • The volume can be adjusted when GUI menu “Manual Setup” • In ZONE4, it is not possible to select “DAB”, or sources with no – “Zone Setup” – “(select the zone)” – “Volume Level” is set to digital input signals (“TUNER”, “PHONO”, “iPod”, etc.). Network audio

[SOURCE “Variable”. The volume can be increased up to the value set at signals (Internet radio, music server, USB) can be played as long as Specifications GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Zone Setup” – “(select the zone)” they are not copyright-protected. SELECT] v – “Volume Limit” ( page 37). • When certain digital signals are being input, noise may be output • The volume for ZONE2 and ZONE3 can be adjusted with the remote from the ZONE2 and ZONE3 audio output connectors. control unit. • When an input source to which “DENON LINK” has been assigned is selected in the MAIN ZONE, the PCM signal and network audio signal (Internet radio, music server or USB) input from the digital About the button names in these explanations input connector cannot be output to the ZONE2 and ZONE3 audio < > : Buttons on the main unit output connectors. [ ] : Buttons on the remote control unit Button name only: Buttons on the main unit and remote control unit

81 ENGLISH

Getting Started Number of surround back speakers w Setting for primarily watching movies using diffusion type speakers for the surround speakers We recommend using 2 speakers. For the greatest sense of surround sound envelopment, diffuse Other Information When using dipolar speakers in particular, be sure to use 2 speakers. radiation speakers such as bipolar types, or dipolar types, provide a wider dispersion than is possible to obtain from a direct radiating Placement of the surround left and right channels speaker (monopolar). Place these speakers at either side of the Connections when using surround back speakers prime listening position, mounted above ear level. About Speaker Installation We recommend installing the speakers for the surround “L” and “R” Path of the surround sound from the channels a bit forward. speakers to the listening position Surround back speakers Setup Sound positioning directly to the rear can be achieved easily by adding Examples of speaker layouts a surround back speaker to a 5.1-channel system. Playback In addition, the acoustic image extending between the sides and the Below we introduce examples of speaker layouts. Refer to these to Surround Surround back rear is narrowed, thus greatly improving the expression of the surround arrange your speakers according to their type and how you want to Surround speakers speaker speaker signals for sounds moving from the sides to the back and from the use them. Front speaker

Remote Control front to the point directly behind the listening position. G1H Using surround back speaker(s) 60 to 90 cm Point slightly Change of positioning and acoustic image downwards with 5.1-channel systems q When mainly playing movies 60° '- 48 $ '3 Recommended when your surround speakers are single or 2-way speakers. Surround back speakers Front speakers Multi-Zone Center speaker GAs seen from aboveH GAs seen from the sideH

e When playing movies and music Monitor Subwoofer Front speakers Information Center speaker 60° Surround Surround back Surround 4-
DI 43
DI speaker speaker Monitor speakers Front speaker Subwoofer Movement of acoustic image from SR to SL Troubleshooting 60 to 90 cm 45° ~ 60° Change of positioning and acoustic image Point slightly Surround Surround back downwards Surround with 6.1-channel systems speaker A speaker 60° speaker A '- 48 $ '3 Front speaker Surround back speakers 60 to 90 cm Point slightly 120° downwards

Specifications GAs seen from aboveH GAs seen from the sideH Surround speaker B 4-
DI 43
DI Surround back speaker Surround speaker B GAs seen from aboveH GAs seen from the sideH 4#
DI

Movement of acoustic image from SR to SB to SL In addition to sources recorded in 6.1-channels, the surround effect of conventional 2- to 5.1-channel sources can also be enhanced.

82 ENGLISH

G2H When not using surround back speakers Dolby TrueHD Getting Started DTS Surround Front speakers Dolby TrueHD is a high definition audio technology developed by Dolby Center speaker Laboratories, using lossless coding technology to faithfully reproduce the sound of the studio master. DTS Digital Surround This format is compatible with a maximum sampling frequency of 96 Monitor DTS Digital Surround is the standard digital surround format of DTS,

kHz and up to 7.1-channels, so it is used for applications particularly Connections Subwoofer Inc., compatible with a sampling frequency of 44.1 or 48 kHz and up prioritizing sound quality. 60° to 5.1-channels of digital discrete surround sound. Surround speaker Dolby Pro Logic g DTS-HD High Resolution Audio Front speaker Dolby Pro Logic g is a matrix decoding technology developed by Dolby

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is an improved version of the Setup 60 to 90 cm Laboratories. conventional DTS, DTS-ES and DTS 96/24 signals formats, compatible Regular music such as that on CDs is encoded into 5-channels to with sampling frequencies of 96 or 48 kHz and up to 7.1-channels

achieve an excellent surround effect. of discrete digital sound. High data bit rate performance provides Playback 120° The surround channel signals are converted into stereo and full band high quality sound. This format is fully compatible with conventional Surround speakers signals (with a frequency response of 20 Hz to 20 kHz or greater) products, including conventional DTS digital surround 5.1-channel to create a “three-dimensional” sound image offering a rich sense of data. GAs seen from aboveH GAs seen from the sideH presence for all stereo sources. Remote Control DTS-HD Master Audio Dolby Pro Logic gx DTS-HD Master Audio is DTS, Inc’s lossless audio format compatible Surround Dolby Pro Logic gx is a further improved version of the Dolby Pro Logic with up to 96 kHz/7.1-channels. The lossless audio coding technology The AVR-4308 is equipped with a digital signal processing circuit that g matrix decoding technology. faithfully reproduces the sound of the studio master. It is fully

lets you play program sources in the surround mode to achieve the Audio signals recorded in 2-channels are decoded to achieve a natural compatible with conventional products, including conventional DTS Multi-Zone same sense of presence as in a movie theater. sound with up to 7.1-channels. digital surround 5.1-channel data. There are 3 modes: “Music” suited for playing music, “Cinema” suited for playing movies, and “Game” which is optimized for playing DTS-ES™ Discrete 6.1 Dolby Surround games. DTS-ES™ Discrete 6.1 is a 6.1-channel discrete digital audio format Information Dolby Digital EX adding a surround back (SB) channel to the DTS digital surround sound. Dolby Digital Decoding of conventional 5.1-channel audio signals is also possible Dolby Digital is a multichannel digital signal format developed by Dolby Dolby Digital EX is a 6.1-channel surround format proposed by Dolby according to the decoder. Laboratories. Laboratories that allows users to enjoy in their homes the “DOLBY Troubleshooting A total of 5.1-channels are played: 3 front channels (“FL” , “FR” and DIGITAL SURROUND EX” audio format jointly developed by Dolby DTS-ES™ Matrix 6.1 “C”), 2 surround channels (“SL” and “SR”) and the “LFE” channel for Laboratories and Lucas Films. DTS-ES™ Matrix 6.1 is a 6.1-channel discrete digital audio format low frequencies. The 6.1 channels of sound, including surround back channels, provide inserting a surround back (SB) channel to the DTS digital surround Because of this, there is no crosstalk between channels and a realistic improved sound positioning and expression of space. sound through matrix encoding. Decoding of conventional 5.1-channel sound field with a “three-dimensional” feeling (sense of distance, b audio signals is also possible according to the decoder. movement and positioning) is achieved. Sources recorded in Dolby Surround Sources recorded in Dolby Surround are indicated with the following Specifications A real, overpowering sense of presence is achieved when playing DTS NEO:6™ Surround movie sources in AV rooms as well. logo marks. Dolby Surround support mark : DTS NEO:6™ is a matrix decoding technology for achieving 6.1- Dolby Digital Plus channel surround playback with 2-channel sources. It includes “DTS Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. NEO:6 CINEMA” suited for playing movies and “DTS NEO:6 MUSIC” Dolby Digital Plus is an improved Dolby Digital signal format that is “Dolby”, “Pro Logic” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of suited for playing music. compatible with up to 7.1-channels of discrete digital sound and also Dolby Laboratories. improves sound quality thanks to extra data bit rate performance. It is upwardly compatible with conventional Dolby Digital, so it offers greater flexibility in response to the source signal and the conditions of the playback equipment.

83 ENGLISH

Getting Started DTS 96/24 HDCD® Advanced AL24 Processing Multi DTS 96/24 is a digital audio format enabling high sound quality ® playback in 5.1-channels with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz and 24 (High Definition Compatible Digital ) channel bit quantization on DVD-Video. HDCD® is an encoding/decoding technology that greatly reduces Equipped with “Advanced AL24 Processing” time axis region the distortion that occurs upon digital recording while maintaining information volume expansion

Connections Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #’s: 5,451,942; compatibility with the conventional CD format, thus expanding the In addition to the existing “AL24 Processing Plus” bit expansion 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,226,616; 6,487,535 & other dynamic range and achieving a high resolution. technology, DENON has also developed “Advanced AL24 Processing” U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS is a registered Conventional CDs and HDCD compatible CDs are identified that dramatically improves information volume in the time axis region trademark and the DTS logos, Symbol, DTS-HD and DTS-HD automatically to select the optimum digital processing. using high-speed signal detection and processing technology. In Master Audio are trademarks of DTS, Inc.© 1996-2007 DTS, Inc. addition to expanding original 16-bit digital data to 24 bits, “Advanced Setup All Rights Reserved. ®, HDCD®, High Definition Compatible Digital® and AL24 Processing” uses data interpolation along the time axis or up- Microsoft® are either registered trademarks or trademarks of converted sampling to achieve natural interpolation without losing the Microsoft Corporation, Inc. in the United States and/or other original data. A digital filter is used to further expand adaptability and Playback countries. HDCD system manufactured under license from perform optimum filtering calculations for ringing-free pulse response, Audyssey MultEQ® XT Microsoft Corporation, Inc. This product is covered by one or more pulsive music data and attack sounds. of the following: In the USA: 5,479,168, 5,638,074, 5,640,161, This results in the reproduction of such spatial information as the ® Remote Control Audyssey MultEQ XT is the first technology to properly measure 5,808,574, 5,838,274, 5,854,600, 5,864,311, 5,872,531, and in delicate nuances in the music, the positions of the performers, and sound information throughout a listening area, then combine this Australia: 669114. Other patents pending. the breadth, height, and depth of the concert hall. “Advanced AL24 information to accurately represent the acoustical problems in Processing” is conducted for all channels and modes other than DSD the room. Based on these measurements, MultEQ XT calculates DIRECT. an equalization solution that corrects for both time and frequency response problems in every seat. DENON LINK

Multi-Zone Audyssey MultEQ XT not only corrects frequency response problem in a large listening area, it also performs a fully automated surround DENON LINK is a unique digital, balanced transfer type interface system setup. developed by DENON. It offers high speed, high quality transfer of For a detailed description, see page 26. digital audio data with low signal loss. It can be used together with DENON DVD players equipped with a special DENON LINK connector Information using a single cable to enable playback with high sound quality. It allows digital transfer of the 192 kHz/24 bit 2-channel digital signals Audyssey MultEQ® XT is a trademark of Audyssey Laboratories. of DVD-Audio discs, PCM multi-channel signals, etc. Full-spec digital It is licensed under U.S. and National Patent Applications transfer of the audio contents of Super Audio CD is possible by 20030235318 and 10/700,220. Additional U.S. and Foreign

Troubleshooting connecting a player equipped for DENON LINK 3rd Edition. Patents pending. MultEQ XT and the Audyssey MultEQ XT logo are trademarks of Audyssey Laboratories, Inc. All rights reserved. Specifications

84 ENGLISH Getting Started HDMI Surround Modes and Parameters (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) Signals and adjustability in the different modes Channel output Parameter (default values are shown in parentheses) HDMI is a digital interface standard for next generation TVs based Surround Mode on DVI (Digital Visual Interface) standards and optimized for use in Surround Surround D. COMP DRC LFE AFDM Front L/R Center Su­woofer z z z z SB CH Out Cinema EQ. consumer equipment. L/R Back L/R 1 2 3 1 Connections Non-compressed digital video and multi-channel audio signals are PURE DIRECT, DIRECT S A A A D S (OFF) S (Auto) S (0 dB) A A A transmitted with a single connection. DSD DIRECT S A A A A A A A A A A HDMI is also compatible with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Contents DSD MULTI DIRECT S D D D D A A S (0 dB) A S A Protection), a technology for protecting copyrights that encrypts digital MULTI CH DIRECT S D D D D A A S (0 dB) S (ON) S A Setup video signals in the same was as with DVI. STEREO S A A A D S (OFF) S (Auto) S (0 dB) A A A S D D D D A A A A A A Deep Color EXT. IN

MULTI CH IN S D D D D A A S (0 dB) S (ON) S A Playback Eliminates on-screen color banding, for smooth tonal transitions and WIDE SCREEN S D D D D S (OFF) S (Auto) S (0 dB) A S S (OFF) subtle gradations between colors. DOLBY PRO LOGIC gx S D D D D S (OFF) S (Auto) A A S S (NOTE1) Enables increased contrast ratio. DOLBY PRO LOGIC g S D D A D S (OFF) S (Auto) A A S S (NOTE2) Remote Control Can represent many times more shades of gray between black and DTS NEO:6 S D D D D S (OFF) S (Auto) A A S S (NOTE1) white. DOLBY DIGITAL S D D D D S (OFF) A S (0 dB) S (ON) S S (OFF) At 30-bit pixel depth, a four times improvement would be the minimum, DOLBY DIGITAL Plus S D D D D S (OFF) A S (0 dB) S (ON) S S (OFF) and the typical improvement would be eight times or more. DOLBY TrueHD S D D D D S (OFF) S (Auto) S (0 dB) S (ON) S S (OFF) xvYCC DTS SURROUND S D D D D S (OFF) A S (0 dB) S (ON) S S (OFF) DTS 96/24 S D D D D S (OFF) A S (0 dB) S (ON) S S (OFF) Multi-Zone Next-generation “xvYCC” color space supports 1.8 times as many DTS-HD S D D D D S (OFF) A S (0 dB) S (ON) S S (OFF) colors as existing HDTV signals. 7CH STEREO S D D D D S (OFF) S (Auto) S (0 dB) A S A Lets HDTVs display colors more accurately. SUPER STADIUM S D D D D S (OFF) S (Auto) S (0 dB) A S A Enables displays with natural, vivid colors. ROCK ARENA S D D D D S (OFF) S (Auto) S (0 dB) A S A Information Lip Sync JAZZ CLUB S D D D D S (OFF) S (Auto) S (0 dB) A S A CLASSIC CONCERT S D D D D S (OFF) S (Auto) S (0 dB) A S A Because consumer electronics devices are using increasingly MONO MOVIE S D D D D S (OFF) S (Auto) S (0 dB) A S A complex digital signal processing to enhance the clarity and detail of S D D D D S S S A S A VIDEO GAME (OFF) (Auto) (0 dB) Troubleshooting the content, synchronization of video and audio in user devices has MATRIX S D D D D S (OFF) S (Auto) S (0 dB) A S A become a greater challenge and could potentially require complex end- S A A A D S S S A A A user adjustments. HDMI 1.3 incorporates an automatic video/audio VIRTURL (OFF) (Auto) (0 dB) synching capability that allows devices to perform this synchronization S : Signal / Adjustable S : Enable automatically with total accuracy. A : No signal / Not adjustable A : Unable D : Turned on or off by speaker configuration setting NOTE1 : This parameter is availabe when the GUI menu “Parameter”

– “Audio” – “Surround Parameters” – “Mode” is set to “Cinema” Specifications “HDMI”, “HDMI logo” and “High-Definition Multimedia Interface” (vpage 46). are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing NOTE2 : This parameter is availabe when the GUI menu “Parameter” LLC. – “Audio” – “Surround Parameters” – “Mode” is set to “Cinema” or “Pro Logic” (vpage 46). NOTE: z1 : When playing Dolby Digital and DTS signals. z2 : When playing Dolby TrueHD signal. z3 : When playing Dolby Digital, DTS, DVD-Audio and Super Audio CD.

85 ENGLISH

Getting Started Signals and adjustability in the different modes Parameter (default values are shown in parentheses) Surround Mode NEO:6 MUSIC PRO LOGIC g/gx MUSIC mode only EXT. IN only Mode Room Size Effect Level Delay Time Subwoofer mode only Tone Night Mode Room EQ RESTORER Panorama Dimension Center Width Center Image Subwoofer Att.

Connections PURE DIRECT, DIRECT A A A A S A A A A A A S (OFF) S (NOTE5) S DSD DIRECT A A A A S A A A A A A A A A DSD MULTI DIRECT A A A A A A A A A A A A A A MULTI CH DIRECT A A A A A A A A A A A S (OFF) S (NOTE5) A STEREO A A A A A A A A A A S (0 dB) S (OFF) S (OFF) S Setup EXT. IN A A A A A A A A A S A A A A MULTI CH IN A A A A A A A A A A S (0 dB) S (OFF) S (OFF) A A A S A A A A A A A S S S S Playback WIDE SCREEN (ON, 10) (0 dB) (OFF) (OFF) DOLBY PRO LOGIC gx S (Cinema) A A A A S (OFF) S (3) S (3) A A S (0 dB) S (OFF) S (OFF) S DOLBY PRO LOGIC g S (Cinema) A A A A S (OFF) S (3) S (3) A A S (0 dB) S (OFF) S (OFF) S DTS NEO:6 S (Cinema) A A A A A A A S (0.3) A S (0 dB) S (OFF) S (OFF) S Remote Control DOLBY DIGITAL A A A A A A A A A A S (0 dB) S (OFF) S (OFF) A DOLBY DIGITAL Plus A A A A A A A A A A S (0 dB) A S (OFF) A DOLBY TrueHD A A A A A A A A A A S (0 dB) A S (OFF) A DTS SURROUND A A A A A A A A A A S (0 dB) S (OFF) S (OFF) A DTS 96/24 A A A A A A A A A A S (0 dB) S (OFF) S (OFF) A

Multi-Zone DTS-HD A A A A A A A A A A S (0 dB) A S (OFF) A 7CH STEREO A A A A A A A A A A S (0 dB) S (OFF) S (OFF) S SUPER STADIUM A S (Medium) S (10) A A A A A A A S (NOTE3) S (OFF) S (OFF) S ROCK ARENA A S (Medium) S (10) A A A A A A A S (NOTE4) S (OFF) S (OFF) S

Information JAZZ CLUB A S (Medium) S (10) A A A A A A A S (0 dB) S (OFF) S (OFF) S CLASSIC CONCERT A S (Medium) S (10) A A A A A A A S (0 dB) S (OFF) S (OFF) S MONO MOVIE A S (Medium) S (10) A A A A A A A S (0 dB) S (OFF) S (OFF) S VIDEO GAME A S (Medium) S (10) A A A A A A A S (0 dB) S (OFF) S (OFF) S MATRIX A A A S (30 ms) A A A A A A S (0 dB) S (OFF) S (OFF) S Troubleshooting VIRTURL A A A A A A A A A A S (0 dB) S (OFF) S (OFF) S

S : Signal / Adjustable S : Adjustable A : No signal / Not adjustable A : Not adjustable D : Turned on or off by speaker configuration setting NOTE3 : BASS +6 dB, TREBLE 0 dB NOTE4 : BASS +6 dB, TREBLE +4 dB NOTE5 : Can be used according to the “Direct Mode” setting. Specifications

86 ENGLISH

Differences in Surround Mode Names Depending on the Input Signals Getting Started

Button Input signals WMA DTS-HD DTS DOLBY DOLBY DIGITAL DVD-AUDIO Super Audio CD (Windows LINEAR DOLBY DOLBY Note Media Audio) DTS-HD DTS-HD High DTS ES DTS ES DOLBY DOLBY DOLBY DOLBY DVD- DSD Surround Mode ANALOG PCM / DTS DTS DOLBY DIGITAL DIGITAL EX DVD-Audio DSD Connections / MP3 / Master Resolution DSCRT MTRX DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL Audio (multi WAV (5.1ch) 96/24 TrueHD EX (With (With no (multi ch) (2ch) MPEG-4 AAC Audio Audio (With Flag) (With Flag) Plus (5.1/5/4ch) (4/3ch) (2ch) (2ch) ch) Flag) Flag) / FLAC STANDARD DTS SURROUND Setup DTS-HD MSTR A A A F A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A DTS-HD HI RES A A A A F A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A

DTS ES DSCRT6.1 z1 A A A A A F D A A A A A A A A A A A A A A Playback DTS ES MTRX6.1 z1 A A A A A A F D A A A A A A A A A A A A A DTS SURROUND A A A A A S S F A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A F A A A A A A A A A A A

DTS 96/24 Remote Control DTS (–HD) + PLgx CINEMA z2 A A A S S S S S S A A A A A A A A A A A DTS (–HD) + PLgx MUSIC z1 A A A S S S S S S A A A A A A A A A A A DTS (–HD) + NEO:6 z1 A A A S S A S S S A A A A A A A A A A A DTS NEO:6 CINEMA S S S A A A A A A A A A A A A S A S A S DTS NEO:6 MUSIC S S S A A A A A A A A A A A A S A S A S

DOLBY SURROUND Multi-Zone DOLBY TrueHD A A A A A A A A A F A A A A A A A A A A DOLBY DIGITAL + A A A A A A A A A A F A A A A A A A A A DOLBY DIGITAL EX z1 A A A A A A A A A A A S S S S A A A A A

DOLBY (D+) (HD) + EX z1 A A A A A A A A A S S A A A A A A A A A Information DOLBY DIGITAL A A A A A A A A A A A S F F F A A A A A DOLBY (D) (D+) (HD) + PLgx z2 A A A A A A A A A S S F D S S S A A A A A CINEMA g

DOLBY (D) (D+) (HD) + PL x Troubleshooting z1 A A A A A A A A A S S S S S S A A A A A MUSIC DOLBY PRO LOGIC gx CINEMA S S S A A A A A A A A A A A A S A S A S DOLBY PRO LOGIC gx MUSIC S S S A A A A A A A A A A A A S A S A S DOLBY PRO LOGIC gx GAME S S S A A A A A A A A A A A A S A S A S DOLBY PRO LOGIC g CINEMA S S S A A A A A A A A A A A A S A S A S

DOLBY PRO LOGIC g MUSIC S S S A A A A A A A A A A A A S A S A S Specifications DOLBY PRO LOGIC g GAME S S S A A A A A A A A A A A A S A S A S DOLBY PRO LOGIC S S S A A A A A A A A A A A A S A S A S MULTI CH IN MULTI CH IN A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A F A F A MULTI IN + PLgx CINEMA z2 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S A S A MULTI IN + PLgx MUSIC z1 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S A S A MULTI IN + Dolby EX z1 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S A S A MULTI CH IN 7.1 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A F D (7.1) A A A NOTE: z1: This mode is not available when the surround back speaker setup is set to “None”. z2: This mode is not available when the surround back speaker setup is set to “1spkr” or “None”. F : Mode selectable in initial status D : Mode fixed when “AFDM” is “ON” S : Selectable mode A : Non-selectable mode 87 ENGLISH

Getting Started Button Input signals WMA DTS-HD DTS DOLBY DOLBY DIGITAL DVD-AUDIO Super Audio CD (Windows LINEAR DTS-HD DTS ES DTS ES DOLBY DOLBY Note Media Audio) DTS-HD DOLBY DOLBY DOLBY DOLBY DVD- Surround Mode ANALOG PCM / High DSCRT MTRX DTS DTS DOLBY DIGITAL DIGITAL DVD-Audio DSD / MP3 / Master DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL Audio DSD (2ch) WAV Resolution (With (With (5.1ch) 96/24 TrueHD EX (With EX (With (2ch) (multi ch) MPEG-4 AAC Audio Plus (5.1/5/4ch) (4/3ch) (2ch) (multi ch) Audio Flag) Flag) Flag) no Flag) Connections / FLAC DIRECT DIRECT S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S A S A S DSD DIRECT A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S A

Setup DSD MULTI DIRECT MULTI CH DIRECT A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S A S A M DIRECT + PLgx CINEMA z2 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S A S A

Playback M DIRECT + PLgx MUSIC z1 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S A S A M DIRECT + Dolby EX z1 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S A S A M DIRECT 7.1 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S (7.1) A A A

Remote Control PURE DIRECT PURE DIRECT S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S A S A S DSD PURE DIRECT A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S DSD MULTI PURE A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S A MULTI CH PURE DIRECT A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S A S A M PURE D + PLgx CINEMA z2 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S A S A Multi-Zone M PURE D + PLgx MUSIC z1 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S A S A M PURE D + Dolby EX z1 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S A S A M CH PURE DIRECT 7.1 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A S (7.1) A A A DSP SIMULATION Information 7CH STEREO z3 S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S WIDE SCREEN S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S SUPER STADIUM S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S ROCK ARENA S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S

Troubleshooting JAZZ CLUB S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S CLASSIC CONCERT S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S MONO MOVIE S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S VIDEO GAME S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S MATRIX S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S VIRTUAL S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S Specifications STEREO STEREO F F F S S S S S S S S S S S S F S F S F

NOTE : z1: This mode is not available when the surround back speaker setup is set to “None”. z2: This mode is not available when the surround back speaker setup is set to “1spkr” or “None”. z3: If the surround back speaker setup is set to “None”, then “5CH STEREO” is displayed. F : Mode selectable in initial status S : Selectable mode A : Non-selectable mode

88 ENGLISH

IEEE 802.11g Getting Started About Networks Windows Media DRM This is another wireless LAN standard set by the 802 working group A copyright-protected technology developed by Microsoft. that establishes LAN technology standards at the IEEE (Institute of Windows Media Player Ver.11 • Windows Vista and the Windows logo are trademarks of the Electrical and Electronics Engineers) of the United States, and is Microsoft group of companies. compatible with IEEE 802.11b. It also uses the 2.4 GHz band, but This is a media player distributed free of charge by Microsoft enables communications at a maximum speed of 54 Mbps. Connections Corporation. • The PlaysForSure logo, Windows Media and the Windows logo are It can be used to play playlists created with Windows Media Player trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the Ver. 11 as well as files in such formats as WMA, DRM WMA, MP3 United States and/or other countries. The value indicated above is the maximum theoretical value for the and WAV. • Content providers are using the digital rights management technology wireless LAN standard, and does not indicate the actual data transfer for Windows Media contained in this device (WM-DRM) to protect rate. Setup the integrity of their content (Secure Content) so that their intellectual property, including copyright, in such content is not misappropriated. Infrastructure Communications

vTuner This device uses WM-DRM software to play Secure Content (WM- Playback DRM Software). If the security of the WM-DRM Software in this “Infrastructure Communications” refers to networks using wireless This is a free online contents server for Internet radio. Note that usage device has been compromised, owners of Secure Content (Secure LAN access points. fees are included in upgrade costs. Content Owners) may request that Microsoft revoke the WM-DRM This function can be used to connect to the Internet or a wired LAN

For inquiries about this service, visit the vTuner site below. Remote Control Software’s right to acquire new licenses to copy, display and/or play via a wireless LAN access point. Wireless LAN access points include vTuner website: http://www.radiodenon.com Secure Content. Revocation does not alter the WM-DRM Software’s wireless broadband routers. This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of ability to play unprotected content. A list of revoked WM-DRM Nothing Else Matters Software and BridgeCo. Use or distribution of Software is sent to your device whenever you download a license Ad-hoc Communications such technology outside of this product is prohibited without a license for Secure Content from the Internet or from a PC. Microsoft may, Signal transfer through wireless interconnection of computers is referred from Nothing Else Matters Software and BridgeCo or an authorized in conjunction with such license, also download revocation list onto

to as “ad hoc communications”. With such ad hoc communications Multi-Zone subsidiary. your device on behalf of Secure Content Owners. there is no connection to the Internet. Ad hoc communications are suited for establishing simple temporary networks. About Wireless LAN Network Names (SSID: Security Set Identifier) DLNA Information When forming wireless LAN networks, groups are formed to prevent • DLNA and DLNA CERTIFIED are trademarks and/or service marks of Wi-Fi® interference, data theft, etc. This grouping is done by “SSID” or Digital Living Network Alliance. “Security Set Identifiers”. For further security, a WEP key is set and • Some contents may not be compatible with other DLNA CERTIFIED™ Wi-Fi Certification assures tested and proven interoperability by the signal transfer is not possible unless the SSID and WEP key match.

products. Wi-Fi Alliance, a group certifying interoperability among wireless LAN Troubleshooting devices. WEP Key (Network Key) IEEE 802.11b This is key information used for encrypting data when conducting data transfer. On the AVR-4308, the same WEP key is used for data This is one wireless LAN standard set by the 802 working group encryption and decryption, so the same WEP key must be set on that establishes LAN technology standards at the IEEE (Institute of

both devices in order for communications to be established between Specifications Electrical and Electronics Engineers) of the United States. It uses the them. 2.4 GHz band usable freely without a radio frequency license (ISM band), enabling communications at a maximum speed of 11 Mbps.

The value indicated above is the maximum theoretical value for the wireless LAN standard, and does not indicate the actual data transfer rate.

89 ENGLISH Getting Started WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access) DAB frequency table This is a security standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance. In addition to the conventional SSID (network name) and WEP key (network key), Band III (174 to 240 MHz) L-Band (1452 to 1490 MHz) it also uses a user identification function and encrypting protocol for Frequency Label Frequency Label Frequency Label stronger security. 174.928 MHz 5A 211.648 MHz 10B 1452.960 MHz LA Connections WPA2 (Wi-Fi Protected Access 2) 176.640 MHz 5B 213.360 MHz 10C 1454.672 MHz LB 178.352 MHz 5C 215.072 MHz 10D 1456.384 MHz LC This is a new version of the WPA established by the Wi-Fi Alliance, 180.064 MHz 5D 216.928 MHz 11A 1458.096 MHz LD compatible with more secure AES encryption. 181.936 MHz 6A b 218.640 MHz 11B 1459.808 MHz LE 183.648 MHz 6B b 220.352 MHz 11C 1461.520 MHz LF Setup WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK (Pre-shared Key) 185.360 MHz 6C b 222.064 MHz 11D 1463.232 MHz LG b This is a simple authentication system for mutual authentication when 187.072 MHz 6D 223.936 MHz 12A 1464.944 MHz LH

Playback b a preset character string matches on the wireless LAN access point 188.928 MHz 7A 225.648 MHz 12B 1466.656 MHz LI b and client. 190.640 MHz 7B 227.360 MHz 12C 1468.368 MHz LJ 192.352 MHz 7C b 229.072 MHz 12D 1470.080 MHz LK 194.064 MHz 7D 230.784 MHz 13A 1471.792 MHz LL

Remote Control Passphrase 195.936 MHz 8A 232.496 MHz 13B 1473.504 MHz LM This refers to the code key used for WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK authentication, 197.648 MHz 8B 234.208 MHz 13C 1475.216 MHz LN a WPA authentication method. 199.360 MHz 8C 235.776 MHz 13D 1476.928 MHz LO 201.072 MHz 8D 237.488 MHz 13E 1478.640 MHz LP TKIP (Temporal Key Integrity Protocol) 202.928 MHz 9A 239.200 MHz 13F 1480.352 MHz LQ 204.640 MHz 9B 1482.064 MHz LR

Multi-Zone This is a network key used for WPA. The encryption algorithm is RC4, 206.352 MHz 9C 1483.776 MHz LS the same as for WEP, but the security level is increased by changing 208.064 MHz 9D 1485.488 MHz LT the network key used for encryption for each packet. 209.936 MHz 10A 1487.200 MHz LU 1488.912 MHz LV AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) b : UK Band

Information 1490.624 MHz LW This is a next generation standard encryption method replacing the current DES and 3DES, and because of its high security it is expected to be applied widely to wireless LANs in the future. It uses the “Rijndael” algorithm developed by two Belgian cryptographers to divide the data Troubleshooting into blocks of fixed lengths and encrypt each block. It supports data lengths of 128, 192 and 256 bits and key lengths of 128, 192 and 256 bits as well, offering extremely high encryption security. Specifications

90 ENGLISH Relationship Between Video Signals and Monitor Output Getting Started n Main zone Input signal Monitor output Monitor output (when GUI menu displayed) Video Convert HDMI COMPONENT S-VIDEO VIDEO HDMI COMPONENT S-VIDEO VIDEO HDMI COMPONENT S-VIDEO VIDEO A A A A b b z3 z3 z3 z3 A A A S b z VIDEOz1 VIDEOz1 z4 VIDEOz1 z4 b z VIDEOz2 VIDEOz2 VIDEOz2 VIDEO 1 VIDEO 2 Connections A A S A b S-VIDEOz1 S-VIDEOz1 S-VIDEOz1 S-VIDEOz1 b S-VIDEOz2 S-VIDEOz2 S-VIDEOz2 S-VIDEOz2 A A S S b S-VIDEOz1 S-VIDEOz1 S-VIDEOz1 S-VIDEOz1 b S-VIDEOz2 S-VIDEOz2 S-VIDEOz2 S-VIDEOz2 A S (1080p) A A A COMPONENT A A b z3 z3 z3 z3 A S (480p ~ 720p) A A b COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1 A A b COMPONENTz2 COMPONENTz2 A A A S (480i/576i) A A b COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1 b COMPONENTz2 COMPONENTz2 COMPONENTz2 COMPONENTz2 A S (1080p) A S b VIDEOz1 COMPONENT VIDEOz1 z4 VIDEOz1 z4 b VIDEOz2 VIDEOz2 VIDEOz2 VIDEOz2 A S A S b z z A b z z A (480p ~ 720p) COMPONENT 1 COMPONENT 1 VIDEO COMPONENT 2 COMPONENT 2 VIDEO Setup A S (480i/576i) A S b COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1 b COMPONENTz2 COMPONENTz2 COMPONENTz2 COMPONENTz2 A S (1080p) S A b S-VIDEOz1 COMPONENT S-VIDEOz1 S-VIDEOz1 b S-VIDEOz2 S-VIDEOz2 S-VIDEOz2 S-VIDEOz2 A S (480p ~ 720p) S A b COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1 S-VIDEO S-VIDEO b COMPONENTz2 COMPONENTz2 S-VIDEO S-VIDEO z z z z z z z z A S (480i/576i) S A b COMPONENT 1 COMPONENT 1 COMPONENT 1 COMPONENT 1 b COMPONENT 2 COMPONENT 2 COMPONENT 2 COMPONENT 2 Playback A S (1080p) S S b S-VIDEOz1 COMPONENT S-VIDEOz1 S-VIDEOz1 b S-VIDEO*2 S-VIDEOz2 S-VIDEOz2 S-VIDEOz2 A S (480p ~ 720p) S S b COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1 S-VIDEO S-VIDEO b COMPONENTz2 COMPONENTz2 S-VIDEO S-VIDEO A S (480i/576i) S S b COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1 b COMPONENTz2 COMPONENTz2 COMPONENTz2 COMPONENTz2 S A A A HDMI A A A HDMIz2 A A A S A A S z z z z z z HDMI VIDEO 1 VIDEO 1 4 VIDEO 1 4 HDMI 2 VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO Remote Control S A S A HDMI S-VIDEOz1 S-VIDEOz1 S-VIDEOz1 HDMIz2 S-VIDEO S-VIDEO S-VIDEO S A S S HDMI S-VIDEOz1 S-VIDEOz1 S-VIDEOz1 HDMIz2 S-VIDEO S-VIDEO S-VIDEO S S (1080p) A A HDMI COMPONENT A A HDMIz2 COMPONENT A A S S (480p ~ 720p) A A HDMI COMPONENTz1 A A HDMIz2 COMPONENT A A S S (480i/576i) A A HDMI COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1 HDMIz2 COMPONENT COMPONENT COMPONENT With HDMI S S (1080p) A S HDMI COMPONENT VIDEOz1 z4 VIDEOz1 z4 HDMIz2 COMPONENT VIDEO VIDEO ON monitor S S (480p ~ 720p) A S HDMI COMPONENTz1 A VIDEO HDMIz2 COMPONENT A VIDEO S S (480i/576i) A S HDMI COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1 HDMIz2 COMPONENT COMPONENT COMPONENT S S (1080p) S A HDMI COMPONENT S-VIDEOz1 S-VIDEOz1 HDMIz2 COMPONENT S-VIDEO S-VIDEO Multi-Zone S S (480p ~ 720p) S A HDMI COMPONENTz1 S-VIDEO S-VIDEO HDMIz2 COMPONENT S-VIDEO S-VIDEO S S (480i/576i) S A HDMI COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1 HDMIz2 COMPONENT COMPONENT COMPONENT S S (1080p) S S HDMI COMPONENT S-VIDEOz1 S-VIDEOz1 HDMIz2 COMPONENT S-VIDEO S-VIDEO S S (480p ~ 720p) S S HDMI COMPONENTz1 S-VIDEO S-VIDEO HDMIz2 COMPONENT S-VIDEO S-VIDEO S S (480i/576i) S S HDMI COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1 HDMIz2 COMPONENT COMPONENT COMPONENT

S A A A A A z3 z3 z3 Information S A A S A VIDEOz1 VIDEOz1 z4 VIDEOz1 z4 A VIDEOz2 VIDEOz2 VIDEOz2 S A S A A S-VIDEOz1 S-VIDEOz1 S-VIDEOz1 A S-VIDEOz2 S-VIDEOz2 S-VIDEOz2 S A S S A S-VIDEOz1 S-VIDEOz1 S-VIDEOz1 A S-VIDEOz2 S-VIDEOz2 S-VIDEOz2 S S (1080p) A A A COMPONENT A A A z3 z3 z3 z z Without HDMI S S (480p ~ 720p) A A A COMPONENT 1 A A A COMPONENT 2 A A S S A A A z z z A z z z monitor (480i/576i) COMPONENT 1 COMPONENT 1 COMPONENT 1 COMPONENT 2 COMPONENT 2 COMPONENT 2 Troubleshooting S S A S A z z z z A z z z or (1080p) COMPONENT VIDEO 1 4 VIDEO 1 4 VIDEO 2 VIDEO 2 VIDEO 2 S S (480p ~ 720p) A S A COMPONENTz1 A VIDEO A COMPONENTz2 A VIDEO with HDMI S S (480i/576i) A S A COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1 A COMPONENTz2 COMPONENTz2 COMPONENTz2 monitor off S S (1080p) S A A COMPONENT S-VIDEOz1 S-VIDEOz1 A S-VIDEOz2 S-VIDEOz2 S-VIDEOz2 S S (480p ~ 720p) S A A COMPONENTz1 S-VIDEO S-VIDEO A COMPONENTz2 S-VIDEO S-VIDEO S S (480i/576i) S A A COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1 A COMPONENTz2 COMPONENTz2 COMPONENTz2 S S (1080p) S S A COMPONENT S-VIDEOz1 S-VIDEOz1 A S-VIDEOz2 S-VIDEOz2 S-VIDEOz2 S S (480p ~ 720p) S S A COMPONENTz1 S-VIDEO S-VIDEO A COMPONENTz2 S-VIDEO S-VIDEO

S S (480i/576i) S S A COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1 COMPONENTz1 A COMPONENTz2 COMPONENTz2 COMPONENTz2 Specifications S : Signal present A : No output b : Output according to “Resolution” setting (i/p Scaler : When “A to H” is set) (vpage 31). A : No signal z1 : The “Picture Adjust” setting can be made. : Wallpaper or set background color displayed 480p ~ 720p : 480p / 576p / 1080i / 720p z2 : Superimposed over video signal : Output according to “Resolution” setting (i/p Scaler : When “H to H” is set) (vpage 31). z3 : Only displayed when the MENU button is : GUI menu not displayed pressed z4 : If the input signal is in SECAM format, it is converted to PAL for output

• The main zone video conversion function is compatible with the following formats: NTSC, PAL, SECAM, NTSC4,43, PAL -N, PAL -M and PAL -60. • When SECAM signals of video input are up-converted, the signals are output in PAL format from the S-Video connector. • If the input signal is a component 1080p signal, up-converting to HDMI is not possible. • The GUI menu display cannot be superimposed when xvYCC signals and component 1080p signal, computer’s resolution (e.g. VGA) are input.

91 ENGLISH

Getting Started SIGNAL IN MONITOR OUT (Normally) MONITOR OUT (when GUI menu displayed) Video Convert HDMI COMPONENT S-VIDEO VIDEO HDMI COMPONENT S-VIDEO VIDEO HDMI COMPONENT S-VIDEO VIDEO A A A A A A A A S S S S A A A S A A A S (VIDEO) S S S S A A S A A A S (S-VIDEO) A S S S S

Connections A A S S A A S (S-VIDEO) S (VIDEO) S S S S A S A A A S (COMPONENT) A A S S S S A S A S A S (COMPONENT) A S (VIDEO) S S S S A S S A A S (COMPONENT) S (S-VIDEO) A S S S S A S S S A S (COMPONENT) S (S-VIDEO) S (VIDEO) S S S S

Setup OFF S A A A S (HDMI) A A A S (HDMI)z2 A A A S A A S S (HDMI) A A S (VIDEO) S (HDMI)z2 A A A S A S A S A S A S z A A A Playback (HDMI) (S-VIDEO) (HDMI) 2 S A S S S (HDMI) A S (S-VIDEO) S (VIDEO) S (HDMI)z2 A A A S S A A S (HDMI) S (COMPONENT) A A S (HDMI)z2 A A A S S A S S (HDMI) S (COMPONENT) A S (VIDEO) S (HDMI)z2 A A A Remote Control S S S A S (HDMI) S (COMPONENT) S (S-VIDEO) A S (HDMI)z2 A A A S S S S S (HDMI) S (COMPONENT) S (S-VIDEO) S (VIDEO) S (HDMI)z2 A A A

S : Signal present S : Output present A : No signal A : No output z2 : Superimposed over video signal Multi-Zone

To display the GUI menu on an HDMI monitor, output with a resolution of 480p/576p.

n ZONE2 Information Input MONITOR OUT COMPONENT S-VIDEO VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO A A A A A A A S A S (VIDEO)

Troubleshooting A S A A S (S-VIDEO) A S S A S (S-VIDEO) S A A S (COMPONENT) A S A S S (COMPONENT) S (VIDEO) S S A S (COMPONENT) S (S-VIDEO) S S S S (COMPONENT) S (S-VIDEO) Specifications S : Signal present S : Output present A : No signal A : No output : On-screen display not displayed

92 ENGLISH Relationship Between Amp Assign Setting and Getting Started Speaker Output STEREO or DIRECT (2ch) Mode Connections Status Speaker terminal Setting SURROUND B/ Surround mode SURROUND A SURROUND BACK ASSIGN-2 ASSIGN STEREO/DIRECT – – FL/FR FL/FR 2ch Bi-Wiring

Other SLA/SRA SBL/SBR – – Setup STEREO/DIRECT – – FL/FR FL/FR 2ch Bi-Amp Other SLA/SRA SBL/SBR – – Playback Multi-Zone Power On/Off

Status Speaker terminal Remote Control Setting SURROUND SURROUND B/ ZONE2 ZONE3 SURROUND A ASSIGN-2 BACK ASSIGN ON SLA/SRA – SLB/SRB Z2 L/R ON ZONE2 OFF SLA/SRA – SLB/SRB Z2 L/R ON SLA/SRA SBL/SBR SLB/SRB – OFF

OFF SLA/SRA SBL/SBR SLB/SRB – Multi-Zone ON SLA/SRA – SLB/SRB Z3 L/R ON OFF SLA/SRA SBL/SBR SLB/SRB – ZONE3 ON SLA/SRA – SLB/SRB Z3 L/R OFF OFF SLA/SRA SBL/SBR SLB/SRB –

ON SLA/SRA – SLB/SRB Z2/Z3 Information ON ZONE OFF SLA/SRA – SLB/SRB Z2/Z3 ON SLA/SRA – SLB/SRB Z2/Z3 (MONO) OFF OFF SLA/SRA SBL/SBR SLB/SRB – ON SLA/SRA – FL/FR Z2 L/R ON Bi-Wiring & OFF SLA/SRA – FL/FR Z2 L/R ON SLA/SRA SBL/SBR FL/FR – Troubleshooting ZONE2 OFF OFF SLA/SRA SBL/SBR FL/FR – ON SLA/SRA – FL/FR Z3 L/R ON Bi-Wiring & OFF SLA/SRA SBL/SBR FL/FR – ON SLA/SRA – FL/FR Z3 L/R ZONE3 OFF OFF SLA/SRA SBL/SBR FL/FR – ON SLA/SRA – FL/FR Z2/Z3 ON Bi-Wiring & OFF SLA/SRA – FL/FR Z2/Z3 Specifications ON SLA/SRA – FL/FR Z2/Z3 ZONE(MONO) OFF OFF SLA/SRA SBL/SBR FL/FR – ON – – Z3 L/R Z2 L/R ON ZONE2/ OFF SLA/SRA – SLB/SRB Z2 L/R ON – – Z3 L/R Z2 L/R ZONE3 OFF OFF SLA/SRA SBL/SBR SLB/SRB – ON – – Z3(MONO) Z2(MONO) ON ZONE2/3 OFF SLA/SRA – SLB/SRB Z2(MONO) ON – – Z3(MONO) – (MONO) OFF OFF SLA/SRA SBL/SBR SLB/SRB –

93 ENGLISH

Getting Started Symptom Cause Countermeasure Page Power turns off • Protection circuit activated due • Turn off the power, wait for the 11 suddenly and to rise of internal temperature. set to fully cool down, then turn Troubleshooting power indicator the power back on. flashes red. • Place the set in a well-ventilated 11 place. Connections If a problem should arise, first check the following: • Core wires of two speakers are • First unplug the power cord, 11 1. Are the connections correct? touching each other or a core then twist the core wires tightly 2. Is the set being operated as described in the owner’s manual? wire is sticking out of the terminal or terminate the speaker cables, 3. Are the other components operating properly? and touching the set’s rear panel, then reconnect. If this unit does not operate properly, check the items listed in the table below. Should the problem persist,

Setup activating the protection circuit. there may be a malfunction. • Speakers with an impedance • Use speakers with the specified 11 In this case, disconnect the power immediately and contact your store of purchase. other than specified are being impedance.

Playback used. GGeneralH • Set is damaged. • Turn off the power and contact a – Symptom Cause Countermeasure Page DENON service center. Power does not • Connection of the power cord is • Check that the power plugs are 23 Remote Control turn on, or turns faulty. securely inserted into the AVR- GRemote Control UnitH off directly after it 4308’s AC inlet and the wall Symptom Cause Countermeasure Page was turned on. power outlet. Set does not work • Batteries are worn. • Replace with new batteries. 4 No sound is • Connection with the input • Check the connections. 10 properly when • You are operating outside of the • Operate within the specified 4 produced from devices or connection of the remote control specified range. range. speakers. speaker cables is faulty.

Multi-Zone unit operated. • Obstacle between main unit and • Remove the obstacle. 4 • Device you want to play and set • Select an appropriate input 40, 41 remote control unit. input source do not match. source. • The batteries are not inserted in • Insert the batteries in the 4 • Master volume is turned too • Adjust the master volume to an 51 the proper direction, as indicated proper direction, following the low. appropriate level. by the polarity marks in the polarity marks in the battery Information • Mute mode is set. • Cancel the mute mode. 51 battery compartment. compartment. • Headphones are connected. • Disconnect the headphones. 51 • The set’s remote control sensor • Move the set to a place in which 4 • No digital signals are being • Select an input source for which 43 is exposed to strong light (direct the remote control sensor will input. the digital input setting has been sunlight, inverter type fluorescent not be exposed to strong light. made.

Troubleshooting bulb light, etc.). • The connectors to which the • Set the input mode. 43 • The remote ID of the main unit • Set the same remote IDs for the 39, 71 digital inputs are assigned and and remote control unit do not main unit and remote control the settable input modes do not match. unit. match. Display is off. • The “Dimmer” setting is set to • Set to something other than 39 “OFF”. “OFF”. Specifications • The PURE DIRECT mode is set. • Set a surround mode other than 45, 46 the PURE DIRECT mode. “DOLBY DIGITAL” • DVD player’s digital audio output • Check the DVD player’s audio – indicator does not setting is not proper. output setting. For details, read appear on display. the DVD player’s operating instructions.

94 ENGLISH

GAudioH Symptom Cause Countermeasure Page Getting Started Symptom Cause Countermeasure Page No sound is • The “Manual Setup” – “HDMI • Set to “TV”. 31 No sound is • Monaural source (monitor, AM • The mode is set to something 45, 46 output from Setup” – “Audio” setting is set to produced from station, etc.) being played in other than “STANDARD”. the monitor “Amp”. center speaker. “STANDARD” mode. connected with HDMI No sound • The surround mode is set to • Set to a surround playback 45, 46 Connections is produced “STEREO”, “DIRECT” or “PURE mode. connections. from surround DIRECT”. speakers. • The surround speaker’s power • Check the setting and change it 37 GVideoH amplifier is assigned to a different as necessary. Symptom Cause Countermeasure Page channel. The on-screen • The format of the GUI and TV • Match the format of the GUI and 38 Setup No sound is • Surround back speaker setting is • Set to something other than 29 display does not (PAL or NTSC) do not match. TV. produced from set to “None”. “None”. appear. Playback surround back • Surround mode not set to a mode • Select a surround playback 45, 46 No picture • The connections between the • Check the connections. 12 ~ 23 speaker. for 6.1- or 7.1-channel playback. mode. appears. AVR-4308 and monitor are • The surround back speaker’s • Check the setting and change it 37 faulty.

power amplifier is assigned to a as necessary. • The monitor’s input setting is • Set properly. – Remote Control different channel. wrong. No sound is • Subwoofer’s power not turned • Turn on the subwoofer’s power. – • PURE DIRECT mode is set. • Cancel the PURE DIRECT mode. 45, 46 produced from on. • The player is connected using the • High definition (1080i/720p) and – subwoofer. • The “Subwoofer” setting at • Set to “Yes”. 29 component input connectors, the progressive (480p/576p) video “Speaker configuration” is set to monitor is connected using the signals are not down-converted.

“No”. video (yellow) or S-Video output Set the player to interlace Multi-Zone • The subwoofer is not properly • Check the connections. 10 connectors. (480i/576i) signals. connected. No picture • The connections to the HDMI • Check the connections. 12 • The subwoofer’s volume is • Adjust the subwoofer’s volume 66 appears connectors are faulty. turned off. to an appropriate level.

with HDMI • HDMI input setting is improper. • Check the HDMI input setting. 43 Information No test tones are • Surround mode not set to • Set to the “STANDARD” mode. 45 connections. • The monitor is not compatible • Connect a monitor that is 12 produced when “STANDARD”. with copyright protection compatible with copyright main remote (HDCP). protection (HDCP). control unit’s TEST • The HDMI format of the player • Match the HDMI format of the 12

TONE button is and monitor do not match. player and monitor. Troubleshooting pressed. • Depending on the monitor you • Set to either “Monitor 1” or 31 DTS sound is not • DVD player’s audio output setting • Set the DVD player. For details, – have connected, the display may “Monitor 2”. output. is not set to bitstream. refer to the DVD player’s not be correct when you set to operating instructions. “Auto (Dual)”. • DVD player is not compatible • Use a DTS-compatible player. – Picture cannot be • Input source does not match • The video conversion function 16

with DTS sound playback. recorded. recorder’s video connection does not work for the REC Specifications • The AVR-4308’s “Decode Mode” • Set to the “Auto” or “DTS” 42 connector (video or S-Video). OUT connectors. Match the setting is set to “PCM”. mode. input source and recorder HDMI audio • The “Manual Setup” – “HDMI • Set to “Amp”. 31 connections. signals are not Setup” – “Audio” setting is set to DVDs cannot be • This is not a malfunction. Most – output from “TV”. copied on a VCR. movie software includes copy – speakers. prevention signals and cannot be copied.

95 ENGLISH

Getting Started GiPodH Symptom Cause Countermeasure Page Symptom Cause Countermeasure Page Internet radio • Ethernet cable is not properly • Check the connection status. 21 iPod cannot be • The input source assigned to • Switch to the input source 43 cannot be played. connected or network is played. “iPod dock” is not selected. assigned at “iPod dock”. disconnected. • Cable is not properly connected. • Reconnect. 14 • Program is being broadcast in • Only Internet radio programs in 59 non-compatible format. MP3 and WMA can be played on Connections • Control Dock for iPod’s AC • Plug the Control Dock for iPod’s – adapter is not connected to AC adapter into a power outlet. this set. power outlet. • The computer’s or router’s • Check the computer’s or router’s – firewall is activated. firewall settings. • Radio station is not currently • Choose a radio station that is 61 GNET/USBH

Setup broadcasting. currently broadcasting. Symptom Cause Countermeasure Page • IP address is wrong. • Check the set’s IP address. 33 ~ 36 When a USB • The set cannot recognize a USB • Check the connection. 19 Files stored on a • Files are stored in a non- • Record in a compatible format. 59

Playback memory device memory device. computer cannot compatible format. is connected, • A USB memory device not • Connect a USB memory device – be played. • You are attempting to play a file • Files that are copyright protected 59 “USB” is not conforming to mass storage class conforming to mass storage that is copyright protected. cannot be played on this set. displayed on the or MTP standards is connected. class or MTP standards. • Set and computer are connected • The set’s USB port cannot – Remote Control GUI menu. • The set port and the connected • Connect to the port set at “USB 43 by USB cable. be used for connection to a port do not match. Select”. computer. • A USB memory device that • This is not a malfunction. DENON – Server is not • The computer’s or router’s • Check the computer’s or router’s – the set cannot recognize is does not guarantee that all USB found, or it is firewall is activated. firewall settings. connected. memory devices will operate or not possible to • Computer’s power is not turned • Turn on the power. – receive power. connect to the on. Multi-Zone • USB memory device is connected • Connect the USB memory device – server. • Server is not running. • Launch the server. – via USB hub. directly to the USB port. • Set’s IP address is wrong. • Check the set’s IP address. 33 ~ 36 Files on a USB • USB memory device is in format • Set the format to FAT16 or – Cannot connect to • Radio station is not currently • Wait a while before trying again. – memory device other than FAT16 or FAT32. FAT32. For details, refer to the preset or favorite broadcasting. Information cannot be played. USB memory device’s operating radio stations. • Radio station is not currently in • It is not possible to connect to – instructions. service. radio stations that are no longer • USB memory device is divided • When divided into multiple – in service. into multiple partitions. partitions, only files stored in the For some • Station is congested or not • Wait a while before trying again. – top partition can be played.

Troubleshooting radio stations, currently broadcasting. • Files are stored in a non- • Record the files in a compatible 59 “Server Full” compatible format. format. or “Connection • You are attempting to play a file • Files that are copyright protected 59 Down” is that is copyright protected. cannot be played on this set. displayed and The file names • Characters that cannot be • This is not a malfunction. On – station cannot be are not displayed displayed are used. this set, characters that cannot connected to. Specifications properly (“...”, etc.). be displayed are replaced with a Sound is broken • Network’s signal transfer speed • This is not a malfunction. When – “ . (period)”. during playback. is slow or communications lines playing broadcast data with a or radio station is congested. high bit rate, the sound may be broken, depending on the communications conditions. Sound quality is • File being played has a low bit • This is not a malfunction. – poor or played rate. sound is noisy.

96 ENGLISH

GWireless LANH Getting Started Symptom Cause Countermeasure Page Cannot connect • The settings of the SSID • Match the network settings with 34 ~ 36 to network. and network key (WEP) are the AVR-4308’s settings. Specifications incorrect.

• The reception is poor and the • Shorten the distance from the – Connections signals cannot be received. wireless LAN’s access point, n Audio section remove any obstacles and • Power amplifier Rated output: Front: otherwise improve visibility, then 140 W + 140 W (8 Ω/ohms, 20 Hz ~ 20 kHz with 0.05 % T.H.D.) try reconnecting. Also install 170 W + 170 W (6 Ω/ohms, 1 kHz with 0.7 % T.H.D.)

away from microwave ovens Center: Setup and the access points of other 140 W (8 Ω/ohms, 20 Hz ~ 20 kHz with 0.05 % T.H.D.) networks. 170 W (6 Ω/ohms, 1 kHz with 0.7 % T.H.D.)

• There are multiple networks and • Set the access point’s channel – Surround (A + B): Playback the usable channels overlap. settings away from the channels 140 W + 140 W (8 Ω/ohms, 20 Hz ~ 20 kHz with 0.05 % T.H.D.) used for other networks. 170 W + 170 W (6 Ω/ohms, 1 kHz with 0.7 % T.H.D.) Alternatively, connect using a Surround back:

140 W + 140 W (8 Ω/ohms, 20 Hz ~ 20 kHz with 0.05 % T.H.D.) Remote Control network cable. 170 W + 170 W (6 Ω/ohms, 1 kHz with 0.7 % T.H.D.) Played sound is • There are multiple networks and • Set the access point’s channel – Dynamic power: 150 W x 2ch (8 Ω/ohms) interrupted or the usable channels overlap. settings away from the channels 220 W x 2ch (4 Ω/ohms) sound cannot be used for other networks. Output connectors: Front, Center, Surround back 6 ~ 16 Ω/ohms played. Alternatively, connect using a Surround: A or B 6 ~ 16 Ω/ohms network cable. A + B 8 ~ 16 Ω/ohms • Analog Multi-Zone Noise in sound • The wireless LAN waves are Try one of the following methods: Input sensitivity / Input impedance: 200 mV / 47 kΩ/kohms or picture when causing interference. • Try changing the product’s place – Frequency response: 10 Hz ~ 100 kHz — +1, –3 dB (DIRECT mode) viewing TV or of installation and the direction of S/N: 102 dB (DIRECT mode) listening to radio. the antenna. Distortion: 0.005 % (20 Hz ~ 20 kHz) (DIRECT mode) • Increase the separation between – Rated output: 1.2 V Information the equipment and AVR-4308. • Digital • Connect the product into an – D/A output: Rated output — 2 V (at 0 dB playback) outlet on a circuit different from Total harmonic distortion — 0.008 % (1 kHz, at 0 dB) that to which the AVR-4308 is S/N ratio — 102 dB Dynamic range — 100 dB Troubleshooting connected. Digital input: Format — Digital audio interface • Phono equalizer (PHONO input — REC OUT) Input sensitivity: 2.5 mV RIAA deviation: ±1 dB (20 Hz to 20 kHz) S/N: 74 dB (A weighting, with 5 mV input) Rated output: 150 mV Distortion factor: 0.03 % (1 kHz, 3 V) Specifications

97 ENGLISH

Getting Started n Video section n General • Standard video connectors Power supply: AC 230 V, 50 Hz Input / output level and impedance: 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms Power consumption: 580 W Frequency response: 5 Hz ~ 10 MHz — +0, –3 dB 0.3 W (Standby) • S-Video connectors Maximum external dimensions: 434 (W) x 195 (H) x 455 (D) mm Input / output level and impedance: Y (brightness) signal — 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms Weight: 18.9 kg

Connections C (color) signal — 0.3 (PAL) / 0.286 (NTSC) Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms Frequency response: 5 Hz ~ 10 MHz — +0, –3 dB n Main remote control unit (RC-1068) • Color component video connector Batteries: LR6/AA Type (two batteries) Input / output level and impedance: Y (brightness) signal — 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms Maximum external dimensions: 63 (W) x 238 (H) x 31 (D) mm PB / CB signal — 0.7 Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms Weight: 190 g (including batteries) PR / CR signal — 0.7 Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms Setup Frequency response: 5 Hz ~ 100 MHz — +0, –3 dB (when video convert set to “OFF”) n Sub remote control unit (RC-1070) Batteries: R03/AAA Type (two batteries) n Tuner section [FM] [AM] Maximum external dimensions: 49 (W) x 220 (H) x 24.5 (D) mm Playback (note: µV at 75 Ω/ohms, 0 dBf = 1 x 10-15 W) Weight: 114 g (including batteries) Receiving Range: 87.5 MHz ~ 108.0 MHz 522 kHz ~ 1611 kHz Usable Sensitivity: 1.0 µV (11.2 dBf) 18 µV z: Wi-Fi® conformity indicates tested and proven interoperability by the “Wi-Fi Alliance”, a group certifying interoperability 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity: MONO 1.6 µV (15.3 dBf) among wireless LAN devices.

Remote Control STEREO 23 µV (38.5 dBf) b For purposes of improvement, specifications and design are subject to change without notice. S/N (IHF-A): MONO 77 dB STEREO 72 dB Total harmonic Distortion (at 1 kHz): MONO 0.15 % STEREO 0.3 % n DAB section Multi-Zone Frequency range: 174.928 (5A) ~ 239.200 (13F) MHz (BAND III) 1452.960 (LA) ~ 1490.624 (LW) MHz (L–BAND) Sensitivity: –98 dBm (BAND III) –94 dBm (L-BAND) S/N: 100 dB (IHF-A weighted) THD+N: 0.006 % (1 kHz) Information Channel separation: 95 dB (1 kHz) Frequency response: +0.5/–0.5 dB (20 Hz ~ 20 kHz) Aerial terminal: 75 Ω/ohm, F female n Wireless LAN

Troubleshooting Network type (wireless LAN standards) : Conforming to IEEE 802.11b Conforming to IEEE 802.11g (Conforming to Wi-Fi®)z Transfer rate: DS-SS: 11 / 5.5 / 2 / 1 Mbps (Automatic switching) OFDM: 54 / 48 / 36 / 24 / 18 / 12 / 9 / 6 Mbps (Automatic switching) Security: SSID (Network name) WEP key (network key) (64/128 bits) Specifications WPA-PSK (TKIP/AES) WPA2-PSK (TKIP/AES) Used frequency range: 2,412 MHz ~ 2,472 MHz No. of channels: Conforming to IEEE 802.11b : 13ch (DS-SS) (Of which 1 channel used) Conforming to IEEE 802.11g : 13ch (OFDM) (Of which 1 channel used)

98 List of preset codes / Liste von voreingestellten Codes / Liste de codes préréglés / Lista dei codici pre-regolati / Lista de códigos pre-ajustados / Lijst van vooringestelde codes / Förteckning över förinställda koder

Fujitsu 01497 01877, 00877, 00477, 00237, Balanced Audio Mission 40157 Denon Amp Scientific Atlanta 00003, 00000, 00008, 01510 B Technology 40157 G Galaxi 00008 40000, 40032, 40087, 40179, Denon 81001, 82001, 83001, 84001 Skyworth 01464 Burmester 40420 Modulaire 40420, 40468 D GE 00237, 00144 Sony 01006, 01460 Bush 40388 MTC 40420 Gehua 00476 Sprucer 00144 Cairn 40157 Musical Fidelity 40393 General Instrument 00476, 00810, 00276, 00003 C Denon Tuner Starcom 00003 California Audio Labs 40029, 40303 Myryad 40157 Gibralter 00003 D Denon (Analog) 52863, 52795, 52800, 52805 StarHub 00276 Cambridge 40157 NAD 40000, 40721 GNI 01466 N Sumitomo 01500, 01504 Cambridge Audio 40157 Naim 40157 GoldStar 00144 Supercable 00276 Cambridge NSM 40157 Denon Digital Tuner H Hitachi 00003, 00008 Soundworks 40157 T Taihan 00778 O Onkyo 40868, 40101 D Denon (NET) 62865, 62837, 62838, 62839 Hongtian Jiangsu 01462 Carver 40157, 40179 TCL 01445 40000, 40032, 40037, 40087, Denon (DAB) 62840, 62841, 62842, 62843 Hwalin 00303 CDC 40420 Optimus 40179, 40393, 40420, 40468 Telewest 01068 Insight 00476, 00810 CEC 40420 Orion 40393 I Time Warner cable 01877 Jerrold 00476, 00810, 00276, 00003 Copland 40393 P Panasonic 40029, 40303, 40388, 40752 Denon iPod J TongKook 00840 Jiuzhou 01445 Curtis Mathes 40032 Parasound 40420 Denon 72815, 72816, 72817, 72818 Torx 00003 D KNC 00008 Cyrus 40157 Penney 40029 K Toshiba 00000, 01509 L LG 00144 40873, 40003, 40766, Philips 40157 Trans PX 00276, 00303 D Denon [42867]z, 42868 Macab 00817 Pioneer 40032, 40101, 40468 Cable M TS 00003, 00303 DKK 40000 Madritel 01230 Polk Audio 40157 A A-Mark 00008, 00144 United Cable 00276, 00003 DMX Electronics 40157 Maspro 01510 U Proceed 40420 ABC 00237, 00003, 00008 US Electronics 00276, 00003, 00008 Dual 40003 Matav 01082 Proton 40157 Accuphase 00003 V Videoway 00000 Dynaco 40157 Memorex 00000 Q QED 40157 Acorn 00237 Visiopass 00817 Dynamic Bass 40179 Mitsubishi 00003 Quad 40157 Action 00237 Z Zenith 00000, 00525, 00899 F Fisher 40000, 40179 Active 00237 01376, 00476, 00810, 00276, Quasar 40029 Motorola 01187 Garrard 40393, 40420 G Radiola 40157 ADB 01230 MS 00303 Genexxa 40000, 40032, 40037, 40179 R Cable/PVR Combination b1 40000, 40032, 40179, 40420, Aichi Denshi 01512 N NEC 01496 Goldmund 40157 RadioShack 40468 Americast 00899 Noos 00817 A Americast 00899 Grundig 40157 40032, 40053, 40179, 40420, RCA 40468 Amstrad 01222 D Digeo 01187 Hafler 40173 Nova Vision 00008 H 40000, 40032, 40087, 40179, Archer 00237 Novaplex 00008 F Freebox 01482 Harman/Kardon 40100, 40157, 40173 Realistic 40420, 40468 Auna 01230 NTL 00276, 00003, 01060, 01068 G General Instrument 00810 Hitachi 40032 Restek 40157 Austar 00276 O Oak 00303 J Jerrold 00810 I Inkel 40157 Revox 40157 B BCC 00276 Ono 01068 M Motorola 01376, 00810, 01187 Integra 40101 Roksan 40420 Bell South 00899 Optus 00276, 01060 P Pace 01877, 00237 J Jerrold 40003 Rotel 40157, 40420 Bestlink 00303 Pioneer 01877, 00877 Pace 01877, 00877, 00237, 00008, JVC 40032, 40072 Royal 40420 P 01060, 01068, 01577 Scientific Atlanta 01877, 00877 Birmingham Cable 00276 S 40681, 40000, 40029, 40157, S SAE 40157 Communications Panasonic 00000, 00008, 00144, 01488 K Kenwood Sony 01006 40028, 40037, 40036, 40190 Saisho 40000 British Telecom 00003 Paragon 00000, 00008, 00525 KLH 41318 Supercable 00276 Sansui 40000, 40157 Cable & Wireless 01068 Penney 00000 Krell 40157 C T Time Warner cable 01877 Sanyo 40000, 40087, 40179 Century 00008 Philips 01305, 00317, 00817 Linn 40157 Z Zenith 00899 L SAST 40157 Coship 01462 01877, 00877, 00144, 00533, Loewe 40157 Pioneer 01500 Sears 40179 Daehan 00778 Luxman 40393 D Pulsar 00000 Sharp 40037 Daeryung 01877, 00877, 00477, 00008 CD Player LXI 40179 PVP Stereo Visual Siemens 40157 Digeo 01187 Matrix 00003 Acoustic Research 40420 Magnavox 40157 A M Silsonic 40036 Director 00476 Quasar 00000 Advantage 40032 Marantz 40029, 40157 Q Simaudio 40157 DX Antenna 01500 RadioShack 00303 Aiwa 40157 Matsui 40157 R Sonic Frontiers 40157 Emerson 00303 Regal 00276 Arcam 40157 E MCS 40029 40490, 40000, 40100, 41364, Encon 00008 Runco 00000 Audio Research 40157 40000, 40032, 40179, 40420, Sony 40185 Memorex 40468 Fosgate 00276 Sagem 00817 Audiolab 40157 Sugden 40157 F S Meridian 40157 Foxtel 01222 Salora 00000 Audiomeca 40157 Sylvania 40157 Micromega 40157 France Telecom 00817 00003, 00000, 00144, 00778, Audioton 40157 T TAG McLaren 40157 Samsung 00840, 01060, 01666 Miro 40000 Freebox 01482 AVI 40157 Tandy 40032 PRESET CODE  Tascam 40393, 40420 Orion 20308, 20309 Northgate 01272 Astacom 00710 Coship 01457 Teac 40490, 40393, 40420 P Palladium 20375 P Packard Bell 01272 Aston 00142 Crossdigital 01109 Technics 40029, 40303 Panasonic 20229 Panasonic 01120 Astra 00713 Crown 01284 Techwood 40303 Philips 20029, 20229 Pioneer 01010 Astratec 01743 Cryptovision 00455, 00795 Thomson 40053 Phonotrend 20337 R Ricavision 01272 00173, 00658, 01099, 01100, Cyfra+ 01076 Astro 01113 Thorens 40157 20027, 20220, 20099, 20109, S Samsung 01190, 01490 Cyrus 00200 Pioneer 21306, 21312 Atlantic Telephone 01333 Thule Audio 40157 Sensory Science 01126 D-box 00723, 00873, 01114 Polk Audio 20029 Atsat 01300 D Tokai 40420 Sharp 01010 Daewoo 00713, 01111, 01296, 01743 Radiola 20029 AtSky 01334 Universum 40157, 40053 R SMC 01456 Delfa 00863 U RCA 20027, 20220 Audioline 01672 Victor 40072 Sony 01272, 01324, 01364 Deltasat 01075 V Revox 20029 Aurora 00642, 00879, 01333, 01433 W Wadia 40393 Stack 9 01272 Dgtec 01542, 01631, 01242 S Sansui 20029, 20009 00497, 00642, 00863, 00879, 40000, 40032, 40157, 40053, Sylvania 01563 Austar 01176, 01259 Digenius 00299 Wards 40087, 40179 Sanyo 20074 Systemax 01272 Axiel 00710 Digiality 01685 Yamaha 40490, 40868, 40032, 40036 Sharp 20231, 20371 Y Tagar Systems 01272 Axil 01457, 01659 Digifusion 01645, 01743 Yorx 40000 Sherwood 20337 T Toshiba 01272 Axis 01111 DigiLogic 01284 Sonic 20375 Touch 01272 B@ytronic 01412 DigiQuest 00863, 01300, 01457, 01473 20243, 20170, 20291, 20234, B CD Recorder Sony 21313 V Viewsonic 01272, 01329 Beko 00455 DigiSat 01232 D Denon 40766, 42868 T TaeKwang 20439 Vizio 01126 Bell ExpressVu 00775 Digisky 01457 J JVC 40072 Tandberg 20109 Voodoo 01272 Big Sat 01457 DigitAll World 01227 RCA 40053, 40420 20280, 20283, 20289, 20308, X Xbox 01805 Black Diamond 01284 Digiturk 01076 R Teac 20309 ZT Group 01272 Blaupunkt 00173 Digiwave 01631 S Sony 40000, 40100, 41364 Technics 20229 Z Blue Sky 00713 Dijam 01296 T Teac 40420 Technovox 20229 Boca 00713, 01232, 01366 DiPro 01367, 01543 Thomson 40053 Thorens 20029 Satellite Receiver Boston 00710, 01251 01377, 00392, 00566, 00639, Universum 20375, 20439 01639, 01142, 00247, 00749, U A @sat 01300 Brainwave 00658, 01672 V Victor 20244, 20273, 20274 01749, 00724, 00819, 01856, Tape Deck @Sky 01334 British Sky DirecTV 01076, 01108, 00099, 01109, Wards 20027, 20029 00847, 01175, 01662, 01847 A Aiwa 20029, 20197, 20200, 21315 W A-Mark 00345 Broadcasting 01414, 01442, 01609, 01392, Wharfedale 20439 Broco 00713 01640 Akai 20283, 20439 ABsat 00123, 00713 Yamaha 20097, 20094 BskyB 00847, 01175, 01662 Discovery 00710 Arcam 20076 Y ADB 00642, 01259, 01367, 01418, 01473, 01491 BT 00710, 01296 Dish Network System 01505, 01005, 00775, 01775 Audiolab 20029 AGS 00710 Bubu Sat 00713 Dishpro 01505, 01005, 00775, 01775 Carver 20029 b C HDTV Tuner 1 Aiwa 01514 01284, 01645, 01672, 01743, Distratel 01283, 01704 20076, 20371, 21311, Bush 01811 D Denon [22471]z A ABS 01272 Akai 00200 DMT 01075 Canal 00853 F Fisher 20074 Accurian 01653 Alba 00455, 00713, 01284, 01659, C DNT 00200 01811 Canal Digital 00853, 01622 G Garrard 20308, 20309, 20375, 20439 Alienware 01272 Dream Multimedia 01237 Allsat 00200, 01043 Canal Satellite 00853, 01339, 01853 Genexxa 20439 C CyberPower 01272 DSE 01375 Alltech 00713 Canal+ 00853 GoldStar 20375 D D-Link 01554 DSTV 00642, 00879, 01433 Allvision 01232, 01334, 01412 Centrex 01457 Grundig 20029, 20375 Dgtec 01363 Durabrand 01284 AlphaStar 00772 CGV 01413, 01567 H Harman/Kardon 20182, 20029, 21314 E Epson 01563 DX Antenna 01530 Amitronica 00713 Chaparral 00216 I Inkel 20070, 20071, 20337 G Gateway 01272 01505, 01005, 00775, 00455, 00345, 00713, 00795, 00847, 00610, 00713, 00853, 00871, 20244, 20273, 20274, 20303, H Hewlett Packard 01272, 01267 Amstrad 00863, 00882, 01113, 01175, Cherokee 00123, 00710 E Echostar J JVC 20304, 20310, 21309 01086, 01200, 01323, 01409, Howard Computers 01272 01693, 01801 Chess 00713, 01085, 01334, 01626 01418, 01473, 01775 20070, 20071, 20092, 20233, Anglo 00713 Chili 01718 K Kenwood 20234, 21364 HP 01272, 01267 Einhell 00713 Ankaro 00713 00299, 00394, 00818, 01075, L LG 20375 Hush 01272 CityCom Elap 00713, 01567 AntSat 01083 01176, 01232 Luxman 20308, 20309 I iBUYPOWER 01272 Classic 01672 Elsat 00713 Apollo 00455 M Magnavox 20029 L LG 01415 Clatronic 01413 Elta 00200, 01659 Arcon 01043, 01075 Marantz 20029, 20009 Linksys 01272, 01365 CNS 01367 Emme Esse 00871 Armstrong 00200 Memorex 20099 M Media Center PC 01272 Comag 01232, 01366, 01412, 01413 Energy Sistem 01631 Arnion 01300 Mitsubishi 20283, 20439 Microsoft 01272, 01805 Condor 01700 Engel 00713, 01251 Asat 00200 Myryad 20029 Mind 01272 Conia 01695 EP Sat 00455 ASCI 01334 O Onkyo 20135, 20136, 20282 Motorola 01363 Contec 00394 Esat 00879 ASLF 00713 Optimus 20027, 20220, 20337, 20439 N Niveus Media 01272 Continental Edison 01695 Eurieult 00882 AssCom 00853

 PRESET CODE Eurocrypt 00455 Hauppauge 01672 Kreiselmeyer 00173 Multibroadcast 00642, 00879 01142, 00749, 01749, 00775, 00724, 00819, 01076, 00722, EuroLine 01251 HB 01214, 01801 Kross 01695 Multichoice 00642, 00879, 01333, 01433, 01559, 01560 Philips 00099, 00710, 00455, 00818, Europa 00863 HDT 01159 L&S Electronic 01043, 01334 00200, 00847, 00853, 00173, L Mx Onda 01659 Europhon 00299 Hills 01232 Labgear 01296 01114, 00133, 01442, 01543, Myryad 00200 01672 Eurosky 00262, 00299 00125, 00173, 00299, 00710, LaSAT 00173, 00299 Hirschmann 00882, 01085, 01111, 01232, Mysat 00713 Phonotrend 00863, 01200 Eurostar 00818 Lava 01631 01412 MySky 01693, 01848, 01850 Pilotime 01339 Eutelsat 00713 Legend 01718 Hisense 01535 N NEC 01519 Pino 01334 Expressvu 00775, 01775 00749, 00819, 00455, 01250, Legrand 01718 Hitachi NEOTION 01334 Pioneer 01142, 00329, 00853, 01308, Fenner 00713 01284, 01518, 01523, 01525 Lemon 01334 01442 F Netgem 01322 Ferguson 00455, 01291, 01743 Homecast 01214, 01680, 01700 Lenco 00713 Planet 00871 Netsat 00099, 00887 Finlandia 00455 Hornet 01300 Lenoxx 01611 Plasmatic 00442 Neuf TV 01322 Finlux 00455 Houston 00775 LG 01075, 01414 PMB 00713, 01611 Neuhaus 00713 Flair Mate 00713 HTS 00775, 01775 Lifesat 00299, 00713, 01043 Polytron 00394 Hughes Network Neuling 01232 FMD 01251, 01413, 01457 01142, 00749, 01749, 01442 Lodos 01284 Portland 01296 Systems Neusat 00713 Force 01101 00863, 01176, 01225, 01406, Logik 01284 Preisner 00262, 01101, 01113, 01366 Nevir 01659 Fortec Star 01083 Humax 01427, 01675, 01743, 01790, Logix 01075 Premier 00723, 00853, 00873, 01429 01915 Next Level 00869 00455, 00497, 00795, 00879, Lorenzen 00299 Prima 00795 Foxtel 01162, 01176, 01356 Huth 01075 Nikko 00200, 00713, 00723 Luxor 00345, 00873 Primacom 01111 Fracapro Planet 00871 Hyundai 01075, 01159 Noda Electronic 01704 M Electronic 00818 Primestar 00869 Fracarro 00125, 00871 I iCan 01367 M 00455, 00723, 00751, 00853, M vision 01557 Nokia 00873, 01023, 01223, 01723 Profile 00710 France Telecom 00871 ID Digital 01176 Magnavox 00724, 00722 Nordmende 00455, 01611 Promax 00455 Freesat 00882 ILLUSION sat 01557, 01631 Manata 00710, 00713 OctalTV 01505 Proscan 00392, 00566 FTE 00863 iLo 01535 O Manhattan 00455, 00710, 01083 Okano 00442 Proton 01535 FTEmaximal 00713, 00863 Imperial 01334, 01429, 01672 Marantz 00200 Omega 00887 Q QNS 01367, 01402, 01404 00173, 00262, 00299, 00394, Indovision 00887 Fuba Opentel 01232, 01412 Quadral 00710 01214, 01251, 01801 Ingelen 00882 Maspro 00173, 00713, 01530 Fugionkyo 00125 Master’s 00394 00394, 00713, 01043, 01283, Quelle 00299 Innova 00099 Optex 01611 Funai 01377 Matsui 00173, 00710, 01284, 01743 R Radiola 00200 Interstar 01214 Optimus 00724 00853, 00863, 01101, 01111, Maximum 01075, 01334, 01685 RadioShack 00566, 00775, 00869 G Galaxis 01557 InVideo 00871 Optus 00879 McIntosh 00869 Radix 00394, 00882, 01113, 01317 Gardiner 00818 ISkyB 00887 Orbis 01232, 01334, 01412 00392, 00566, 01142, 00775, MDS 01225 Garnet 01075 Italtel 00871 Orbitech 01099, 01100 RCA 00855, 00143, 01291, 01392, Mediabox 00853 01442 GbSAT 01214 ITT Nokia 00455, 00723, 00873 Origo 00497 Mediacom 01206 Rebox 01214 GE 00392, 00566 J Jadeworld 00642 OSAT 00345 MediaSa 00853 Regal 01251 Gecco 01412 Jaeger 01334 P/Sat 01232 00299, 00713, 01043, 01075, P RFT 00200 General Instrument 00869 Jerrold 00869 Medion 01232, 01334, 01412, 01626 00200, 00329, 00455, 00497, 00795, 00847, 00853, 00887, Roadstar 00713, 00853 General Satellite 01176 Jiuzhou 01450 Medison 00713 Pace 01175, 01323, 01356, 01423, Rollmaster 01413 GF Good Friends 01043 JOK 00710 Mega 00200 01693, 01717, 01848, 01850 Rover 00713 GF Star 01043 JVC 00775, 01507, 01531, 01775 Memorex 00724 Pacific 01284, 01375 Rownsonic 01567 01251, 01334, 01412, 01429, K K-SAT 00713 00713, 00818, 01283, 01334, Packard Bell 01111 Globo Metronic SAB 01251 01626 Kamm 00713 01375, 01704 Packsat 00710 S GOD Digital 00200 Metz 00173 Saba 00710, 00820 Kaon 01300 Palcom 00299, 01409 GOI 00775, 01775 MiCO 01811 Sabre 00455 KaTelco 01111 Panarex 01159 Gold Box 00853 Micro 00713 00820, 01114, 01253, 01307, 00123, 00173, 00200, 00249, Panasat 00615, 00879, 01333, 01433 Sagem 01690 Gold Vision 01631 00394, 00442, 00480, 00504, Micro Elektronic 00713 00247, 00701, 00455, 00847, Kathrein 00658, 00713, 00818, 01221, 01377, 01142, 01276, 01108, Golden Interstar 01283 Micro Technology 00713 Panasonic 01304, 01404, 01508, 01526, 01109, 00853, 00863, 01206, 01416, 01561, 01567 01527 Samsung GoldStar 00394 Micromaxx 00299 01442, 01458, 01570, 01609, Kennex 00125 Panda 00173, 00455 01700, 01916 Goodmans 00455, 01284, 01291 Microstar 01075 Kenwood 00853 Pansat 01159 Sat Control 01300 Gradiente 00887 Microtec 00713 Klap 00710 Patriot 00710 Sat Team 00713 Granada 00455 Mitsubishi 00749, 00455 Kocmoc TB 01333 Paysat 00724 SAT+ 01409 00173, 00345, 00847, 00853, Morgan’s 00200, 00713, 01232, 01412 Grundig 00879, 01291 Koscom 01043 peeKTon 01457 Satec 00713 Motorola 00869, 00856, 01473 H Handan 01622 Kosmos 00442, 01333 Satelco 01232 MTEC 01214 Hanseatic 01099, 01100 Kreiling 00249, 00658 Satplus 01100 Muller 01695

PRESET CODE  Satstation 01083 T Tantec 00455 V Variosat 00173 01377, 00392, 00639, 01142, SKY Italia 01848 DirecTV 01076, 00099, 01392, 01442, Schaub Lorenz 01214 Tarbs 01225 Ventana 00200 01640 Sky XL 01412 Schneider 00710, 01206, 01251 Tatung 00455 Vestel 01251 Dish Network System 01505, 00775 Skymaster 01075 00394, 00504, 00863, 01075, TBoston 01659 VH Sat 00299 Dishpro 01505, 00775 Skyplus 01412 Schwaiger 01083, 01111, 01317, 01334, 01412, 01457 Teac 01225, 01227, 01251, 01322 Viasat 01682 DMT 01075 Sony 00639, 01640 SCS 00299 Tecatel 01200 ViewSat 01232 Dream Multimedia 01237 Star Choice 00869 Sedea Electronique 00125, 01206, 01283, 01626 00262, 00455, 00863, 01099, Visionic 00125, 01283 Echostar 01505, 00775, 00610 Strong 01300 TechniSat 01100, 01195, 01197, 01322 E VisionNet 01557 Sunny 01300 SEG 01075, 01087, 01251, 01626 Technomate 01283, 01610 Expressvu 00775 Seleco 00871 00142, 00710, 00713, 01413, Foxtel 01356 T TechniSat 01195, 01197 Technosonic 01672 Visiosat 01457, 01718 F Thomson 01175, 01534, 01662 Septimo 01375 Technotrend 01429 Viva 00856 G GbSAT 01214 Topfield 01206, 01545, 01783 Serd 01412 Techwood 01284, 01626 Vivid 01162 Gecco 01412 TPS 01253, 01307 Serino 00610 Tele System Voom 00869 Globo 01412 Electronic 01251, 01409, 01611, 01801 Xtreme 01300 Servimat 01611 VTech 00818 H HDT 01159 X Teleciel 01043 Zehnder 01075, 01412 ServiSat 00713, 01251 Wavelength 01232, 01413 Hirschmann 01412 Z TeleClub 01367 W Sharp 01517 Wewa 00455 Homecast 01680 b3 Siemens 00173, 01334, 01429 Telefunken 00710 Hughes Network Hughes Network Wharfedale 01284 Systems 01142, 01442 20739 Silva 00299 Teleka 00262, 00442 H Systems Winbox 01801 Humax 01176, 01427, 01675 Skantin 00713 Telestar 01099, 01100, 01251, 01334, P Philips 20739 01610, 01626 Wintel 00299 Huth 01075 SKR 00713 S Samsung 20739 Telesystem 01801 Wisi 00173, 00299, 00455 Hyundai 01075, 01159 00856, 00099, 00847, 00887, Televes 00455, 01214, 01300, 01334 00123, 00710, 01214, 01251, Kaon 01300 SKY 01014, 01175, 01662, 01693, Worldsat 01543 K 01847, 01848, 01850 Televisa 00887 Television X Xcom 00123 Kathrein 00249, 00658, 01221, 01561 SKY Italia 00853, 01693, 01847, 01848 Telewire 01232 888 10264 XMS 01075 L LG 01075 1 Sky Television 01014 Tevion 00713, 01409, 01622, 01672 M Maximum 01334 A A-Mark 10047, 10054, 10009 Xsat 00123, 00713, 00847, 01214, Sky XL 01251, 01412 00392, 00566, 00455, 00710, 01323 Mediacom 01206 10037, 10352, 10374, 10455, 00713, 00820, 00847, 00853, A.R. Systems 10556 Sky+ 01175 Thomson Xtreme 01300 Medion 01412 01046, 01175, 01291, 01534, Accent 10009, 10037 Skymaster 00713, 01075, 01085, 01200, 01543, 01662 Y Yakumo 01413 01334, 01409, 01567, 01611 Microstar 01075 Accuscan 10047 Thorn 00455 Yamada 01718 Skymax 00200 Morgan’s 01412 Accuscreen 10001 Tiny 01672 Yes 00887 Skyplus 01232, 01334, 01412 Motorola 00869 Tioko 00394 00394, 00504, 00818, 01075, Acoustic Research 11269 SkySat 00713 MTEC 01214 Tivo 01142, 01442 Z Zehnder 01232, 01251, 01334, 01412, Action 10030, 10650 Skyvision 01334 01413 Multichoice 01333, 01559, 01560 Tokai 00200 Acura 10009 SL 00299, 01672 Zenith 00856, 01856 MySky 01693, 01848, 01850 Tonna 00455, 00713, 01611 Addison 10092, 10108, 10653 SM Electronic 00713, 01200, 01409 Zeta Technology 00200 N NEOTION 01334 Topfield 01206, 01208, 01545, 01783 ADL 11217 00713, 00882, 01101, 01113, Zodiac 01801 Nokia 01023 10047, 10054, 10017, 10051, Smart 01232, 01404, 01413 00749, 01749, 00790, 00819, Toshiba 00455, 01285, 01501, 01516, O Opentel 01412 Admiral 10093, 10463, 10180, 10163, 00639, 01639, 00455, 00847, 10264, 10418 Sony 01530 Orbis 01412 00853, 01524, 01558, 01640 Satellite Receiver/ 10761, 10783, 10815, 10817, Star 00887 TPS 00820, 01253, 01307 P Pace 01175, 01356, 01423, 01850 Advent 10842, 10876, 11933 00200, 00713, 00853, 01113, PVR Combination b1, b3 Panasonic 01304 Adventuri 10000 Star Choice 00869 Triax 01227, 01251, 01291, 01296, Star Trak 00772, 00869 01626 b1 Philips 01142, 00099, 01442 Adyson 10217 Starland 00713 Trio 01075 A @sat 01300 Pilotime 01339 AEG 11163, 11556 Starlite 00200 TT-micro 01429 Allvision 01412 Proscan 00392 Agashi 10217, 10264 Stream 01847, 01848 Turnsat 00713 Amstrad 01175 R Radix 01317 Agna 10150 00125, 00713, 00820, 00853, Twinner 00713, 01611 Atsat 01300 RCA 01392 10092, 10009, 10035, 10037, Aiko 10217, 10264, 10361, 10371, Strong 00879, 01159, 01284, 01300, UEC 00879, 01162, 01333, 01356 B B@ytronic 01412 Rebox 01214 01409, 01626 U 10433 UltimateTV 01392, 01640 British Sky Sagem 01253, 01307 Sunkai 00123 Broadcasting 01175 S Aim 10706, 10037, 10455, 10805 Uniden 00724, 00722 Sunny 01300 BskyB 01175, 01662 Samsung 01206, 01442, 01570, 01609 Aiwa 10264, 10701, 11904, 11911 Unisat 00200 Sunsat 00713 Bush 01645 Sat Control 01300 10000, 10060, 10812, 10702, United 01251 Schneider 01206 10178, 10030, 10145, 10602, Sunstar 00642 C Canal Satellite 01339 10606, 10631, 10648, 10672, 00173, 00299, 01087, 01099, Schwaiger 01075, 01412 10714, 10715, 11207, 11537, Supernova 00887 Universum 01251 Comag 01412 Sedea Electronique 01206 Akai 11675, 11676, 11903, 10556, SVA 01455 US Digital 01535 D Digifusion 01645 10548, 10480, 10433, 10371, Serd 01412 Systec 01334 USDTV 01535 DigiQuest 01300 10361, 10264, 10218, 10217, SKY 01175, 01693, 01848, 01850 10208, 10163, 10037, 10035, Digiturk 01076 10009  PRESET CODE Akashi 10009, 10860 Atori 10009 Blackway 10218 10156, 10765, 10009, 10264, 10154, 10451, 10180, 10178, 10508, 10767, 10783, 10817, 10030, 10092, 11661, 10634, Akiba 10037, 10218, 10455 Auchan 10163 10036, 10170, 10195, 10200, Changhong Blaupunkt 10327, 10455 10819, 10820, 10821, 11008, 10661, 10672, 10700, 10860, Akira 10418 Audinac 10180 11156 10865, 10876, 10880, 11755, 10037, 10218, 10455, 10487, Daewoo Akito 10037 10009, 10037, 10109, 10217, Chengdu 10009, 10817 11756, 11909, 10623, 10556, Blue Sky 10499, 10556, 10668, 10714, 10499, 10374, 10264, 10218, 10171, 10009, 10037, 10163, Audiosonic 10218, 10264, 10370, 10374, 10715, 11037, 11191, 11363 Ching Tai 10092, 10009 10486, 10714, 10715, 10820 10217, 10170, 10109, 10108, Akura 10218, 10264, 10668, 10714, Boots 10009, 10217 10000, 10180, 10092, 10009, 10037, 10036, 10009 11037, 11498, 11556, 11982 Audioton 10217, 10264, 10370, 10486 Chun Yun BPL 10037, 10208 10700, 10843 Dainichi 10218 Alaron 10170 10451, 10180, 10092, 10623, Bradford 10180 Chunfeng 10009, 10264 10009, 10035, 10036, 10037, 10009, 10036, 10037, 10073, Audiovox 10802, 10875, 11937, 11951, Dansai 11952 Chung Hsin 10180, 10053, 10036, 10108 10208, 10217 10163, 10218, 10352, 10370, Brandt 10109, 10287, 10335, 10560, Alba 10371, 10418, 10443, 10487, Audioworld 10698 10625, 10714 Chunsun 10009, 10817 Dantax 10370, 10486, 10714, 10715 10668, 10714, 11037 Aumark 10060 Brinkmann 10037, 10418, 10486, 10668 Cimline 10009, 10218 Datsura 10208 Albatron 10700, 10843 Autovox 10217 Brionvega 10037, 10362 Cinema 10672 Dawa 10009, 10037 Alfide 10672 Aventura 10171 Britannia 10217 Cineral 10451, 10092 Daytek 10672, 11207 All-Tel 10865, 11269 AVP 10000 Brockwood 10178, 10030 Cinex 10648, 11556 Dayton 10092, 10009, 11207 Alleron 10030, 10170 10451, 10009, 10011, 10036, 10236, 10463, 10180, 11911, Citek 10047 Daytron 10180, 10178, 10030, 10092, Broksonic 11938 10009, 10036, 10037, 10374 Allorgan 10217 Awa 10108, 10217, 10264, 10374, 10054, 10000, 10451, 10463, 10606 Brother 10264 Dayu 10374, 10661 Allstar 10037 Citizen 10180, 10060, 10030, 10171, Axion 11937, 11958 BSR 10163 10092, 10001, 10035 De Graaf 10163, 10208, 10548 Ambassador 10150 Axxent 10009 BTC 10218 City 10009 Decca 10037, 10217 America Action 10180 B Baier 10876 11900, 11556, 11037, 10778, Clarion 10180 Degraff 10163, 10208 American High 10000, 10060 10714, 10698, 10668, 10661, Baihe 10009, 10264 Clarivox 10037, 10070, 10418 Deitron 10374 Amplivision 10217, 10370 10614, 10556, 10487, 10374, Baile 10001, 10009, 10374, 10661 Bush Classic 10030, 10092, 10499 10000, 10171, 10009, 10011, 10371, 10361, 10335, 10264, Dell 11080, 11178 10037, 10163, 10218, 10264, 10037, 10073, 10109, 10208, 10218, 10217, 10208, 10163, 10009, 10037, 10217, 10218, Denko 10264 Amstrad Baird 10217, 10343, 11196 10037, 10036, 10009 Clatronic 10264, 10370, 10371, 10714 10362, 10371, 10433, 10648, Denon 10145, 10511 11037, 11982 Bang & Olufsen 10565 C Caihong 10009, 10817 Clayton 11037 Denver 10037, 10587 Amtron 10000, 10180 Baohuashi 10264 Cailing 10748 CMS Hightec 10217 10250, 10180, 10009, 10037, Candle 10030 Desmet 10009, 10037 Anam Baosheng 10009, 10817 Colortyme 10047, 10054, 10017, 10060, 10700, 10861 10178, 10030 Diamant 10037 Barco 10163, 10556 Canton 10218 Anam National 10250, 10037, 10650 10017, 10178, 10030, 10092, Commercial Solutions 11447, 10047 10706, 10009, 10371, 10672, 10009, 10037, 10163, 10217, Capehart Diamond 10698, 10820, 10860 Andersson 11149, 11163 Basic Line 10218, 10374, 10455, 10556, 10036 Concorde 10009 10668, 11037, 11163 Capetronic 10030 Digatron 10037 Anglo 10009, 10264 Condor 10009, 10037, 10264, 10370, Anhua 10051 Bastide 10217 Capsonic 10264 10418 Digiline 10037, 10668 Conia 10820, 10821, 11498 Anitech 10009, 10037, 10264 Bauer 10805 Carad 10610, 10668, 11037 Digital Life 10872 10037, 10195, 10361, 10455, Conic 10178 10009, 10037, 10163, 10370, Baur Carena 10037, 10455 Digitex 10820 Ansonic 10374, 10668 10512 Conrac 10808 Carnivale 10030 Digitor 10037 10451, 10093, 10180, 10060, Baysonic 10180 Conrowa 10156, 10145, 10009, 10264, Digix Media 10880 AOC 10178, 10030, 10092, 10009, Bazin 10217 Carrefour 10036, 10037, 10070 10698, 11156, 11170 10108 Dixi 10009, 10037, 10217 Beaumark 10017, 10178, 10030 Carver 10054, 10170 Contec 10180, 10009, 10036, 10037 Aolinpike 10264 DL 10587, 10780, 10872 10812, 10001, 10009, 10208, Cascade 10009, 10037 Continental Edison 10109, 10287, 10487 10156, 10748, 10879, 10765, Domeos 10668 Apex Digital Beijing 10226, 10264, 10374, 10661, Casio 10037 Cosmel 10009, 10037 10767, 11217, 11943 10817, 10821 Cathay 10037, 10218 Domland 10394 AR 10352, 10556 10037, 10195, 10370, 10418, Craig 10180, 10171 Dongda 10009 Arc En Ciel 10109 Beko 10486, 10606, 10714, 10715, CCE 10037, 10217 Crosley 10054, 10000, 10180, 10030, 10808, 11037 10171, 10074, 10163, 10370 Donghai 10009 Arcam 10217 Celebrity 10000 Belcor 10030 10093, 10180, 10053, 10009, Dream Vision 11164, 11704 Ardem 10037, 10714 Celera 10765 10037, 10208, 10370, 10418, Bell & Howell 10054, 10017, 10154, 10093 Crown DSE 10698, 10820, 11556 Aristocrat 10163 Celestial 10767, 10819, 10820, 10821 10486, 10487, 10606, 10672, Belson 10698, 11191 10712, 10714, 10715, 11037 DTS 10009 Aristona 10037, 10556 Centrex 10780 Belstar 11037 Crown Mustang 10672 10037, 10217, 10343, 10352, ART 11037 Centrum 11037 Dual BenQ 11032, 11756 CS Electronics 10218 10394, 11037, 11137 Arthur Martin 10163 Centurion 10037 Dual Tec 10217 Beon 10037, 10163, 10218, 10418 CTX 11756 ASA 10070 CGE 10074, 10163, 10370, 10418 10047, 10054, 10154, 10000, 10017, 10180, 10178, 10070, Berthen 10668 Dumont 10217 Asberg 10037 Changcheng 10051, 10001, 10009, 10264, 10051, 10451, 10093, 10180, Best 10370 10374, 10661, 10817 Curtis Mathes 10060, 10702, 10178, 10030, 10463, 10180, 10178, 10171, Asora 10009 Durabrand 11034, 11463 Bestar 10037, 10370, 10374 Changfei 10009, 10374, 10817 10145, 10166, 10037, 10035, Astra 10037 11147, 11347 Dux 10037 Bestar-Daewoo 10374 Changfeng 10264, 10817 Asuka 10217, 10218, 10264 CXC 10180 Dwin 10093 Binatone 10217 Changhai 10009, 10817 ATD 10698 Cybertron 10218 Dynatech 10217 10614, 10820, 10821, 11037, Atlantic 10001, 10037 Black Diamond 11163, 11909 Cytronix 11298 Dynatron 10037 D D-Vision 10037, 10556, 11982 PRESET CODE  E Easy Living 11248 10037, 10070, 10163, 10217, Gooding 10487 Hema 10009, 10217 Ima 10236, 10180, 10178 Finlux 10346, 10480, 10556, 10631, Eaton 10060 10000, 11909, 11900, 11163, Hewlett Packard 11494, 11502 Imperial 10037, 10074, 10370, 10418 10714, 10715, 10808, 11556 11037, 10880, 10808, 10714, Ecco 10773 Firstar 10236, 10009 Hifivox 10109 10001, 10009, 10264, 10374, 10668, 10661, 10634, 10625, Imperial Crown 10661 ECE 10037 10009, 10037, 10208, 10217, 10587, 10560, 10556, 10499, Highline 10037, 10264 Goodmans 10487, 10480, 10374, 10371, Indiana 10037 Edison-Minerva 10487 Firstline 10361, 10374, 10556, 10668, Hikona 10218 10714, 10808, 11037, 11191, 10343, 10335, 10264, 10218, Infinity 10054 10037, 10217, 10218, 10362, 11363, 11371 10217, 10037, 10036, 10035, Hikone 10218 Elbe 10610 InFocus 11164 10047, 10054, 10154, 10000, 10011, 10009 10009, 10036, 10037, 10163, Elcit 10163 Fisher 10036, 10208, 10217, 10361, Gorenje 10370 Hinari 10208, 10218, 10264, 10352, Ingelen 10163, 10487, 10610, 10714 10443 Electroband 10000 10370 GPM 10218 Ingersol 10009 10037, 10218, 10264, 10455, Hisawa 10218, 10455, 10610, 10714 Electrograph 11755 Flint 10610 Gradiente 10053, 10037, 10170 Inno Hit 10009, 10217, 10218, 11163 10154, 10000, 10463, 10150, 10156, 10748, 10145, 10009, Electrohome Force 11149 10163, 10361, 10371, 10487, 10208, 10508, 10556, 10780, Innova 10037 10178, 10030, 10073 Graetz 10714, 11163 Hisense Formenti 10037, 10163 10821, 10860, 11022, 11156, Innowert 10865, 11298 Elekta 10009, 10264 Gran Prix 10648 11170, 11208, 11363 Inotech 10773, 10820 Elfunk 11037, 11208 Fortress 10093 10036, 10037, 10108, 10163, 10047, 10054, 10017, 10000, Insignia 10171, 11517 ELG 10037 Fraba 10037, 10370 Granada 10208, 10217, 10226, 10343, 11256, 10156, 10051, 10150, 10009, 10037, 10370, 10499, 10548, 10560 10178, 10030, 11145, 10145, Inteq 10017, 10145 Elin 10009, 10037, 10361, 10548 Friac 10610 10009, 10037, 10163, 10218, 10092, 10744, 10877, 10634, 11037, 11137, 11149, 11156, Interbuy 10009, 10037, 10264 Elite 10037, 10218 Frontech 10009, 10163, 10217, 10264 Grandin 10374, 10455, 10610, 10668, Hitachi 10714, 10715, 10865, 10880, 11170, 11225, 11576, 11904, Interfunk 10037, 10109, 10163, 10200, Elta 10009, 10264 Fujimaro 10865, 11498 11037, 11191 11960, 10578, 10548, 10508, 10327, 10361, 10512 10499, 10481, 10480, 10343, Emerald 10178 10009, 10217, 10352, 10683, Gronic 10217 Internal 10037, 11909 Fujitsu 10809, 10853 10217, 10163, 10109, 10108, 10047, 10017, 10154, 10451, 10706, 10009, 10036, 10037, 10037, 10036, 10035, 10009 10009, 10037, 10217, 10218, 10236, 10463, 10180, 10150, Fujitsu General 10009, 10217, 10683 10070, 10163, 10195, 10443, Intervision 10264, 10394, 10455, 10486, 10178, 10171, 11944, 11911, Grundig Hitachi Fujian 10150, 10108, 10860 10487 Fujitsu Siemens 10808, 10809, 11163, 11298 10487, 10556, 10587, 10672, Emerson 11909, 10714, 10668, 10623, 10683, 11371 Hitec 10698 Irradio 10009, 10037, 10218, 10371 10486, 10036, 10371, 10370, Funai 10000, 10180, 10171, 10264, 10361, 10037, 10195, 10170, 10668, 11271, 11904 Grundy 10180, 10195 Hitsu 10009, 10218, 10455, 10610 Isukai 10037, 10218, 10455 10070, 10073 Furi 10145, 10264, 10817 Grunkel 11163 Hoeher 10714, 10865, 11163, 11556 ITC 10217 Envision 10030, 10813 Furichi 10860 Grunpy 10180 Home Electronics 10606 ITS 10037, 10218, 10264, 10371 Enzer 10860 Futronic 10264, 10860 H H & B 10808 Hongmei 10093, 10009, 10264, 10817 10163, 10208, 10346, 10361, ITT 10480, 10548, 10610 Erae 11371 Futuretech 10180 Haaz 10706 Hongyan 10264, 10817 10070, 10163, 10195, 10208, Erres 10037 Galaxi 10037 11034, 10037, 10508, 10587, Hornyphon 10037 ITT Nokia 10346, 10361, 10480, 10548, G Haier 10698, 11017 ESA 10812, 10171, 11944 Galaxis 10037, 10370 Hoshai 10218, 10455 10606, 10610 Haihong 10009 ITV 10037, 10264, 10374 ESC 10037, 10217 Ganxin 10817 HP 11494, 11502 Haiyan 10264, 10817 IX 10877 Ether 10030, 10009 Gateway 11755, 11756 Hua Tun 10009 Halifax 10217, 10264 JBL 10054 Etron 10001, 10009, 10163, 10820 GBC 10009, 10163, 10218, 10374 Huafa 10145, 10009 J Hallmark 10236, 10180, 10178 Eurofeel 10217, 10264 11447, 10047, 11454, 10000, Huanghaimei 10009 JCB 10000 10051, 10451, 10093, 10180, Hampton 10217 Euroman 10037, 10217, 10264, 10370 Huanghe 10009, 10817 JDV 11982 GE 10060, 10178, 10030, 10092, Hanimex 10218 10156, 10051, 10236, 10092, Europa 10037 11922, 11917, 11347, 11147, Huanglong 10009 Jean Hankook 10180, 10178, 10030 10009, 10036 Europhon 10037, 10109, 10217 10625, 10560, 10335, 10035 10009, 10037, 10217, 10361, Huangshan 10009, 10264, 10817 JEC 10035 Evesham Technology 11248 GEC 10037, 10163, 10217, 10361 Hanseatic 10370, 10394, 10499, 10556, Huanyu 10217, 10264, 10374, 10817 Jensen 10761, 10815, 10817, 11933 Evolution 11756 Geloso 10009, 10163, 10374 10634, 10661, 10714, 10808 Huaqiang 10264 Jiahua 10051 Expert 10163 Gemini 10047 Hantarex 10009, 10037, 10865 Huari 10145, 10264 JiaLiCai 10009, 10264 Exquisit 10037 General 10109, 10287 Hantor 10037 Hugoson 11217 JIL 10030 Feilang 10009 General Technic 10009 10000, 10180, 10060, 10178, F Harley Davidson 10030, 11904 Huodateji 10051 Jinfeng 10051, 10208, 10226, 10817 Feilu 10009, 10817 Genesis 10009, 10037 Harman/Kardon 10054 Hygashi 10217 Jinque 10009, 10264, 10817 Feiyan 10264 Genexxa 10009, 10037, 10163, 10218 Harsper 10865 Hyper 10009, 10217 Jinta 10009, 10264 Feiyue 10009, 10817 10808, 10865, 10880, 11217, Gericom 11298 Harvard 10180 Hypersonic 10361 10054, 10156, 10145, 10009, Fenner 10009, 10374 Gevalt 11371 Harwa 10773, 11196, 11269 10037, 10217, 10264, 10455, Jinxing 10037, 10264, 10556, 10698, 10817, 10821, 11011 Fer0 10335 Hypson 10486, 10556, 10668, 10714, Giant 10009, 10217 Harwood 10009, 10037, 10487 10715, 11037 JMB 10443, 10499, 10556, 10634 10053, 10037, 10073, 10109, Gibralter 10017, 10000, 10030 Hauppauge 10037 10849, 10860, 10865, 10876, JNC 10876 10195, 10287, 10335, 10343, Hyundai 11556 Ferguson 10443, 10548, 10560, 10625, Go Video 10060, 10886 Havermy 10093 Iberia 10037 Jocel 10712 11037 Go Vision 11937 10009, 10037, 10217, 10218, I 10171, 10037, 10163, 10217, HCM 10264, 10418 10037, 10217, 10218, 10264, Johnson 10455 Fidelity Goldfunk 10668 ICE 10264, 10361, 10371, 10512 Heathkit 10017 10371 Jubilee 10556 Filsai 10217 10047, 10054, 10154, 10178, ICeS 10218 10030, 10715, 10714, 10606, Helios 10865 Juhua 10264, 10817 10163, 10208, 10346, 10361, Iiyama 10877, 11217 Finlandia GoldStar 10455, 10361, 10217, 10163, Hello Kitty 10451 Jutan 10030 10548 10109, 10073, 10037, 10036, 10009, 10001  PRESET CODE 10054, 10093, 10463, 10053, Kyoshu 10418 10047, 11454, 10054, 10154, Minato 10037, 10556 Nishi 10030 10030, 10070, 10036, 10218, 10000, 10250, 10051, 10180, Kyoto 10163, 10217 Minerva 10070, 10108, 10195, 10487 Nobliko 10070 JVC 10371, 10418, 10508, 10606, Magnavox 10060, 10030, 10171, 10092, 10650, 10653, 10683, 10731, L L&S Electronic 10714, 10808, 10865 10706, 11944, 11904, 11755, Minoka 10037 Nogamatic 10109 11253, 11923 Lark 10154 11254, 10802, 10780, 10011, Mirror 11900 10163, 10208, 10346, 10361, 10035, 10037, 10036 K Kaige 10009, 10264, 10817 10154, 10250, 10093, 10236, Nokia 10374, 10480, 10548, 10606, LaSAT 10486 Magnum 10037, 10648, 10714, 10715 10610, 10631 Kaisui 10009, 10037, 10217, 10218, 10180, 11250, 10150, 10178, 10455 Lavis 11037 Majestic 10017 Mitsubishi 10030, 11917, 11037, 10836, Norcent 10748, 10824 Kambrook 10217 Leader 10009 Mandor 10264 10817, 10556, 10512, 10195, Nordic 10217 10108, 10037, 10036, 10011 Kamp 10017, 10180, 10217 Lecson 10037 Manesth 10035, 10037, 10217, 10264 10037, 10109, 10195, 10287, Mivar 10217 Nordmende 10343, 10560, 10714 10001, 10009, 10264, 10374, Legend 10009 10037, 10668, 10778, 10876, Kangli 10661, 10817 Manhattan Monaco 10009 Lenco 10037, 10374, 10587 11037, 11267 Normerel 10037 Kangyi 10009, 10264 11454, 10054, 10030, 10037, Monivision 10700, 10843 Novatronic 10037, 10374 Lenoir 10009 Marantz 10556, 10704, 10855 Kapsch 10163, 10361 Morgan’s 10037 NTC 10092 Lexsor 11196 10009, 10037, 10217, 10374, 10264, 10370, 10606, 10610, Mark Motorola 10054, 10051, 10093, 10150 Nu-Tec 10455, 10698, 10820 Karcher 10714, 10778, 11556 Leyco 10037, 10264 10714, 10715 Master’s 10499 10180, 10060, 10030, 10092, Nyon 10000 Kathrein 10556 10054, 11265, 10060, 10178, MTC 10011, 10370, 10512 10030, 11758, 11637, 11191, Mastro 10053, 10706, 10698, 10780 O Oceanic 10163, 10208, 10361, 10548 Kawa 10371 11178, 10856, 10715, 10714, MTlogic 10714 LG 10009, 10037, 10217, 10218, 10051, 10009, 10208, 10226, Odeon 10264 Kawasho 10030 10700, 10698, 10556, 10370, Masuda 10264, 10371 Mudan 10361, 10217, 10163, 10109, 10264, 10817 Okano 10009, 10037, 10264, 10370 KB Aristocrat 10163 11037, 10744, 10714, 10556, 10108, 10037, 10009, 10001 10037, 10486, 10668, 11037, Olevia 11144, 11240, 11331, 11610 KDS 11498 10487, 10455, 10443, 10433, Multitec 11556 Liesenk & Tter 10037 Matsui 10371, 10352, 10335, 10217, 10180, 10009, 10037, 10217, Omega 10264 KEC 10180, 10060 Liesenkotter 10037, 10327 10208, 10195, 10163, 10037, Multitech 10037, 10362, 10370, 10610, 10036, 10035, 10011, 10009 10264, 10370, 10486 Omni 10748, 10698, 10780, 10872 Kendo 10009, 10037, 10218, 10374, Murphy 10163 10648, 11037 Lifetec 10668, 10683, 10714, 11037, Matsushita 10250, 10051, 10650 Onida 10053, 11253 Kennedy 10163 11137 Maxdorf 10773 Musikland 10218 Onimax 10714 Kennex 10668, 11037 Lihua 10817 Mx Onda 11498 Maxent 11755, 11756 Onwa 10180, 10218, 10371, 10433, Kenwood 10180, 10030 10236, 10180, 10030, 10001, Myryad 10556 10602 Lloyd’s 10009, 11904 Maxim 11556, 11982 Khind 10706 10156, 10178, 10166, 10037, Opera 10037 Local India TV 10009, 10208, 10602 MCE 10009 N NAD 10361, 10866, 11156 10154, 10250, 10093, 10180, KIC 10217 Local Malaysia TV 10698 Meck 10698 Naiko 10037, 10606, 11982 Optimus 10150, 10178, 10030, 10166, Kiota 10001, 10371, 10455 10650 Lodos 11037 Mediator 10037, 10556 Nakimura 10037, 10374 Kioto 10706, 10556 Optoma 10887 10037, 10370, 10512, 10633, 10037, 10512, 10556, 10668, Nanbao 10009, 10264 Kiton 10037, 10668 Loewe 10790 Medion 10698, 10714, 10808, 10880, Optonica 10093 11037, 11137, 11248, 11900 Nansheng 10264, 10817 10156, 10180, 10765, 10767, 10236, 10180, 10060, 10001, Orbit 10037 KLH Logik 10009, 10011, 10371, 10698, Megapower 10700 Narita 11982 11962 Orcom 11504 KLL 10037 10773, 10880, 11037, 11217 Megas 10610 NAT 10226 Logix 10668 10017, 10236, 10463, 10180, Megatron 10047, 10178, 10145, 10009 Kloss 10030 National 10051, 10208, 10226, 10508 Orion 10178, 11463, 10011, 10037, 10037, 10362, 10370, 10374, Longjiang 10264, 10817 MEI 11037 10047, 10154, 10156, 10051, 10264, 10443, 10556, 10714, Kneissel 10499, 10556, 10610 10053, 10178, 10030, 11704, 10880, 11196, 11911 Luker 11982 Meile 10264, 10817 10180, 10150, 10053, 10036, 11270, 11170, 10817, 10704, Orline 10037, 10218 Kolin Luma 10009, 10163, 10362, 10374, 10154, 10250, 10463, 10180, NEC 10108, 11331 11037 10661, 10653, 10508, 10499, Ormond 10668, 11037 10150, 10060, 10178, 10030, 10455, 10374, 10264, 10217, Kolster 10037, 10218 10037, 10073, 10163, 10217, Memorex 10009, 10035, 10037, 10195, 10037, 10217, 10218, 10264, Lumatron 10264, 10361, 10556 10170, 10036, 10011, 10009 Osaki Kongque 10009, 10264, 10817 10877, 11037, 11911 10037, 10200, 10327, 10370, 10374, 10556 Lux May 10009, 10037 Neckermann Konichi 10009 Memphis 10009 10418, 10556 Osio 10037 10163, 10208, 10217, 10346, Mercury 10060, 10001, 10009, 10037 NEI 10037, 10163, 10371 Oso 10218 Konig 10037 Luxor 10361, 10480, 10548, 10631, 10180, 10037, 10218, 10371, 11037, 11163 Mermaid 10037 Neovia 10865, 10876, 11371 Osume 10036, 10037, 10218 Konka 10418, 10587, 10641, 10714, 10047, 10054, 10017, 10154, Metronic 10625 Netsat 10037 Otic 11498 10817, 11084 10000, 10156, 10051, 10093, 10037, 10195, 10367, 10388, NetTV 11755 10093, 10036, 10037, 10109, Kontakt 10487 LXI 10060, 10053, 10178, 10030, Metz 10447, 10587, 10668, 10746, 10009, 10037, 10218, 10556, Otto Versand 10195, 10217, 10226, 10343, 10171, 10166, 10037, 10036, Neufunk 10361, 10512, 10556 Korpel 10037 10035, 10001, 10208 11163 10610, 10714 Korting 10370 10009, 10037, 10109, 10163, MGA 10150, 10178, 10030, 10218, 10009, 10037, 10217, 10343, P Pace 10092 10374 New Tech 10556 10037, 10443, 10556, 10714, Kosmos 10037 M Electronic 10195, 10217, 10287, 10343, Pacific M 10346, 10374, 10480, 10512, MGN Technology 10178 New World 10218 11037, 11137 Koyoda 10009 10634, 10661, 10714 10037, 10163, 10200, 10217, Micro Genius 10150 Newave 10093, 10178, 10092, 10009 Kreisen 10876 Madison 10037 Palladium 10327, 10370, 10418, 10556, 10037, 10668, 10714, 10808, 10009, 10035, 10036, 10037, 10714, 11137 Micromaxx 11037 Nikkai KTV 10463, 10180, 10030, 10217 MAG 11498 10163, 10217, 10218, 10264 10001, 10037, 10217, 10218, Kuaile 10009, 10264 Magnadyne 10054, 10163 Microstar 10808 Nikkei 10714 Palsonic 10264, 10418, 10698, 10773, 10778, 11196, 11269, 11904 Kulun 10009 Magnafon 10073 MicroTEK 10820, 10860 Nikko 10178, 10030, 10092 10051, 10208, 10226, 10264, Midland 10047, 10017, 10051 Panama 10009, 10037, 10217, 10264 Kunlun Magnasonic 10054, 10000, 10156, 10093, Nikkodo 10178, 10030, 10092 10374, 10661, 10817 10030, 10092, 10109 Mikomi 11037, 11149 Panashiba 10001

PRESET CODE  10054, 10000, 10156, 10250, Profex 10009, 10163, 10361 10250, 10093, 10145, 10171, SBR 10037, 10556 Simpson 10178, 10030, 10011 10051, 10236, 10030, 11947, Remotec 10037 Profi 10009 Sceptre 11217 10060, 10092, 10009, 10037, 11946, 11941, 11480, 11310, Reoc 10714 Singer 10335, 10371, 10433, 11537 Panasonic 11291, 11271, 10853, 10650, Profilo 11556 10361, 10374, 10486, 10548, Revox 10037 Schaub Lorenz 10606, 10714, 11191 Sinotec 10773 10548, 10508, 10367, 10361, Profitronic 10037 10226, 10208, 10163, 10108, Rex 10163, 10264 11982, 11904, 11137, 11037, Sinudyne 10037, 10163, 10361 10037, 10035 10037, 10073, 10625, 10634, 10714, 10668, 10648, 10556, Proline 11037 RFT 10037, 10264 Skantic 10163 Panavision 10037 Schneider 10394, 10371, 10361, 10352, Proscan 11447, 10047, 11347, 11922 Rinex 10773 10343, 10218, 10217, 10163, SKY 10037, 10880, 11504 10051, 10706, 10009, 10208, 10070, 10037 Panda 10226, 10264, 10508, 10698, Prosco 10156 10009, 10037, 10218, 10264, Sky Brazil 10880 10780, 10817, 10821 10037, 10217, 10370, 10371, Roadstar 10418, 10668, 10714, 11037, Scotch 10178 Prosonic 11900 Sky-North 10037 Pathe Cinema 10163 10374, 10668, 10714 Scotland 10163 Rolson 11371 Skygiant 10180 Pathe Marconi 10109 Protec 10009, 10037, 10217, 10264 Scott 10236, 10180, 10178, 10030 Rover 10036, 10877 Skyworth 10748, 10009, 10037, 10264, Pausa 10009 10009, 10037, 10217, 10264, 10047, 10054, 10017, 10154, 10698, 10805, 10817, 11115 Protech 10418, 10486, 10668, 11037 10748, 10009, 10037, 10264, Rowa 10000, 10156, 10051, 10093, Sliding 10865, 10880 Paxonic 10060, 10030 Proton 10178, 10030, 10001, 10009 10587, 10698, 10712, 10817 Sears 10060, 10053, 10178, 10030, PCE 10156, 10060 Royal Lux 10335, 10370 10171, 10166, 10035, 10036, SLX 10668 Proview 11498 10037, 10001, 10208, 11904 10047, 10000, 10156, 10250, Runco 10017, 10060, 10030 Smaragd 10487 ProVision 10037, 10556, 10714, 11037 Seaway 10634 Penney 10051, 10060, 10178, 10030, Ruyi 10817 Soemtron 10865, 11298 10035, 10036, 10037, 10070, Pulsar 10017, 10092 Seelver 11037 10108, 11347 10250, 10109, 10163, 10287, Solar Drape 10000 Pulser 10178, 10092 Saba 10335, 10343, 10361, 10498, 10009, 10036, 10037, 10217, Perdio 10037, 10163 S SEG 10218, 10264, 10362, 10487, Solavox 10037, 10163, 10361, 10548 Pvision 10876, 11191 10548, 10560, 10625, 10714 Perfekt 10037 10668, 11037, 11163 Sole 10813 Pye 10037, 10374, 10556 Sagem 10455, 10610, 10618 Petters 11523 SEI 10037, 10163 Sonawa 10218 Pymi 10009 Saige 10009, 10817 10054, 10451, 10463, 10180, Sei-Sinudyne 10037 Songba 10009 10051, 10208, 10226, 10264, Saisho 10009, 10011, 10163, 10217, Philco 10178, 10030, 10145, 11661, Q Qingdao 10264 10163, 10264, 10346, 10362, Soniko 10037 10037, 10074, 10163, 10370, 10817 Seleco 10371 10037, 10668, 10712, 11037, Sonitron 10208, 10217, 10370 10418 Quadral 10051, 10218 Saivod 11163, 11556, 11982 Semivox 10180 Philharmonic 10217 Quartz 10150, 10178 Sakai 10163 Semp 10156 Sonneclair 10037 11454, 10054, 10017, 10000, 10250, 10051, 10009, 10035, Sakyno 10455 Sonoko 10009, 10037, 10217, 10264 10051, 10178, 10030, 10171, Quasar 10650, 10865 Sencora 10009 Sonolor 10163, 10208, 10361, 10548 10092, 11961, 11756, 11254, 10011, 10037, 10070, 10074, Salora 10163, 10208, 10361, 10480, Sentra 10035 Philips 10690, 10556, 10512, 10374, 10548, 10631 Quelle 10109, 10195, 10200, 10327, Serino 10093, 10455, 10610 Sontec 10009, 10037, 10370 10361, 10343, 10200, 10108, 10361, 10512, 10668, 11037 Salsa 10335 10017, 10154, 11100, 10000, 10037, 10009 Shancha 10264, 10817 Questa 10036 10047, 10154, 10093, 10178, Sony 10150, 10053, 10011, 10036, Phocus 10714 10030, 10171, 10092, 10009, 10009, 10208, 10226, 10264, 10037, 10074, 10353, 10650, Questar 10036 Sampo Shanghai Phoenix 10037, 10163, 10370, 10486 10036, 10650, 10700, 11755, 10817 11505, 11651, 11751, 11904 R-Line 10037 11756 Shaofeng 10145, 10817 Sound & Vision 10218, 10374 Phonola 10037, 10556 R Rabbit 10047 10047, 10054, 10017, 10154, 10054, 10093, 10180, 10053, Soundesign 10180, 10178 10051, 10060, 10178, 10030, 10156, 10093, 10060, 10812, Pilot Radialva 10163, 10218 10030, 10009, 10036, 10200, 10706, 10011 10702, 10178, 10030, 10092, Sharp 10650, 10653, 10668, 11193, Soundwave 10037, 10418, 10715 10166, 10011, 10037, 10109, Radiola 10037, 10217, 10556 10814, 10766, 10718, 10618, 11393, 11917 Sova 11952 10163, 10170, 10287, 10361, 10587, 10817, 10821, 11060, Pioneer Radiomarelli 10037 Samsung Shen Ying 10092, 10009 10370, 10486, 10512, 10679, 11249, 11312, 11903, 11959, Sowa 10156, 10051, 10060, 10178, 10760, 10866, 11260 10047, 10154, 10180, 10150, 10556, 10371, 10370, 10362, Shencai 10145, 10009, 10264 10092, 10036, 10226 RadioShack 10178, 10030, 10037, 11904 Pionier 10370, 10486, 11556 10264, 10226, 10217, 10208, Sheng Chia 10093, 10236, 10009 Soyea 10773 10009, 10037, 10264, 10370, 10163, 10090, 10037, 10036, Spectra 10009 Plantron 10009, 10037, 10264 Radiotone 10418, 10648, 10668, 11037 10035, 10009 Shenyang 10009, 10264, 10817 Playsonic 10037, 10217, 10714, 10715 Rank 10070 Sandra 10217 Sherwood 10009 Spectravision 10156, 10178 10765, 10865, 11276, 11316, Rank Arena 10036, 10602 Sanjian 10264 Shintoshi 10037 Spectroniq 11498 Polaroid 11341, 11498, 11523 RBM 10070 Sanky 10060, 10030 10178, 10037, 10374, 10443, Squareview 10171 Poppy 10009 Shivaki 11447, 10047, 11454, 10054, 10463, 10060, 10030, 10706, 10556 SR2000 10154, 10171 Portland 10451, 10092, 10374 Show 10009, 10418 10000, 10051, 10093, 10178, Sansui 10037, 10371, 10455, 10602, Ssangyong 10009 Powerpoint 10037, 10487, 10698 10030, 10092, 11958, 11953, 10714, 10861, 11371, 11537, Siarem 10163 RCA 11948, 11922, 11917, 11547, 11904, 11911 SSS 10180 Prandoni-Prince 10361 11347, 11247, 11147, 11047, 10145, 10037, 10195, 10200, Staksonic 10009 Santon 10009 Siemens 10327 Precision 10236, 10180, 10217 10679, 10625, 10560, 10090 10009, 10037, 10217, 10218, 10047, 10054, 10154, 10000, Siera 10037, 10556 Standard Premier 10009, 10264 Realistic 10047, 10154, 10180, 10150, 10156, 10463, 10180, 10145, 10374, 11037 10178, 10030 Siesta 10370 President 10860 10171, 11755, 11208, 10704, Standard Components 10009, 10218 Recor 10037, 10418 Sanyo 10508, 10370, 10264, 10217, 10761, 10009, 10264, 10783, Signature 10047, 10093, 10030 10236, 10180, 10009, 10037, Prima Rectiligne 10037 10208, 10170, 10163, 10108, Starlite 10163, 10264 10815, 10817, 11269, 11933 10088, 10037, 10036, 10011, Silva 10037, 10361, 10648 Princeton 10700 10036, 10163, 10346, 10361, 10009 Silva Schneider 10037, 11556 Stenway 10218 Rediffusion 10548 Prinston 11037 Sanyong 10037 Stern 10163, 10264 Redstar 10037 Silvano 10587 Prinz 10361 Sanyuan 10093, 10009, 10817 Stevison 11982 Reflex 10037, 10668, 11037 Silver 10036, 10361, 10455, 10715 Strato 10009, 10037, 10264 Prism 10250, 10051 10865, 10876, 10877, 11207, Saville 10060 SilverCrest 11037 Relisys 11298  PRESET CODE Strong 11149, 11163 10054, 10250, 10051, 10226, Tiane 10093, 10817 Univox 10037, 10163 10865, 10877, 10880, 11217, Technics 10556, 10650 World-of-Vision 11298 Studio Experience 10843 Tiny 11269 V 10864, 10885, 11755, 11756 TechniSat 10556, 11267 V Worldview 10455 Stylandia 10217 TMK 10236, 10180, 10178 V2max 10865 Technisson 10714 X-View 11191 10218, 10455, 10487, 10610, TML 11756 V7 Videoseven 10880, 11217, 11755 X Sunkai 10865 Technosonic 10499, 10556 Xenius 10634, 10661 TNCi 10017 Vector Research 10030 Sunstar 10009, 10037, 10264, 10371 Technovox 10030, 10217 10009, 10264, 10698, 10773, Tobishi 10218 10037, 10217, 10668, 11037, Xiahua 10817 Sunwatt 10455 Techview 10847 Vestel 11163 Tobo 10748, 10009, 10264 Xianghai 10009 Sunwood 10037 Techwood 10250, 10051, 10060, 11163 Vexa 10009, 10037 Tocom 10156 Xiangyang 10264 Superla 10217 Tecnimagen 10556 10250, 10053, 10036, 10650, 10009, 10037, 10163, 10217, Victor 10653 Xiangyu 10009 Superscan 10093, 10864, 11944 10051, 10093, 10178, 10092, Tokai 10374, 10668, 11037 Teco 10009, 10036, 10218, 10264, Videocon 10508 Xihu 10264, 10817 Supersonic 10009, 10208, 10455, 10805 Tokaido 11037 10653, 11040 Videologic 10218 Xingfu 10009 SuperTech 10009, 10037, 10218, 10556 10009, 10208, 10217, 10418, Tokyo 10035 Tedelex Videologique 10217, 10218 Xinghai 10264 Supra 10178, 10009, 10374 10606, 10698, 11537 Tomashi 10218 Videomac 10009 XLogic 10698, 10860 Supreme 10000 Teiron 10009 Tongguang 10264 VideoSystem 10037 Xoceco 11064 Susumu 10218, 10287, 10335 Tek 10820 Tongtel 10587, 10780 10054, 10463, 10180, 10150, Videotechnic 10217, 10374 Xoro 11196, 11217 Sutron 10009 Teknika Topline 10668, 11037 10060, 10178, 10092 Videoton 10163 XR-1000 10154, 10180, 10171 SV2000 10054 Tele System 10154, 11256, 10156, 10150, Electronic 10876 11265, 10060, 11145, 10145, Vidikron 10054 Xrypton 10037 SVA 10748, 10587, 10865, 10870, 10871, 10872 Teleavia 10287, 10343 10166, 11037, 11156, 11163, Vidtech 10178, 10036 Yamaha 10030, 10650, 11576 11164, 11356, 11508, 11556, Y Svasa 10455 Telecolor 10017 Toshiba 11656, 11704, 11945, 11971, Viewpia 10876 Yamishi 10037, 10217, 10218, 10455 Swisstec 10880, 11504 10037, 10163, 10217, 10218, 10845, 10821, 10718, 10650, 10857, 10864, 10885, 11330, Yapshe 10250 Telecor 10618, 10508, 10264, 10217, Viewsonic 11578, 11627, 11755 Sydney 10217 10394 Yingge 10009 10702, 11504, 10821, 10820, 10195, 10109, 10070, 10036, Viking 10060 10047, 10054, 10154, 10000, 10035, 10011, 10009 Yokan 10037 10819, 10714, 10712, 10698, Viore 11207 Sylvania 10051, 10178, 10030, 10171, 10625, 10587, 10560, 10498, Totevision 10051 10009, 10037, 10217, 10218, 10092, 10036, 10037, 10876, Telefunken Vision 10037, 10217, 10264 Yoko 10486, 10346, 10343, 10335, Towada 10217 10264, 10370 11271, 11904, 11944 10287, 10109, 10074, 10073, Vizio 10864, 10885, 11755, 11756, Yonggu 10009 Symphonic 10000, 10180, 10178, 10171, 10037 Toyoda 10009, 10264, 10371 11758 11904, 11944 Yorx 10030, 10218 Telefusion 10037 Toyomenka 10178 Vortec 10037 Synco 10000, 10451, 10093, 10060, Youlanasi 10817 10178, 10092, 10036 Telegazi 10037, 10163, 10218, 10264 Trakton 10217, 10264 Voxson 10178, 10037, 10163, 10418 Yousida 10009 Syntax 11144, 11240, 11331 Telemeister 10037 Trans Continens 10037, 10217, 10668, 11037 10037, 10109, 10217, 10418, W Waltham Yuhang 10009 Sysline 10037 Telesonic 10037 TRANS-continents 10556, 10865 10443, 10668, 11037 10047, 10054, 10017, 10154, Z Zanussi 10163, 10217, 10264 T T+A 10447 Telestar 10009, 10037, 10556 10009, 10037, 10264, 10418, 10000, 10156, 10051, 10093, Transonic 10455, 10512, 10587, 10698, 10047, 10017, 10000, 10093, Tacico 10178, 10092, 10009 Teletech 10009, 10037, 10668, 11037 10236, 10180, 10060, 10178, 10463, 11265, 10812, 10178, 10712, 10780 Wards 10030, 10166, 11347, 11156, Tai Yi 10009 Teleton 10036, 10217 Triad 10218, 10556 Zenith 10030, 11145, 10145, 10171, 11147, 10866, 10195, 10001, 10092, 10037, 11904, 11909, Taishan 10009, 10374, 10817 Televideon 10163 Trident 10217 10037, 10035 11911 Tandberg 10109, 10361, 10367 Teleview 10037 Trio 11498 Warumaia 10374, 10661 ZhuHai 10009, 10374 Tandy 10093, 10163, 10217, 10218 Tempest 10009, 10264, 10455 10009, 10037, 10163, 10218, Tristar 10218, 10264 Watson 10394, 10668, 10714, 11037 Targa 11371 Tennessee 10037 Triumph 10037, 10346, 10556 Watt Radio 10163 10092, 10036, 10163, 10170, 10009, 10037, 10217, 10218, TV/DVD Combination b2, b4 Tashiko Tensai Truetone 10250, 10051 Waycon 10156 10217, 10650 10371, 10374, 10715, 11037 b2 10054, 10154, 10000, 10156, Tenson 10009 Tuntex 10030, 10092, 10009 Wega 10036, 10037 10051, 10060, 10037, 10036, A Advent 11933 Tera 10030, 10092 TVS 10463 Wegavox 10009 Tatung 10011, 10009, 10217, 11156, Akai 11675 11191, 11248, 11254, 11371, 10037, 10556, 10648, 10668, TVTEXT 95 10556 Weipai 10009 Akura 11982 11556, 11756 Tevion 10714, 10808, 11037, 11137, Uher 10037, 10370, 10374, 10418, Welltech 10714 11248, 11298, 11498, 11556 U 10480, 10486 Alba 11037 TCL 10706, 10698, 11027, 11537 Weltblick 10217 Texet 10009, 10217, 10218, 10374 Ultra 10092 Amstrad 11982 TCM 10714, 10808 Welton 10178 10154, 10178, 10171, 10706, Texla 10780 Ultravox 10037, 10163, 10374 Apex Digital 11943 Weltstar 11037 11755, 11149, 11037, 10714, ThemeScene 10887 Unic Line 10037, 10455 Audiovox 11937, 11951, 11952 Teac 10712, 10698, 10668, 10512, 10000, 10451, 10885, 10889, Thomas 10047, 10178, 10001, 11904 10037, 10587, 10714, 10715, Westinghouse Axion 11937, 11958 10455, 10418, 10264, 10217, United 11037, 11982 11282, 11577 10170, 10037, 10009 11447, 10047, 10037, 10109, Wharfedale 10037, 10556, 10860, 11556 B Black Diamond 11037 10009, 10037, 10163, 10217, Thomson 10287, 10335, 10343, 10560, Universal 10047, 10037 Tec 10625 11163, 11037, 10668, 10631, White 10451, 10236, 10463, 10037, Bush 10698, 11037, 11900 10335 Westinghouse 10623, 10889, 11909 Tech Line 10037, 10668, 11163 10035, 10036, 10037, 10073, 10618, 10512, 10480, 10418, C Centrum 11037 10074, 10109, 10163, 10264, 10370, 10362, 10361, 10346, Windsor 10668, 11037 Thorn Crown 11037 Techica 10218 10335, 10343, 10361, 10499, Universum 10327, 10264, 10217, 10200, Windy Sam 10556 10512 10195, 10170, 10109, 10074, D-Vision 11982 Technica 11982 Wintel 10714 D Thorn-Ferguson 10073, 10335, 10343, 10499 10070, 10037, 10036, 10011, Denver 10587 10009 World 10451, 10236, 10463, 10180 PRESET CODE  E Elfunk 11037 DMTech 31271 Broksonic 10463, 11911 Akai 20352 Palsonic 20000 F Ferguson 11037 E Elfunk 30713, 30884 Bush 11556 Alba 20352 20035, 20162, 21035, 21162, Panasonic 21262 Finlux 11556 Emerson 30675, 31268 Curtis Mathes 10051 America Action 20278 C 20035, 20037, 20240, 21035, G Goodmans 10587, 11037, 11900 ESA 31268 D Daewoo 11909 Amstrad 20000 Penney 21237 H Hitachi 11960 F Ferguson 30695, 30713, 30884 E Emerson 10236, 10463, 11909, 11911 Audiovox 20278 Philips 20081 J JDV 11982 Funai 31268 F Ferguson 10073, 10625 B Beko 20104 Portland 20637 Jensen 11933 G Goodmans 30713 Fidelity 10171 Bestar 20278 Q Quasar 20035, 20162, 21035, 21162 K KLH 11962 Grandin 30713 Funai 11904 Blue Sky 20278, 20352, 20742 R Radiola 20081 L Lenco 10587 Grundig 30539, 30695 10047, 10051, 10093, 11917, BPL 20046 RadioShack 20000 G GE 11922 Logik 11037 H Hitachi 31247 Broksonic 20002, 20479, 21479 20060, 20035, 20048, 20240, GoldStar 10037 RCA 20807, 21035, 21060 Luker 11982 I Insignia 31268 Bush 20352, 20742 Goodmans 10374, 11909 S Saba 20320 Luxor 11037 JDV 31367 Citizen 20278, 21278 J Grundig 10037, 10195, 10556 C Samsung 20240, 20432, 21014 Matsui 11037 JNC 31271 Curtis Mathes 20035, 21035 M Harley Davidson 11904 Sansui 20000, 20479, 21479 Maxim 11982 Konka 31192 H Daewoo 20278, 20637, 21278 K Hinari 10036 D Sanyo 20240 Medion 11900 Logik 30713, 30884 Dantax 20352 L Hitachi 11904 Saville 20352 Mirror 11900 Luker 31367 20002, 20278, 20479, 20637, Internal 11909 E Emerson 21278, 21479 Schneider 20081, 20000 Naiko 11982 Luxor 30713 I N JVC 11923 Ferguson 20000, 20278 Sears 20037, 20000, 21237 Narita 11982 Magnavox 31268 J F M LG 10178 Fidelity 20000 SEG 20637 Panasonic 11941 Matsui 30713, 30884 L P Lloyd’s 11904 Firstline 20278 Sharp 20037, 20048, 20807 Philips 11454, 10556, 11961 Maxim 31367 Magnavox 10054, 11904 Funai 20000 Shivaki 20037 Powerpoint 10698 Naiko 31367 M N Memorex 10250 20060, 20035, 20048, 20240, Siemens 20081 Prima 11933 Narita 31367 G GE 20807, 21035, 21060 Mitsubishi 10093, 10556, 11917 Sinudyne 20352 RCA 11948, 11958 Neovia 31271 GoldStar 20037, 20480, 21237 R Orion 10463, 11911 Sony 20032, 20000, 21232 Roadstar 11900 Orion 30695 O Goodmans 20278, 20352, 20637 O Palsonic 11904 Supra 20348 Saivod 11982 Pacific 30695 P Grandin 20278, 20742 S P Panasonic 10250, 10051 Sylvania 20081, 21781 Samsung 11903 Panasonic 31490 Grundig 20081, 20347, 20352, 20742 Penney 10051 Symphonic 20000 Schneider 11982 Philips 30539, 30854, 31260 H Hanimex 20352 Philips 10037, 10556 T Tatung 20352 SEG 11037 RCA 31022 Harley Davidson 20000 R Quasar 10250, 10051 Teac 20037, 20000, 20637, 20642 Sova 11952 Saivod 31367 Q Hinari 20352 S Radiola 10556 Technics 20081 Stevison 11982 Samsung 30899 R Hitachi 20000 RadioShack 11904 Technosonic 20352 Sylvania 10171 Sansui 30695 Hypson 20037 10047, 10051, 10093, 11917, Telefunken 20278 Teac 10698 Schneider 31367 RCA 11922 Internal 20278, 20637 T I Thomas 20000 Technica 11982 SEG 30713, 30884 Saba 10625 JBL 20278 S J Thomson 20278 Telefunken 10698 Sliding 31115 Samsung 11959 JMB 20352 Toshiba 20352, 20432, 20845, 21145 Thomson 10625 Stevison 31367 Sansui 10463, 11904, 11911 Kambrook 20037 K United 20742 Schneider 10037, 10556, 11904 Kneissel 20278, 20352 U Transonic 10587 Sylvania 30630, 30675, 31268 White U United 10587, 11037, 11982 T Technica 31367 Sears 11904 L LG 20037, 20480, 21237 W Westinghouse 20278, 20637 V Vestel 11037 Thomson 30551 Sharp 10093, 11917 Lloyd’s 20000 Z Zenith 20000, 20479, 20637, 21479 Toshiba 30695 Siemens 10037 Loewe 20037 b4 b4 United 30713, 30884, 31367 Sony 10000, 11505, 11904 M Magnasonic 20278, 21278 A Akai 30695 U T Thomson 30551 Universum 30713 Sylvania 10054 Magnavox 20081, 20000, 21781 Akura 31367 Vestel 30884 Symphonic 11904 Magnin 20240 Alba 30695, 30884 V Teac 10178, 10171 Matsui 20352, 20742 TV/VCR/DVD Combination Amstrad 31367 T Technics 10556 Medion 20352 b2, b3, b4 Apex Digital 30830 b2, b3, b4 TV/VCR Combination Thomas 11904 20162, 20037, 21162, 21237, b2 B Black Diamond 30713, 30884 Memorex 21262 b2 Thomson 10625 A Akai 11903 Broksonic 30695 MGA 20240 A Aiwa 11904, 11911 Toshiba 11971 B Broksonic 11938 Bush 30713, 30884 Mitsubishi 20048, 20081, 20043, 20807 America Action 10180 White E Emerson 11944 Centrum 30713 W 11909 C Amstrad 10171 Westinghouse O Optimus 20162, 21162, 21262 ESA 11944 Citizen 30695 Audiovox 10180 Z Zenith 11904, 11909, 11911 20002, 20352, 20479, 20742, Orion 21479 M Magnavox 11944 Crown 30713 B Beko 10486 b3 P Pace 20352 P Panasonic 11946, 11947 D D-Vision 31367 Black Diamond 11909 20000, 20352, 20479, 20742, Pacific 20742 R RCA 11953 A Aiwa 21137 10 PRESET CODE S Sharp 11917 Audiolab 20081 Crosley 20035, 20081, 20000 20037, 20045, 20042, 20043, Hughes Network Firstline 20209, 20278, 20348, 20480, Systems 20042, 20739 Sylvania 11944 Audiosonic 20278 Crown 20037, 20278, 20480 21137 Humax 20739 Symphonic 11944 Audiovox 20037, 20278, 20038 20060, 20035, 20162, 20240, 20039, 20047, 20000, 20104, Curtis Mathes 20000, 20041, 20278, 20432, Fisher 20046 Hush 21972 T Toshiba 11945 Avis 20000 21035 Flint 20209, 20348 Hypson 20037, 20000, 20209, 20278, AVP 20000, 20352 Cybernex 20240 20352, 20480 b3 Fuji 20035, 20033 Awa 20037, 20043, 20278, 20642 CyberPower 21972 Hytek 20047, 20000 S Sharp 20807 Fujitsu 20037, 20045, 20000 Baird 20000, 20104, 20041, 20278, Cyrus 20081 I iBUYPOWER 21972 B 20046, 20106 Fujitsu General 20037 b4 20037, 20045, 20104, 20209, Imperial 20000 Basic Line 20104, 20278, 20046 A Akai 30899 D Daewoo 20278, 20046, 20352, 20637, Funai 20037, 20000, 20278, 21593 Ingersol 20240, 20209 Beaumark 20240 20642, 21137, 21278 E Emerson 30821 G Galaxi 20000 Interbuy 20037 Beko 20104 Dansai 20278 ESA 30821 Galaxis 20278 Interfunk 20081, 20104 20035, 20048, 20039, 20000, Dantax 20352 M Magnavox 30821 Bell & Howell Garrard 20000 Internal 20278, 20637 20104, 20046, 20479 Daytron 20037, 20278 P Panasonic 31362, 31462 Bestar 20278 Gateway 21972 International 20037, 20278, 20642 De Graaf 20048, 20081, 20042, 20104, 20060, 20035, 20048, 20240, R RCA 31132 Black Diamond 20642 20046 20037, 20000, 20209, 20278, GE 20000, 20226, 20320, 20807, Intervision 20348 S Sharp 30630 Black Panther 20278 Decca 20081, 20000, 20067, 20209, 21035, 21060 20041, 20352 Irradio 20037, 20081, 21137 Superscan 30821 GEC 20081 Blaupunkt 20162, 20081, 20226 Degraff 20048, 20081, 20042, 20104 20240, 20104, 20041, 20046, Sylvania 30821 20037, 20209, 20278, 20348, Gemini 20060 ITT Deitron 20278 20106 Symphonic 30821 Blue Sky 20352, 20480, 20642, 20742, General 20045 ITT Nokia 20240, 20104, 20041, 20106 21137 Dell 21972 Toshiba 31045 General Technic 20348 ITV 20037, 20278 T BPL 20046 Denon 20081, 20042 Genexxa 20037, 20000, 20104, 20278 Janeil 20240 Brandt 20041, 20320 Derwent 20041 J Go Video 20240, 20432, 20614, 21137 JBL 20278 VCR Brandt Electronique 20041 Diamant 20037 20035, 20037, 20039, 20000, Jensen 20067, 20041 20037, 20240, 20000, 20278, Brinkmann 20209, 20348 Diamond 20348 GoldStar 20209, 20278, 20038, 20225, A A-Mark JMB 20209, 20348, 20352, 20742 20046 Broksonic 20184, 20121, 20209, 20002, Digitor 20642 20226, 20480, 21137, 21237 ABS 21972 20348, 20479, 21479 20037, 20081, 20240, 20000, Joyce 20000 20081, 20000, 20209, 20278, DirecTV 20739 Goodmans 20209, 20278, 20348, 20352, 20060, 20048, 20039, 20047, JVC 20184, 20081, 20045, 20067, Admiral 20104, 20121, 20209, 20479 Bush 20315, 20348, 20352, 20642, Domland 20209 20637, 20642, 20742 20041, 21162 20742 Adventura 20037, 20240, 20000 DSE 20642 GPX 20037 Kambrook 20037 C Calix 20037 K Aiko 20278 20081, 20000, 20041, 20278, Gradiente 20000 Karcher 20081, 20278, 20642 Candle 20037, 20038 Dual 20348 Aim 20278, 20348, 20642 Graetz 20240, 20104, 20041 KEC 20037, 20278 Canon 20035 Dumont 20081, 20000, 20104 20035, 20037, 20048, 20081, 20037, 20032, 20000, 20209, Kendo 20037, 20209, 20278, 20106, Aiwa 20041, 20348, 20352, 20479, Capehart 20002 Durabrand 20039, 20038, 20642 Granada 20240, 20000, 20042, 20104, 20315, 20348, 20642 20046, 20226 20742, 21137 Carena 20081, 20209 Dynatech 20240, 20000 Kenwood 20067, 20041, 20038, 20046 20037, 20000, 20209, 20278, 20037, 20240, 20041, 20106, Carrefour 20045 Elbe 20278, 20038 Grandin Akai 20315, 20348, 20352, 20642 E 20742 KIC 20000 Carrera 20240 Electrohome 20060, 20037, 20240, 20000, 20081, 20226, 20320, 20347, Kimari 20047 Akura 20041 20043, 20209 Grundig 20348, 20352, 20742 20081, 20000, 20209, 20278, Carver 20035, 20081 20037, 20209, 20278, 20348, Alba Electrophonic 20037 Haaz 20348 Kneissel 20352 20315, 20348, 20352 Casio 20000 H Elin 20240 Hanimex 20352 Kodak 20035, 20037 Alienware 21972 Cathay 20278 Elta 20278 Hanseatic 20037, 20081, 20209, 20038 Kolin 20043, 20041 Allegro 20039, 21137 CCE 20278 Emerald 20184, 20121 Haojie 20240 Kolster 20209 Allorgan 20240 CGE 20000, 20041 Emerex 20032 Harley Davidson 20000 KTV 20000 Allstar 20081 Changhong 20048, 20081 20035, 20037, 20184, 20039, Harman/Kardon 20081, 20038 Kuba 20047 America Action 20278 Cimline 20209 20240, 20045, 20000, 20121, Headquarter 20046 Kuba Electronic 20047 American High 20035, 20081 Cineral 20278 Emerson 20043, 20209, 20002, 20278, Amoisonic 20479 20348, 20479, 20637, 21278, Hewlett Packard 21972 L Lenco 20278 CineVision 21137 21479, 21593 Amstrad 20000, 20278 HI-Q 20035, 20047, 20000 20037, 20240, 20045, 20000, Citizen 20035, 20037, 20240, 20000, ESA 21137 LG 20042, 20209, 20278, 20038, 20162, 20037, 20240, 20278, 20209, 20278, 20479, 21278 20240, 20209, 20041, 20278, Anam ESC 20240, 20278 Hinari 20352 20225, 20480, 21137, 21237 20226, 20480 Classic 20037 EuroLine 21593 Hisawa 20209, 2035 Lifetec 20209, 20348 Anam National 20162, 20226, 21162, 21562 Clatronic 20000, 21593 20000, 20041, 20278, 20320, Hischito 20045 Linksys 21972 Ansonic 20000 Colortyme 20060, 20035, 20045, 20278 F Ferguson 20348 20035, 20037, 20081, 20240, Lloyd’s 20240, 20000, 20038 Aristona 20081 Colt 20000 Fidelity 20240, 20000, 20352, 20432 Hitachi 20045, 20000, 20042, 20041, Loewe 21062, 20162, 20037, 20081, ASA 20037, 20081 Combitech 20352 20037, 20048, 20081, 20000, 20046, 20089 21262, 21562 Asha 20240 Finlandia 20042, 20104, 20043, 20046, Hoeher 20278, 20642 Logik 20240, 20000, 20209, 20106 Condor 20278 20106, 20226 Astra 20035, 20240 Hornyphon 20081 Lumatron 20278, 21137 Craig 20037, 20047, 20240 Finlux 20081, 20000, 20042, 20104 Asuka 20037, 20081, 20000, 20038 Criterion 20000 Howard Computers 21972 Lunatron 21137 HP 21972

PRESET CODE 11 20048, 20047, 20104, 20043, Nebula Electronics 20033 20035, 20162, 20048, 20081, Sampo 20037, 20048 Soundmaster 20000 Luxor 20046, 20106, 20315 20045, 20000, 20209, 20226, 20035, 20037, 20048, 20104, Philips 20060, 20240, 20045, 20000, Soundwave 20037, 20209, 20348 LXI 20037, 20000, 20042, 20067 NEC 20067, 20041, 20278, 20038, 20616, 20618, 20739, 21081, Samsung 20038, 20432, 20739, 21014 21181 Stack 9 21972 M Electronic 20037, 20240, 20000, 20038 21137 Samtron 20240 M Phoenix 20278 Standard 20278 Magnadyne 20081 Neckermann 20081, 20041 Sanky 20048, 20039 Phonola 20081 Stern 20278 20037, 20240, 20000, 20278, Nesco 20000 Sansei 20048 Magnasonic Pilot 20037 STS 20042 21278 Neufunk 20209 20240, 20000, 20067, 20209, 20035, 20037, 20048, 20039, Newave 20037 Pioneer 20162, 20081, 20042, 20067 Sansui 20041, 20002, 20106, 20348, Sunkai 20209, 20278, 20348 Magnavox 20081, 20240, 20000, 20226, Polk Audio 20081 20479, 21479 20618, 20642, 21593, 21781 Nikkai 20278 Sunstar 20000 Portland 20278, 20637 20048, 20047, 20240, 20000, Magnin 20240 Nikko 20037, 20278 Sanyo 20104, 20067, 20209, 20046, Suntronic 20000 Magnum 20642 Nikkodo 20037, 20278 Presidian 21593 20348, 20479, 21137 Supra 20037, 20278, 20348 Manesth 20081, 20045, 20209 Nishi 20240 Prinz 20000 Saville 20240, 20278, 20352 Susumu 20037 Marantz 20035, 20081, 20209, 20038 Niveus Media 21972 Profitronic 20081, 20240 SBR 20081 SV2000 20000 Mark 20000, 20278 Noblex 20240 Proline 20000, 20278, 20320, 20642 ScanSonic 20240 SVA 20000 20048, 20081, 20240, 20042, Proscan 20060, 21060 20000, 20104, 20041, 20106, 20035, 20081, 20000, 20043, Marta 20037 Schaub Lorenz 20315, 20348 Sylvania Nokia 20104, 20041, 20278, 20046, Prosco 20278 21593, 21781 Mastec 20642 20106, 20315 20037, 20081, 20240, 20000, Symphonic 20240, 20000, 20002, 21593 Master’s 20278 Prosonic 20209, 20278 Schneider 20042, 20278, 20348, 20352, Nordmende 20067, 20041, 20320 20642, 21137 Systemax 21972 20037, 20240, 20209, 20278, Protec 20000 Matsui Northgate 21972 Scott 20184, 20045, 20121, 20043 T+A 20162 20348, 20352, 20742 Protech 20081 T 20035, 20162, 20081, 20226, Nu-Tec 20209 20060, 20035, 20162, 20037, Tagar Systems 21972 Matsushita 21162 ProVision 20278 20048, 20039, 20047, 20033, Oceanic 20048, 20081, 20000, 20104, Taisho 20209 Media Center PC 21972 O 20041, 20046, 20106 Pulsar 20039, 20240, 20278 Sears 20045, 20000, 20042, 20104, 20067, 20043, 20209, 20041, Tandberg 20278 Mediator 20081 Okano 20209, 20278, 20315, 20348 Pulser 20240 21237, 20046 Tandy 20000, 20104 Medion 20209, 20348, 20352, 20642 Olympus 20035, 20162, 20104, 20226 Pye 20081, 20000 Seaway 20278 Tashiko 20037, 20048, 20081, 20240, MEI 20035 Onimax 20642 Q Qisheng 20060 20081, 20240, 20278, 20637, 20000 SEG 20642 20035, 20162, 20037, 20048, Onkyo 20222 Quarter 20046 20048, 20081, 20045, 20000, 20039, 20047, 20240, 20000, 21062, 20035, 20162, 20037, Quartz 20035, 20047, 20046 SEI 20081 Tatung 20067, 20043, 20209, 20041, Memorex 20104, 20209, 20278, 20046, 20348, 20352 Optimus 20048, 20047, 20240, 20000, 20035, 20162, 20002, 20278, Sei-Sinudyne 20081 20348, 20479, 21162, 21237, 20104, 20432, 21162, 21262 Quasar Tchibo 20348 21262 20226, 21035, 21162 Seleco 20037, 20041 20184, 20240, 20000, 20104, TCM 20348 Metronic 20081 20121, 20209, 20002, 20278, Quelle 20081 Semp 20045 Orion 20037, 20000, 20067, 20041, 21062, 20162, 20037, 20081, 20348, 20352, 20479, 20742, R Radialva 20037, 20048, 20081 Sentra 20278 Teac 21479 20278, 20637, 20642, 21593 Metz 20226, 20347, 20836, 21162, Radiola 20081 20037, 20048, 20047, 20032, 20035, 20162, 20037, 20081, 21262, 21562 Orson 20000 Sharp Technics Radionette 20037, 21137 20000, 20209, 20807 20000, 20226, 21162 MGA 20060, 20240, 20043 Osaki 20037, 20000 20035, 20162, 20037, 20048, Shinco 20000 TechniSat 20348 MGN Technology 20240 Otake 20209 RadioShack 20047, 20240, 20000, 20104, Shintom 20039, 20240, 20000, 20104 Technosonic 20352 20046, 21162 Micormay 20348 Otto Versand 20081 Shivaki 20037 20035, 20037, 20048, 20041, Radix 20037 Teco Micromaxx 20209 P Pace 20352 Shogun 20240 20038 Randex 20037 Microsoft 21972 Pacific 20000, 20348, 20642, 20742 20037, 20081, 20104, 20046, Tedelex 20037, 20209, 20348, 20642 Rank 20041 Siemens Midland 20240 Packard Bell 21972 20320, 20347 Teknika 20035, 20037, 20000 Rank Arena 20041 Siera 20081 Migros 20000 Palladium 20037, 20209, 20041, 20348 Teleavia 20041 20060, 20035, 20048, 20240, Signature 20060, 20035, 20037, 20048, Telecorder 20240 Mind 21972 Palsonic 20000, 20642 20045, 20000, 20042, 20106, 20000, 20046, 20479 RCA 20209, 20041, 20278, 20320, Minolta 20042 Panama 20035 20226, 20320, 20807, 20880, Silva 20037 Telefunken 21035, 21060 20642 20060, 20048, 20047, 20081, 21062, 20035, 20162, 20000, Silver 20278 Telerent 20226 Mitsubishi 20000, 20042, 20067, 20043, 20225, 20226, 20614, 20616, 20035, 20162, 20037, 20048, 20041, 20480, 20642, 20807 Panasonic 20836, 21035, 21162, 21262, Realistic 20047, 20240, 20000, 20104, SilverCrest 20642 Telestar 20037 20121, 20278, 20046, 21162 Motorola 20035, 20048 21562 Singer 20037, 20240, 20045, 20348 Teletech 20000, 20278 Reoc 20348 MTC 20240, 20000 Pathe Cinema 20043 Sinudyne 20081, 20209, 20352 Tensai 20037, 20000, 20278 ReplayTV 20614, 20616 MTX 20000 Pathe Marconi 20041 Smaragd 20348 Tevion 20209, 20348, 20479, 20642 20035, 20162, 20037, 20047, Rex 20041 Multitec 20037 Sonic Blue 20614, 20616, 21137 Texet 20278 Penney 20081, 20240, 20000, 20042, Ricavision 21972 Multitech 20039, 20000 20067, 20038, 21035, 21237 Sonographe 20046 Thomas 20000, 20002 Rio 21137 Murphy 20000 Pentax 20042 Sonolor 20048, 20046 20060, 20067, 20041, 20278, 20037, 20081, 20240, 20278, Thomson 20320 Myryad 20081 Perdio 20000, 20209 Roadstar 20038, 20742 Sontec 20037, 20278 Thorn 20037, 20104, 20041, 20320 NAD 20240, 20104 Philco 20035, 20081, 20000, 20209, Runco 20039 Sonwa 20642 N 20038, 20226, 20479 Tisonic 20278 Naiko 20348, 20642 Saba 20041, 20278, 20320 20035, 20048, 20047, 20032, S 20033, 20000, 20067, 20046, Tivo 20618, 20636, 20739, 21996 NAP 20039 Saisho 20209, 20348 Sony 20106, 20226, 20636, 21232, TMK 20240, 20000 National 20226 Salora 20104, 20043, 20046, 20106 21972

12 PRESET CODE TNIX 20037 30690, 30695, 30705, 30770, 30672, 30651, 30695, 30699, 30490, 30784, 30705, 30714, PVR b3 30788, 30790, 30884, 30898, Blue Sky 30713, 30790, 30843, 31423 Daewoo 30770, 30833, 30869, 30872, Tocom 20240 Akai A ABS 21972 30899, 31115, 31205, 31233, Boghe 31004 31172, 31483, 31906 Tokai 20037, 20104, 20041 31695 Dalton 31036 Alienware 21972 Boman 30783, 30898, 31005 Topline 20348 Akashi 30838 Bose 32023 Dansai 30770, 30783, 31115, 31695 20081, 20240, 20045, 20000, C CyberPower 21972 AKI 31005 Brainwave 30770, 31115 Dantax 30539, 30713, 30723, 30790 20042, 20067, 20043, 20209, D Dell 21972 Akira 30699, 31321 Toshiba 20041, 20352, 20432, 20742, Daytek 30872, 31005 DirecTV 20739 30898, 31051, 31140, 31233, Brandt 30503, 30651, 30551 20845, 21008, 21145, 21972, Akura Dayton 30872 21996 G Gateway 21972 31367 Broksonic 30695 DCE 30831 Tosonic 20278 Go Video 20614 30672, 30539, 30717, 30695, 30672, 30717, 30690, 30699, Alba 30699, 30713, 30730, 30783, 30713, 30723, 30730, 30831, Decca 30770, 31115 Totevision 20037, 20240 Hewlett Packard 21972 30884, 31140, 31530, 31695 Bush H 30833, 30884, 31051, 31140, 30490, 30634, 31634, Touch 21972 Howard Computers 21972 Alco 30790 31483, 31695, 31832 Denon [32134]z Alize 31151 Byd:sign 30872 Toyoda 20278 HP 21972 Denver 30672, 30699, 30788, 30898, Tradex 20081 Hughes Network All-Tel 31451 C C-Tech 30798, 31152 31056, 31104, 31321, 31923 Systems 20739 Denzel 30665 Triad 20278 Allegro 30869 California Audio Labs 30490 Humax 20739 Desay 30843, 31212 Trix 20037 Altacom 31224 Cambridge Audio 30751, 31109 Hush 21972 Dgtec 30672 U Uher 20240 Amitech 30784, 30770, 30850 Cambridge 30690 I iBUYPOWER 21972 Soundworks Diamond 30651, 30751, 30768, 30790 Ultra 20045, 20278 Amoi 30852 L Linksys 21972 Campomatic Digital 31051 Digihome 30713 Ultravox 20278 Amphion Media 30872 M Media Center PC 21972 Works Cat 30699, 30789, 31421, 31923 DigiLogic 30713 Unitech 20240 Microsoft 21972 Amstrad 30713, 30770, 31151, 31367 CCE 30730 digiRED 30717 United 20348, 20742, 21593 Mind 21972 AMW 30872 Celestial 31020 20037, 20081, 20240, 20000, Digitech 31832 Anam 31913 cello 31730 Universum 20104, 20209, 20106, 20348, N Niveus Media 21972 Digitor 30651, 30690, 30833, 31005, 21137 Northgate 21972 Ansonic 30759, 30774, 30831 Centrex 30672, 31004 31423 Digitrex 30672, 31004, 31056 V Vector 20045 P Panasonic 20614, 20616 30533, 30672, 30717, 30755, Centrum 30713, 30789, 31005, 31227, Vector Research 20184, 20038 Apex Digital 30794, 30796, 30797, 30830, 31923 DiK 30831 Philips 20618, 20739 31004, 31020, 31056, 31061 CGV 30751, 31115 Victor 20067, 20041 Dinamic 30788 R RCA 20880 Aristona 30539, 30646 Changhong 30627, 31061 Video Concepts 20045 Disney 30675, 30831, 31270 ReplayTV 20614, 20616 Arrgo 31023 Cinea 30831, 30841 Video Technic 20000 DiViDo 30705 S Samsung 20739 ASCOMTEC 31923 Cinetec 30713, 30872 Videomagic 20037 DK Digital 30831 Sonic Blue 20614, 20616 Asono 31224 cineULTRA 30699 Videosonic 20240, 20000 DMTech 30783, 31271 Sony 20636, 21972 Aspire Digital 31168 CineVision 30833, 30869, 31483 Viewsonic 21972 Dragon 30831 Stack 9 21972 Atacom 31224 Citizen 30695 Villain 20000 DreamX 31151 Systemax 21972 Audiosonic 30690, 31923 Clairtone 30571 Voodoo 21972 DSE 30833, 31152, 31730 T Tagar Systems 21972 Audiovox 30717, 30790 20060, 20035, 20037, 20048, Classic 30730, 31730 30651, 30665, 30675, 30713, 20039, 20047, 20081, 20033, Tivo 20618, 20636, 20739 Audioworld 30790 Clatronic 30672, 30675, 30788, 31233 Dual 30730, 30783, 30790, 30831, 31023 W Wards 20240, 20045, 20000, 20042, Toshiba 21008, 21972, 21996 Autovox 30713 Clayton 30713 20043, 20041, 20038, 20046, Touch 21972 Durabrand 30713, 30831, 31023, 31502 20479 Auvio 30843 30730, 30852, 31086, 31321, Coby 31923 DVD2000 30521 Watson 20081, 20352, 20642 V Viewsonic 21972 Awa 30730, 30872 Codex 31233 DVX 30768 Weltblick 20037 Voodoo 21972 Axion 30730 Commax 31321 E E:max 31233, 31321 Wharfedale 20642 Z ZT Group 21972 B Base 31451 Conia 30672, 30852, 31321 EagleTec 30714 White 20000, 20209, 20278, 20479, Basic Line 30713 Contel 30788 eBench 31152 Westinghouse 20637 Baze 30898 World 20209, 20002, 20348, 20479 DVD Player Continental Edison 30831, 30872 ECC 30730 BBK 30862, 31224 XR-1000 20035, 20240, 20000 3D LAB 30503, 30539 Craig 30831 Eclipse 30723, 30751 X 1 Beep 31163 Yamaha 20041, 20038 4Kus 31158 Creative 30503, 30539 Elfunk 30713, 30850, 30884 Y Bellagio 31004 Yamishi 20278 A-Trend 30714 Crown 30690, 30713, 30770, 31115 Elin 30770 A Belson 31086, 31923 Yoko 20037, 20240 Acoustic Solutions 30713, 30730, 31228 Crypto 31228 Elite 31152 Binatone 31923 20037, 20039, 20033, 20000, AEG 30770, 30788, 30790, 31923 Curtis Mathes 31087 Ellion 30850, 31421 Zenith 20209, 20041, 20278, 20479, Black Diamond 30713, 30833, 30884 Z AFK 31051, 31152, 31923 Cybercom 30831 30672, 30690, 30770, 30788, 20637, 21137, 21479 Blaupunkt 30717 Aim 30672, 30699, 30833 30714, 30816, 30874, 31023, Elta 30850, 31051, 31115, 31151, ZT Group 21972 Blu:sens 31233, 31321 CyberHome 31233 30672, 31005, 31224, 31250, 31024, 31117, 31129, 31502 ZX 20209, 20348, 20352 Airis Eltax 31233, 31321 31321, 31345 Blue Nova 31321 Cytron 30651, 30705, 30774, 31347 International 30591, 30675, 30705, 30821, Aiwa 30533, 30641 D-Vision 31115, 31367 Emerson Blue Parade 30571 D 31268 Daenyx 30872 Enterprise 30591

PRESET CODE 13 Entivo 30503, 30539 Home Electronics 30730, 30770 30591, 30741, 30790, 30869, Mitsubishi 31521, 30521, 30713, 31403 Philo 31345 LG 31906 Enzer 30784, 30770, 31228 Home Tech Industries 31224 Mizuda 30770, 31451 Phonotrend 30699 Lifetec 30651, 30831, 31347 ESA 30821, 31268 Hoyo 30665 Monyka 30665 PianoDisc 31024 Limit 30768, 31104 EuroLine 30675, 30788, 31115, 31233 Humax 30646 MPX 30843 30490, 30525, 30571, 30631, LiteOn 31058, 31158 Pioneer 31965 Fenner 30651 Hyundai 30783, 30850, 31061, 31228 Mustek 30730, 31730 F Lodos 30713 Plu2 30850 30651, 30695, 30713, 30884, I iLo 31348 Mx Onda 30651, 30751, 31223 Ferguson 30898, 31695, 31730 Loewe 30539, 30511, 30741, 30885 Pointer 30784 Ingelen 30788 Mystral 30831 30672, 30591, 30741, 30751, Logik 30713, 30884 Polaroid 31020, 31061, 31086 Finlux 30770, 30783 Ingersol 31023 NAD 30741 Logix 30705, 30783 N Polk Audio 30539 30651, 30713, 30843, 30869, Initial 30839, 30717 Naiko 30770, 31004, 31367 Firstline 31530 Luker 31367 Portland 30770 Inno Hit 30713 Narita 31367 Fisher 30670 30695, 30705, 30713, 30741, Powerpoint 30872, 31005 Insignia 31268 Lumatron 30833, 31115, 31321, 31832 NEC 30741, 30869, 31404 Funai 30675, 30695, 31268 Presidian 30675 Integra 30571, 30627, 31634 Lunatron 30741 Neovia 31271 Fusion 30862 Prima 31228 Irradio 30869, 31115, 31224, 31233 Luxman 30573 Nesa 30717 G Gateway 31158 Prinz 30831 IRT 30783 Luxor 30713, 31004, 31695, 31730 Neufunk 30665 GE 30522, 30815, 30717 Prism 30705, 30831 ISP 30695 Magnasonic 30651, 30675 Nevir 30770, 30831, 31197 General Electric 30717 M Pro2 31345 Jamo 31036 Magnat 31923 NexxTech 31402 Germatic 31051 J ProCaster 31004 Jaton 30665 30503, 30539, 30646, 30675, Nikkai 31923 Global Link 31224 Magnavox 30713, 30821, 30885, 31140, Proceed 30672 JBL 30702 Nintaus 31051, 31202 Global Solutions 30768 31268 30672, 30651, 30686, 30833, JDB 30730 Niro 32024 Proline 31004, 31483 Global Sphere 31152 Magnex 30723 Proscan 30522 30573, 30744, 30717, 30715, JDV 31367 Majestic 31345 Norcent 30872, 31923 Jeken 30699 Nordmende 30774, 30831 Proson 30713 Go Video 30741, 30783, 30833, 30869, Manhattan 30705, 30713 31044, 31075, 31099, 31158, Jepssen 31250 Noriko 30752 Prosonic 30699, 30752 31483, 31730 Marantz 30503, 30539, 30675 JMB 30695 Mark 30713 Nova 31923 30699, 30730, 31163, 31321, GoldStar 30591, 30741, 30869 ProVision 31923 JNC 30672, 31271 Nowa 30843 30651, 30690, 30713, 30723, Marquant 30770 Pye 30539, 30646 Goodmans 30730, 30783, 30790, 30833, JSI 31423 30672, 30651, 30695, 30713, Nu-Tec 31228 31004, 31140, 31423, 31530, Matsui 30884, 31004, 31695, 31730 Q QONIX 31051 JVC 30503, 30539, 30558, 30623, O Okano 30752 31730, 31923 30867, 31164, 31597, 31860 Maxdorf 30788 Qwestar 30651 GP Audio 31140 Olidata 30672 jWin 31051 Maxent 31347 R Radionette 30741, 30869, 31906, 32024 GPX 30699, 30741 Omni 30690, 30833, 30838, 30862, K Kansas Technologies 31233, 31530 Maxim 30713, 30872, 31367 31104, 31832 RadioShack 30571 Gradiente 30490, 30651 Karcher 30783 Maya 31345 Onix 30838 Raite 30665 Graetz 30665 Kawasaki 30790 MBO 30690, 30730, 31730 Onkyo 30503, 30627 30522, 30571, 30717, 30790, Gran Prix 30831, 30898 RCA 30822, 31022, 31132, 31769, Kendo 30672, 30699, 30713, 30831 McIntosh 31533 Oopla 31158 31913, 31965 Grandin 30713, 31233 Kennex 30713, 30770, 30898 MDS 30713 Oppo 31224 Realistic 30571 Greenhill 30717 Kenwood 30490, 30534 Mecotek 30770 Optim 30843 REC 30490 30539, 30651, 30551, 30670, Kiiro 30770 30651, 30630, 30774, 30783, Optimus 30525, 30571 30759, 30763, 30770, 30788, Grundig 30686, 30695, 30705, 30713, Redstar 30775, 30790, 31004, 31036, Kiss 30665, 30841, 31523 Medion 30831, 31006, 31270, 31345, Orbit 30872 30898, 31345, 31923 31347, 31423 Relisys 31347 31695, 31730, 31832, 31920 KLH 30815, 30717, 30790, 31020 Orion 30695, 31233, 31695 Grunkel 30770, 30790, 30831 MEI 30790 Reoc 30752, 30768 Kloss 30533 Oritron 30651 30713, 30841, 30850, 31233, Memorex 30690, 30695, 30831, 31270 Revoy 30699, 30841 H H & B 31421 Koda 31230 Ormond 30713 Metronic 30690 Rex 30838 Haaz 30751, 31152 Konka 31192 P P&B 31451 Metz 30525, 30571, 30713 Richmond 31233 Haier 30843 Koss 30651, 31061, 31423 Pacific 30695, 30713, 30759, 30768, MiCO 30723, 30751, 31223 30790, 30831 Rio 30869 Hanseatic 30741, 30783, 30790 Kreisen 31421 Micromaxx 31695 Packard Bell 30831 30672, 30690, 30699, 30713, Harman/Kardon 30582, 30702 KXD 31321, 31923 Micromedia 30503, 30539 Palladium 30695, 30713, 31906, 31920 Roadstar 30730, 30833, 30898, 31051, HCM 30788 Lasonic 30627, 30798, 30789 31227 L Micromega 30539, 31005 Palsonic 30672, 30852, 31056, 31321 Lawson 30768 Rocksonic 30789 HDT 30705 Microsoft 30522, 31708 30503, 30490, 30571, 30703, Ronin 30872 HE 30730, 31163, 31923 Lecson 31533 Microstar 30831 Panasonic 31362, 31462, 31490, 31579, 31762, 31834, 31905, 31908 Rotel 30558, 30623 Henss 30713 Leiker 30872 Minato 30752 30651, 30699, 30713, 30770, Panda 30717, 30789, 31203 Rowa 30717, 30759, 30872, 31004 HiMAX 30843 Lenco Minax 30713 30774 peeKTon 30898, 31224 Rownsonic 30789 Hitachi 30573, 30664, 30665, 30713, Minerva 30705 31247, 31920 Lenoir 31228 Philco 30690, 30862 Saba 30651, 3055 Minoka 30770, 31115 S Hiteker 30672, 31923 Lenoxx 30690, 30838 30503, 30539, 30646, 30675, Sabaki 30798 30651, 30713, 30831, 31004, Lexia 30699, 30768 Mintek 30839, 30717 Philips 30854, 30885, 31158, 31260, Hoeher 31267, 31340, 31354 Saivod 30759, 30831, 31367 31224 Mirror 30752

14 PRESET CODE Salora 30741 Soundmax 30768 Tredex 30843 A Airis 31321 Mitsubishi 31403 Sampo 30752, 31321, 31347 Soundwave 30783 TruVision 31451 Akira 31321 Mustek 31730 30490, 30573, 30744, 30199, Spectra 30872 Tsinghua Tongfang 31205 Alba 31530 N NEC 31404 Samsung 30820, 30899, 31044, 31075, 30651, 30768, 30788, 30831, TSM 31224 Apex Digital 31056 O Oopla 31158 31635, 31932 Standard 30898 30784, 30695, 30751, 30763, Umax 30690, 31151 Aristona 30646 Palsonic 31056, 31321 Star Clusters 31152, 31227 U P Sansui 30768, 31051, 31228, 31230, Unimax 30770 Aspire Digital 31168 Panasonic 30490, 31579 31695, 31832 Starlogic 31005 30675, 30695, 30699, 30713, B Belson 31086 Philips 30646, 31158 Sanyo 30670, 30675, 30695, 30713, Starmedia 31005, 31224 United 30730, 30788, 30884, 31115, 30873, 31228 Cat 31421 Pioneer 30631 Stevison 31367 31152, 31228, 31367, 31832 C Scan 30705, 30850 30591, 30713, 30741, 30790, cello 31730 Polaroid 31086 Strong 30713 Universum ScanMagic 30730, 31730 30869, 31227, 31530, 31913 Centrum 31227 ProVision 31321 Sunkai 30770, 30850 Uptek 30763 ScanSonic 31695 Classic 31730 Pye 30646 Sunstech 30831 upXus 31345 Schaub Lorenz 30770, 30788, 31115, 31151 Coby 31086 R RCA 30522 Sunwood 30788, 30898 Urban Concepts 30503, 30539 30539, 30646, 30651, 30705, Commax 31321 Relisys 31347 Schneider 30713, 30774, 30783, 30788, Superscan 30821 US Logic 30839 30790, 30831, 30869, 31367 Conia 31321 Roadstar 31227 Supervision 30768, 31152 Venturer 30790 Schwaiger 30752 V CyberHome 31129, 31502 S Sampo 31347 SVA 30672, 30717, 30752, 31105 Vestel 30713, 30884, 31530 Scientific Labs 30768 Cytron 31347 Samsung 30490, 31635 Sylvania 30630, 30675, 30821, 31268 Victor 31597 Scott 30672, 30651, 31005, 31036, D Denon 30490 ScanMagic 31730 31233, 31423 Symphonic 30675, 30821, 31268 Vieta 30705 Denver 31056 Schneider 30646 Seeltech 31224, 31451 Synn 30768 Viewmaster 30862, 31224 Digitrex 31056 SEG 31530 30798, 30665, 30713, 30763, T Tandberg 30713, 31695 Voxson 30690, 30730, 30774, 30831 SEG 30872, 30884, 31483, 31530 DSE 31730 Sensory Science 31158 Tangent 31321 Vtrek 31228 Sensory Science 31158 Durabrand 31502 Sharp 30630, 30675 Targa 31227 Shanghai 30672 W Waitec 31151, 31224, 31233 E E:max 31321 31033, 31070, 31431, 31433, Tatung 30770, 31695 Sony 31536 30630, 30675, 30713, 30752, Walkvision 30717 Ellion 31421 Sharp 31256, 32015, 32024 Tchibo 30741 Star Clusters 31227 Waltham 31530 Eltax 31321 Sharper Image 31117 TCL 31180 Sylvania 30675 Welkin 30831 Emerson 30675 Sherwood 30717, 30741, 30770 TCM 30741, 30790 Wellington 30713 T Tangent 31321 F Ferguson 31730 Shinco 30717 30571, 30717, 30675, 30741, Weltstar 30713 Targa 31227 Teac 30759, 30768, 30790, 30833, Firstline 31530 Shinsonic 30533, 30839 Teac 31227 31006, 31197, 31227 Wesder 30699 Funai 30675 Siemssen 31382 Tec 30898 30686, 30751, 30752, 30790, Techwood 31530 Wharfedale 31832 G Gateway 31158 Sigmatek 31005, 31224 Technica 31367, 31695 Tevion 31227, 31347, 31730 Wilson 30831, 31233 Go Video 30741, 31158, 31730 Siltex 31224 Technics 30490, 30703, 31905 Thomson 30551 Windsor 30713 Goodmans 31530, 31730 Silva 30788, 30898 Technika 30770, 30831, 31115, 31695 Toshiba 31510 Windy Sam 30573 GPX 30741 Silva Schneider 30831, 30898 Technisson 31115 U Universum 31227, 31530 WIZE 31115 Grundig 31730 SilverCrest 31152 Technosonic 30730, 31051, 31115 V Vestel 31530 Woxter 31005, 31151, 31224 H H & B 31421 Simaudio 30885 Techwood 30713, 31530 Victor 31597 X Xbox 30522, 31708 Humax 30646 Singer 30690, 30751, 30768 Tedelex 30690, 30768, 31004, 31228 W Waltham 31530 Xenius 30790 I iLo 31348 Sistemas 30672 30789, 30790, 30833, 31483, Y Yakumo 31056 Telefunken XLogic 30768, 31152, 31228 JVC 31164, 31597 Skantic 30539, 30713 31832, 31923 J Yamada 31056, 31158 Teletech 30713, 30768 XMS 30770, 30788 Kansas Technologies 31530 Skymaster 30730, 30768 K Yamaha 30646 Tensai 30651, 30690, 30770 Xoro 31183, 31250 Kreisen 31421 Skyworth 30898 Yukai 31730 30651, 30798, 30768, 30833, Yakumo 31004, 31056 KXD 31321 Sliding 31115 Y Zenith 30741 Tevion 30898, 31036, 31227, 31347, 30872, 31004, 31056, 31151, LG 30741 Z Slim Art 30784 31382, 31483, 31730, 31923 Yamada L 31158 Lifetec 31347 SM Electronic 30690, 30730, 30768, 31152 Theta Digital 30571 30490, 30539, 30646, 30545, Yamaha LiteOn 31158 Smart 30705, 30713 Thomson 30522, 30511, 30551 31354 Yamakawa 30665, 30872, 31104 Loewe 30741 Sonai 30755 Tivo 31503 Yukai 30730, 31730 Lumatron 31321 Sonashi 30831 30784, 30665, 30788, 30790, Tokai 30898 Zenith 30503, 30591, 30741, 30869, Luxor 31730 Sonic Blue 30573, 30715, 30783, 30869, Z 31906 31099 Tom-Tec 30789 Magnavox 30646, 30675 Zeus 30784 M 30533, 31533, 30864, 30573, Top Suxess 31224 Matsui 31730 Sony 30630, 30772, 31033, 31070, 30503, 30573, 30539, 30695, 31431, 31433, 31536, 31633, Toshiba 31045, 31154, 31503, 31510, Maxent 31347 31769, 31981, 32043 31769 DVD Recorder MBO 31730 Sound Color 31233 TRANS-continents 30831, 30872, 31321, 31327 1 4Kus 31158 Medion 31347 Soundmaster 30768 Transonic 30730 MiCO 30751

PRESET CODE 15 DVD preset codes b1 : These preset codes can be recorded in the SAT/CBL mode. DVD-Voreinstellungscodes b1 : Diese voreingestellten Codes können im SAT/CBL-Modus aufgenommen werden. Codes préréglés DVD b1 : Ces codes de présélection peuvent être enregistrés en mode SAT/CBL. Codici di preselezione DVD 32134 30490 b1 : I codici preimpostati possono essere registrati nel modo SAT/CBL. Códigos de preajuste de DVD b1 : Es posible guardar estos códigos preajustados en el modo SAT/CBL. DVD-voorkeuzecodes b1 : Deze voorkeuzecodes kunnen worden opgenomen in de SAT/CBL-modus. Förinställda DVD-koder b1 : Dessa förinställningskoder kan lagras i SAT/CBL-läget. e b Model No. DVD-550 DVD-2800g DVD-800 2 : These preset codes can be recorded in the TV mode. Modellnr DVD-700 DVD-2900 DVD-1600 b1 : Diese voreingestellten Codes können im TV-Modus aufgenommen werden. Modéle numéro DVD-900 DVD-2910 DVD-2000 b1 : Ces codes de présélection peuvent être enregistrés en mode TV. Modello No DVD-1000 DVD-2930 DVD-2500 b1 : I codici preimpostati possono essere registrati nel modo TV. Nº de modelo DVD-1400 DVD-3800 DVD-3000 b1 : Es posible guardar estos códigos preajustados en el modo TV. Modelnr DVD-1500 DVD-3910 DVD-3300 b1 : Deze voorkeuzecodes kunnen worden opgenomen in de TV-modus. Modellnr DVD-1710 DVD-3930 b1 : Dessa förinställningskoder kan lagras i TV-läget. DVD-1910 DVD-A11 b DVD-1930 DVD-A1 3 : These preset codes can be recorded in the VCR mode. DVD-2200 DVD-A1XV b1 : Diese voreingestellten Codes können im VCR-Modus aufgenommen werden. DVD-2800 b1 : Ces codes de présélection peuvent être enregistrés en mode VCR. b1 : I codici preimpostati possono essere registrati nel modo VCR. z [ ] : Preset codes set upon shipment from the factory. b1 : Es posible guardar estos códigos preajustados en el modo VCR. z [ ] : Sie Voreinstellungscodes wurden vor der Auslieferung werkseitig eingestellt. b1 : Deze voorkeuzecodes kunnen worden opgenomen in de VCR-modus. z [ ] : Les codes préréglés diffèrent en fonctiom des livraison de l’usine. b1 : Dessa förinställningskoder kan lagras i VCR-läget. [ ]z: I codici di presettaggio sono impostati in fabbrica prima della consegna. b4 : These preset codes can be recorded in the DVD mode. [ ]z: Los códigos vienen preprogramados de fábrica. b1 : Diese voreingestellten Codes können im DVD-Modus aufgenommen werden. [ ]z: Vooringestelde codes bij hey verlaten van de fabriek. b1 : Ces codes de présélection peuvent être enregistrés en mode DVD. [ ]z: Förinställda koder har ställts in vid transporten från fabriken. b1 : I codici preimpostati possono essere registrati nel modo DVD. b1 : Es posible guardar estos códigos preajustados en el modo DVD. b1 : Deze voorkeuzecodes kunnen worden opgenomen in de DVD-modus. b1 : Dessa förinställningskoder kan lagras i DVD-läget.

16 PRESET CODE www.denon.com Denon Brand Company, D&M Holdings Inc. Printed in China 00D 511 4731 202B